JP6915653B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some such gaming machine, for example, triggered by the end of state per advantageously degree is capable of setting a higher gaming state, Ru Monogaa that aim the interest improved.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392

However, further interest towards the top has been demanded.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a discriminating means for executing discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition and a specific game executing means for executing a specific game for showing the discriminating result of the discriminating means. With respect to the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the game result of the specific game being the game result corresponding to the predetermined specific determination result, and the privilege game. as state after game state is completed, the first state, a second state that is advantageous to the player than the first state, and at least including plurality Urn Chi 1 state the settable state setting means In the first state, the state setting means for setting the second state based on the fact that at least a predetermined specific condition different from the execution of the privilege game is satisfied in the first state is provided. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the second state corresponding to the number of game times of the specific game corresponding to the established specific condition is set regardless of the time when the specific condition is satisfied in the first game state. By setting at least, the degree of advantage is likely to be higher than when the first state is continued without satisfying the specific condition in the first state, and the specific condition in the first gaming state is likely to be higher. It is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of advantage is higher than the case where the first state is continued based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in the first state regardless of the time when the first state is established. executable der a is, the specific conditions, Ru conditions der which can hold a predetermined probability every time the determination condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 can be played using a predetermined gaming medium in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a specific game execution means that executes a specific game for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a game of the specific game. After the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the game state related to the privilege game are completed based on the result being the game result corresponding to the predetermined specific determination result. as the state, the first state, a second state that is advantageous to the player than the first state, and at least including plurality Urn Chi 1 state the settable state setting means, it said in the first state A state setting means for setting the second state based on the fact that at least a predetermined specific condition different from the execution of the privilege game is satisfied, and the specific condition is satisfied in the first state. Based on this, regardless of the time when the specific condition is satisfied in the first game state, at least the second state corresponding to the number of game times of the specific game that is satisfied according to the specific condition is set. In the first state, the degree of advantage is likely to be higher than in the case where the specific condition is not satisfied and the first state is continued, regardless of the time when the specific condition is satisfied in the first gaming state. based on the fact that the specific condition is met in the first state, Ri executable der a specific effect which can suggest advantageous degree that is higher than when the first state has continued to the player, the specific conditions, Ru conditions der which can hold a predetermined probability every time the determination condition is satisfied.

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in the game of Yu technique's.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a detour of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. , It is a block diagram which showed the regulation contents of the 1st type selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit type selection table for special figure 1, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit type selection table for special figure 2. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the probabilistic jackpots A1 to A64 and the time-saving period, and (b) schematically shows the distribution of the time-short-term when the probabilistic jackpot A is obtained. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the probabilistic jackpots C1 to C6 and the time-saving period, and (b) schematically shows the distribution of the time-short-term when the probabilistic jackpot C is obtained. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the special figure variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special figure 2 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the common probability variation non-time saving selection table. (A) is a block diagram showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal / probabilistic time reduction selection table of the normal figure, (c). Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the selection table for non-time saving. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the state setting table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the method of the state transition of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the contents of the back setting table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the back A time setting table, and (c) is the back B time setting table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the rear C time setting table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the notification time switching table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ceiling reset setting table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the rear rear setting table for notification, (c). Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surfaces B to G. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an actual display screen when the back surface A is set, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an actual display screen when the back surface A is set. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an actual display screen when the back surface C is set, and (b) is a continuous advance notice effect started with the back surface C set. It is a schematic diagram which shows the actual display screen of the case schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an actual display screen during the continuous advance notice effect, and (b) is a hold ball corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the end of the continuous advance notice effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the broadcast image which is displayed in the case. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an actual display screen in the fourth variable effect of the continuous advance notice effect, and (b) is an actual display screen in the final variable effect of the continuous advance notice effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example schematically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an actual display screen when the back surface D is set, and (b) is an actual jackpot when the back surface D is set. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 prize processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-back back setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the back setting process at the time of disconnection executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous notice setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the ceiling notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block showing the specified contents of the first type selection table in the second embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit type selection table for special figure 1 in the second embodiment, and (b) is the hit type selection table for special figure 2 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block showing the contents of the special figure variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the selection table for other than the special figure 1 consecutive villa in the second embodiment, and (b) is the selection for other than the special figure 2 consecutive villa in the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table schematically, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the selection table for the common consecutive villa state in the second embodiment schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall lottery table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second embodiment. Is. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the method of the state transition of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the second control mode. It is a block diagram which shows. (A) is a block diagram showing the contents of the notice type determination table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) constitutes the notice type determination table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically shows the content of the notice notice determination table, and (c) is the schematic diagram which schematically shows the content of the real notice judgment table which constitutes the notice type judgment table in 2nd Embodiment. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the value of the notice start flag and the notice type in the second embodiment, and (b) is the value of the notice type flag in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship with the notice type schematically. (A) is a time chart showing the transition of the effect when the long notice is selected as the notice type in the second embodiment, and (b) is the short notice selected as the notice type in the second embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the transition of the production when it is done. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the transition of the effect when the reverse effect is executed. (A) is a time chart showing the transition of the effect when the special notice effect A is executed in the second embodiment, and (b) is the case where the special notice effect B is executed in the second embodiment. It is a time chart showing the transition of the production. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an actual display screen when the preparation mode is set and the back surface H is set in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the back surface H in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the consecutive villa mode notification effect that is executed when a big hit is made in the state of being played. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an actual display screen when the back surface I is set in the consecutive villa mode in the second embodiment, and (b) is the back surface I in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an actual display screen when a big hit is made in the state where is set. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an actual display screen when the preparation mode notice effect is executed in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view showing the special notice effect A in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the actual display screen when it is executed. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a display screen in a state before the special advance notice effect B is executed in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view of the special notification effect B in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the actual display screen at the start of execution. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an actual display screen during execution of the special notification effect B in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an actual display screen during the Gase preparation mode notice effect in the second embodiment, and (b) is a case where the reverse effect is executed in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the actual display screen schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-back back setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the back setting process 2 at the time of disconnection executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous advance notice execution determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice start flag setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state look-ahead processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a stop command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed the content of the type selection table for special figure 1 in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the content of the hit type selection table for special figure 2 in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the RAM provided in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the method of the state transition of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. In the third embodiment, it is a time chart showing the transition of the effect when the long notice is selected as the notice type in the consecutive villa mode 1, and (b) is the time chart showing the transition of the effect in the consecutive villa mode 1 in the third embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the transition of an effect when a short notice is selected as a notice type. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an actual display screen when the continuous villa mode notice effect A is executed in the third embodiment, and (b) is a continuous villa mode in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the actual display screen when the notice effect B is executed. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an actual display screen when the advance notice effect is executed during the consecutive villa mode 1 in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the continuous villa mode 1 in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the actual display screen when the transition to the continuous villa mode 2 is notified by the advance notice effect during the villa mode 1. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an actual display screen of the consecutive villa mode 2 in the third embodiment, and (b) is a preparation mode during the consecutive villa mode 1 in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the actual display screen in the case of falling. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the end-time setting process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-back back setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the back setting process at the time of consecutive villas executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern selection process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice start flag setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing the transition of the effect in the case where the continuous villa mode is set after the advance notice effect in the modified example of the second embodiment, and (b) is the advance notice effect in the modified example of the second embodiment. It is a time chart showing the transition of the production when the mode is not changed to the consecutive villa mode later.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect content of the super reach displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. Be done. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball passes through the normal entrance 67. If this is the case, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) will be held. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is judged as a special symbol big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and either the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time, and the opening is opened. Is repeated the number of times (1 round or 4 rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than usual. The types of jackpots for special symbols are "normal jackpot A", "normal jackpot B", "probability change jackpot A1" to "probability change jackpot A64", "probability change jackpot B", "probability change jackpot C1" to "probability change jackpot C6", 74 types of "probability change jackpot D" are provided, and after the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game value (game value) according to these jackpot types is given to the player. NS.

Whether the first specific winning opening 65a is opened or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is determined according to the jackpot type. Specifically, when the "probability change jackpot A1" to "probability change jackpot A64" and "probability change jackpot B" are won, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined time (0.2 seconds have passed) in each round of the jackpot. It will be released until you do, or until 5 balls are won. Since it is difficult for the player to win the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 0.2 seconds, in most cases where the above jackpot is won, the player is in a special gaming state without getting the prize ball. It will be terminated. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type other than the above, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until five balls win) in each round of jackpot. Therefore, in many cases, when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, five balls can be won in each round of the jackpot.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when a ball is inserted into the first specific winning opening 65 and the second specific winning opening 650a, 12 prize balls are paid out. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a jackpot (“normal jackpot A”, “normal jackpot B”, “probability variation jackpot C”) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened only for one round (once), There is a jackpot (“big hit D”) that is open for 4 rounds (4 times). In the jackpot where the second specific prize opening 650a is opened only for one round (once), a maximum of 60 prize balls (5 x 12 x 1 round) are paid out, so that the player can obtain the prize balls. Considering the number of balls launched, the player can increase the number of balls held by about 50 before and after the big hit. That is, the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot and the balls launched by the player during the jackpot is about 50 balls. Similarly, in the jackpot where the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for 4 rounds (4 times), a maximum of 240 prize balls are paid out, so considering the number of balls launched by the player to obtain the prize balls, Before and after the jackpot, the player can increase the number of balls he has by about 200 balls. That is, the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot and the balls launched by the player during the jackpot is about 200 balls.

When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and the lottery result is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. On the other hand, if the ball enters the second entry port 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is discarded without being held. In the following description, for convenience, the lottery of the special symbol performed based on entering the ball into the first entrance 64 is referred to as the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery of the special symbol 1), and the second entrance is referred to as the second entrance. The lottery of the special symbol performed based on entering the ball in 640 is called the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery of the special symbol 2).

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It will be easy. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640, and as a result, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn. In addition, when the period during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is referred to below, it is assumed that the opening period and the ending period (ball brushing period) based on the hitting of the normal symbol are also included. That is, in the case of "the electric accessory 640a is released for 1 second", the opening period is set based on the hit of the normal symbol, and after the opening period ends, the electric accessory 640a is released and the second entry is made. It means that the ball is set to be able to enter the ball mouth 640, then the electric accessory 640a is closed and the ending period is set, and the period until the ending period ends is 1 second. is doing. Therefore, the period during which the electric accessory 640a is actually open is configured to be slightly shorter than 1 second.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second or 300 seconds) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

As described above, the types of jackpots for special symbols include "normal jackpot A", "normal jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot A1" to "probability variation jackpot A64", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C1" to "probability variation jackpot C1". There are 74 types of "Probability change jackpot C6" and "Probability variation jackpot D".

When it becomes "normal jackpot A" or "normal jackpot B", the number of rounds is one round of special gaming state (one round jackpot), and no added value is added after the jackpot ends. In addition, when "Probability change jackpot A1" to "Probability change jackpot A64" and "Probability change jackpot B" are reached, the number of rounds is 4 rounds in a special gaming state (4 rounds jackpot), and then as added value after the jackpot ends. , Move to the high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). In addition, in "Probability change jackpot A1" to "Probability variation jackpot A64", as an added value after the end of the jackpot, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases for a period specified for each jackpot type. For example, in "Probability change jackpot A5", the probability of winning a normal symbol increases from the end of the jackpot until the lottery of special symbols is completed five times, and in "Probability variation jackpot A46", the lottery of special symbols is completed after the end of the jackpot. Until the end of 73 times, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases (see FIG. 9A). The correspondence between the jackpot type and the period during which the hit probability of the normal symbol increases will be described later with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10.

From "Probability change jackpot C1" to "Probability change jackpot C6", the number of rounds becomes 1 round special game state (1 round jackpot), and after that, as an added value after the jackpot ends, a high probability state (special) of a special symbol Move to (during probabilistic change of design). In addition, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases for a period specified for each jackpot type. For example, in "Probability change jackpot C1", the probability of winning a normal symbol increases from the end of the jackpot until the lottery of the special symbol ends 10 times, and in "Probability variation jackpot C5", the lottery of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot Until the end of 80 times, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases (see FIG. 10 (a)).

Furthermore, when it becomes "Probability change jackpot A", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 4 rounds (4 rounds jackpot), and then, as an added value after the jackpot ends, it goes to a high probability state of a special symbol (during the probability change of a special symbol). It shifts, but the probability of hitting a normal symbol does not increase.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the state shifts to the special game state. It is a state of easy game. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). In addition, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (during the time saving of the normal symbol) is more advantageous than the state of not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" (normal state of the normal symbol) when the lottery condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. Refers to the state. Specifically, in the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the hit probability of the normal symbol is higher than that of the "normal state of the normal symbol".

The method of making the "time saving state of the normal symbol" more advantageous than the "normal state of the normal symbol" is not limited to increasing the hit probability of the normal symbol. For example, when the lottery condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) executed by the second symbol display device 83 may be shortened. By shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the "normal symbol time reduction state" than in the "normal symbol normal state", the "normal symbol time reduction state" executes more ordinary symbol lottery at the same time. Can be made to. Therefore, since the number of times the normal symbol is hit is increased, it can be advantageous for the player. Further, in the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the opening time of the electric accessory 640a which is opened when the normal symbol hits may be longer than in the "normal state of the normal symbol". As a result, when the normal symbol hits in the "time saving state of the normal symbol", more balls can be entered into the second entry port 640.

Further, in the "normal symbol time saving state", a plurality of the above conditions may be combined. For example, in the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the probability of hitting the normal symbol may be increased, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a that is released when the normal symbol is hit may be lengthened. .. Further, if at least one advantageous condition is set in the "normal state of the normal symbol", other conditions may be disadvantageous as compared with the "normal state of the normal symbol". For example, in the "normal state of the normal symbol", the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased (advantageous) as compared with the "normal state of the normal symbol", but the normal symbol is compared with the "normal state of the normal symbol". It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of is long. That is, the number of lottery of ordinary symbols is reduced, but it may be easy to win when the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the normal symbol time reduction period. In addition, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, the time saving period of the ordinary symbol is shown by using the number of lottery of the special symbol. For example, when the "probability change jackpot C5" is won, it is stated that the time saving period of the normal symbol is 80 times.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. , The fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes extremely long (3 to 5 minutes) and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes short (0.2 seconds x 1 time). There is. On the other hand, when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends (the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the fluctuation time becomes shorter (1 second) and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes short. It is configured to be longer (1 second x 3 times).

As a result, during the time saving period of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes long (3 to 5 minutes), so that the direction of the normal entry port 67 (game board 13) Even if the ball is continuously launched to the right), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only every few minutes, and the opening time is shortened. That is, even if the ball is launched into the normal ball entrance 67, the possibility that the special symbol 2 will be drawn will be low. If the special symbol 2 is not drawn, the game will not shift to the special game state (big hit state), so the number of balls held will decrease to the extent that the ball is launched in the direction of the second entrance 640 during the short period of time for the normal symbol. It ends up.

On the other hand, as described above, when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes short and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes long, so that it becomes easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640. .. With this configuration, in order to receive the lottery for the special symbol 1 during the time saving period of the normal symbol, the ball is launched aiming at the first entrance 64, and after the time saving period of the normal symbol has passed, In order to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2, the ball can be launched aiming at the second entrance 640.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1, a big hit (a big hit in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened) in which a prize ball is hardly obtained is obtained. It is structured so that it is easy to win. On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is easy to win the big hit (the big hit in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened) where it is easy to obtain a lot of prize balls. Therefore, during the time saving period of the normal symbol, the player can be made to play the game with the aim of ending the time saving period by repeating the lottery of the special symbol 1. Then, after the time saving period of the normal symbol is completed, the game can be performed aiming at the second entrance 640 in order to obtain the prize ball.

In general gaming machines, players play games with the aim of becoming a big hit, so disappointment about not being a big hit enough to keep losing the lottery of special symbols accumulates, and the player's game There is a risk of reducing motivation. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the time saving period ends, the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is advantageous for the player is easily performed. It is possible to request that the special design be continuously removed. Therefore, even if the special symbol continues to come off, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by not being a big hit, so that it is possible to provide a novel playability.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640 again after the big hit is completed (high of the special symbol). It is configured to facilitate the transition to the stochastic state and the normal state of the normal symbol). That is, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is difficult to give the time saving period of the normal symbol. As a result, once the time saving period of the normal symbol can be ended, the state in which the special symbol 2 is easily drawn and the jackpot (probability variation jackpot D) in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained are likely to be continuous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more strongly hope that the lottery of the special symbol will continue to be missed during the time reduction of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game even if the special symbol is not a big hit. Hereinafter, the state in which the above-mentioned special symbol 2 is easily received by the lottery will be referred to as a "consecutive villa state".

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed based on the power-on (the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed), "a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state and , Normal state of normal symbol "(normal state). In the "low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol" (normal state), as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes long (3 to 5 minutes), and the normal symbol hits. In this case, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is also shortened (0.2 seconds x 1 time). That is, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 (it is difficult for the special symbol 2 to be drawn), which is disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, for example, when there is a pachinko machine 10 in the "consecutive villa state" when the hall is closed, the pachinko machine 10 can be brought into the "normal state" simply by making the initial settings of the pachinko machine 10. That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is initially set, it does not become an advantageous state (“continuous villa state”). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the pachinko machine 10 that was in the "consecutive state" at the closing time of the hall from remaining in the "consecutive state" even when the store is opened the next day regardless of whether or not the initial setting is made. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the "continuous villa state" from continuing over business days and giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

Further, since the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "normal state", the clerk in the hall can easily put the pachinko machine 10 in a disadvantageous state when preparing to open the store. In other words, in order to end the "continuous villa state", it is troublesome for the clerk of the hall to play a game with the pachinko machine 10 from the closing time of the hall to the opening time of the next business day until the "continuous villa state" is completed. There is no need to do any work. Therefore, the labor of the clerk in the hall can be reduced.

Further, if the pachinko machine 10 is put into the "consecutive state" by performing the initial setting, for example, in the hall where the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed before the opening of the store, inequality occurs depending on the visit time of the players. It ends up. In other words, a player who cannot come to the store during the opening time of the hall cannot basically shift to the "consecutive villa state" until a short period of time has passed, whereas a player who can come to the store during the opening time of the hall Since the game can be started from the "consecutive state" without any trouble, inequality occurs among the players. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the initial setting is performed, the state does not shift to the "consecutive villa state". You can play a game. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of equality among the players.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the fluctuation of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if the ball enters the second entry port 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is discarded without being held. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors of the LEDs (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, purple, and white) are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various games of the pachinko machine 10 can be performed with a small number of LEDs. The state (high probability state of special symbol, time saving of normal symbol, etc.) can be displayed. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a special symbol according to the jackpot type (first symbol). Is shown.

Further, on the right side of the front view (right side of FIG. 2) of the game area, a detour accessory 700 is provided so that a ball launched to the right side of the game board 13 can enter the inside. The detour accessory 700 is provided to prolong the time it takes for the ball launched to the right side of the game board 13 to reach the second entrance 640 (7 seconds or more after the ball is launched). ing. By prolonging the time to reach the second entrance 640, a state other than the "consecutive state" (low probability state of the special symbol and normal state of the normal symbol, or high probability state of the special symbol, and , When the normal symbol hits (the time saving state of the normal symbol), the ball reaches the second entry port 640 during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640. It can be suppressed. That is, even if the player launches the ball after recognizing that the electric accessory 640a has been released, the electric accessory 640a is closed while the ball is flowing down inside the detour accessory 700, and the first 2 It is configured so that the ball cannot enter the ball entry port 640.

As described above, in the "consecutive villa state", it becomes easy to win a jackpot (probability variation jackpot D) in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained by inserting the ball into the second entrance 640. That is, it is configured to be easily advantageous for the player by winning a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2. Therefore, even in a state other than the "consecutive state" (a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, or a high probability state of the special symbol and a time saving state of the normal symbol), the "probability change jackpot D" There is a possibility that the player launches the ball in an attempt to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 with the aim of winning the prize. In order to suppress such a game method, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by providing the detour accessory 700, the player can hit the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state". It is configured so that it is difficult to intentionally insert the ball.

The details of the detour accessory 700 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic view schematically showing the detour accessory 700. As shown in FIG. 3, the detour accessory 700 is provided with an opening 710 at the upper portion thereof. The ball can be made to enter the inside of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710. Further, at the lower part of the detour accessory 700, an opening 720 is provided for discharging the ball flowing down in the detour accessory 700 to the outside of the detour accessory 700. Further, in the detour accessory 700, in order to prevent the ball that has advanced inside from being discharged to the outside without passing through the opening 720, the peripheral portion 730 provides the front side, the back side, and the left-right direction of the front view. It is surrounded by four directions. Since the peripheral edge portion 730 is composed of a translucent member (for example, a PS material), the player can easily visually recognize how the ball flows down.

Further, of the peripheral edge portion 730, the plane on the back side of the front view can be assembled so as to be substantially the same plane as the base plate 60, so that a gap is generated between the peripheral edge portion 730 and the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent the ball from being caught in the gap. Further, of the peripheral edge portion 730, the flat surface on the front side of the front view and the glass unit 16 are configured to be in contact with each other without a gap when the front frame 14 is closed, so that the peripheral edge portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are in contact with each other. By creating a gap between the two, it is possible to prevent the ball from being caught in the gap.

As shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 740 to 790) inclined downward of the detour accessory 700 are provided inside the detour accessory 700. In each of the guide flow paths 740 to 790, the surface with which the spheres come into contact has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width thereof is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 (the inner wall on the back side of the front view and the inner wall on the front side of the front view). It is configured to be substantially the same as the distance between). That is, a gap is formed between the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 and each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790, so that the ball can be prevented from passing through the gap.

As shown in FIG. 3, the guide flow paths 740, 760, and 780 are inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view. Further, the guide flow paths 750, 770, and 790 are inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view. Then, the guide flow paths 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, 790 are arranged in order from the upper side of the detour accessory 700. That is, the flow path inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view and the flow path inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view are alternately provided.

The ball that has entered the opening 710 first proceeds to the guide flow path 740, and then flows down in the lower left direction in the front view along the inclination formed by the guide flow path 740. Then, when the sphere reaches the lower end of the guidance flow path 740, the sphere falls from the guidance flow path 740 toward the guidance flow path 750. Then, the dropped sphere flows down along the guide flow path 750 in the lower right direction in the front view. When the flowing sphere reaches the lower end of the guidance flow path 750, the sphere falls into the guidance flow path 760 and flows down in the lower left direction in the front view along the inclination formed by the guidance flow path 760.

After that, the sphere alternately repeats the operation of flowing down along the flow path and the operation of falling down to the lower flow path. Finally, the sphere reaches the lower end of the guide flow path 790 and falls from the lower end of the guide flow path 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the ball that has entered the detour accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 720. Since the direction in which the sphere flows down changes each time the flow path of the sphere changes (that is, it changes from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction), the flow of the sphere changes each time the flow path changes. You can reduce the momentum to do it. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the ball that has entered the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720. As a result, when the ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13, the ball is launched to the lower part of the game board 13 (first entry port 64 or second entry) as compared with the case where the ball is launched to the left side of the game board 13. The time to reach the ball mouth 640 (the area where the ball mouth 640 is arranged) can be lengthened (7 seconds or more). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to intentionally let the ball enter the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state" (that is, a state in which the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open). Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is pivotally supported by the flow path support shafts 714 to 791, and clockwise or counterclockwise with each flow path support shaft as a rotation axis. It is configured to be rotatable. Further, in the rotation operation, the lower surface of each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is subjected to the rotation stop members 742a to 792a or the rotation stop members 742b to 792b provided on the lower side of each of the guidance flow paths 740 to 790. It stops by touching. This rotation operation will be described by taking the induction flow path 740 as an example.

As described above, the induction flow path 740 is configured to be rotatable around the flow path support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This rotation operation is performed based on the weight of the sphere flowing down the induction flow path 740. Specifically, when the sphere flows down the upper half of the induction flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the sphere is applied to the upper half of the induction flow path 740, so that the upper half of the induction flow path 740 is rotated downward. A force is generated in the direction of movement. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide flow path 740 clockwise in front view, the guide flow path 740 rotates clockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742b. The rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide flow path 740 from rotating too much clockwise and the guidance flow path 740 from tilting in the opposite direction.

Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a member having a substantially cylindrical shape, and is joined to the inner wall on the front side and the inner wall on the back side of the peripheral edge portion 730, respectively. That is, it is configured so that the position does not shift due to the impact when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact. The structures of the other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and the rotation stop members 752b to 792b are the same as those of the rotation stop members 742b.

On the other hand, when the sphere flows down the lower half of the guidance flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the sphere is applied to the lower half of the guidance flow path 740, so that the lower half of the guidance flow path 740 is rotated downward. Power is generated. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide flow path 740 counterclockwise in front view, the guide flow path 740 rotates counterclockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. The rotation stop member 742a can prevent the induction flow path 740 from rotating too much counterclockwise. That is, it is possible to prevent the guide flow path 740 from becoming too inclined so that the momentum of the ball cannot be reduced. Therefore, the ball can be surely flowed down over 7 seconds or more. If the ball flows down with the inclination of each guide flow path 740 to 790 maximized, it takes 7 seconds for the ball to reach the second entry port 640. The path length of 790 and the maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare for a ball to flow down while maintaining the maximum inclination angle of all the induction flow paths 740 to 790, it is possible to ensure that the time for the ball to reach the second entry port 640 is 7 seconds or more. can.

In this way, by configuring the slopes of the guide channels 740 to 790 to change based on the load due to the weight of the spheres, the flow velocity of the spheres flowing down the guide channels 740 to 790 can be changed. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the time until the ball finishes passing through the detour accessory 700. Further, in the above description, the case where one ball travels on the guide flow path 740 has been described, but a state in which a plurality of balls travel on the same guide flow path may occur during the actual game. In this case, since it is more difficult to predict the rotational movement of each of the guidance flow paths 740 to 790, it is difficult for the player to predict the time until the ball finishes passing through the detour accessory 700. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the ball into the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "continuous villa state". That is, in a state other than the "consecutive villa state", a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes a "probability change big hit D", and it is possible to prevent a large number of prize balls from being acquired.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is processed so that the corners of the left and right ends of the lower surface are rounded as compared with the corners of the left and right ends of the upper surface. With this configuration, when each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 rotates, it is possible to make it difficult for the corner of the lower surface to come into contact with the inner wall portion of the peripheral edge portion 730. Therefore, since each guide flow path 740 to 790 can be brought closer to the peripheral edge portion 730, a gap is formed between each guide flow path 740 to 790 and the peripheral edge portion 730, and a sphere is sandwiched in the gap. It is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the gap. It should be noted that each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is configured to return to the arrangement having the largest inclination due to its own weight in a state where the sphere is not flowing down. For example, in a state where the sphere does not flow down the guide flow path 740, the guide flow path 740 rotates counterclockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis due to its own weight. This rotation operation is performed until the lower surface of the induction flow path comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when the lower surface of the induction flow path comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide flow paths 750 to 790 are configured to rotate until they come into contact with the rotation stop members 752a to 792a due to their own weight in a state where the sphere is not flowing down. As a result, depending on whether the ball flows down while each of the guide flow paths 750 to 790 is rotating, or whether the ball flows down when the rotation of each of the guide flow paths 750 to 790 is completed. The flow speed of the sphere can be different. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to aim at the second entrance 640.

It should be noted that each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 may be configured so as not to rotate by its own weight but to rotate only by the passage of a sphere. When each guide flow path 740 to 790 rotates by its own weight, the speed at which the ball flows down the detour device 700 by waiting until the rotation of each guide flow path 740 to 790 is completed each time one ball is launched. Can be made almost the same. On the other hand, if each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is configured so as not to rotate by its own weight, the randomness of the flow speed can be increased even if the balls are launched one by one, so that the player enters the second ball. It is possible to make it difficult to aim at the mouth 640.

In the detour accessory 700 of the present embodiment, each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is configured to rotate based on the load due to the weight of the sphere, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each induction flow path 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated by a motor or the like. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the movement of each of the guide channels 740 to 790, so that the player can drive the ball into the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state". It can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as shields, swords, and cloaks added to almost the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a jackpot of a type in which a lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, is likely to win a prize ball (normal jackpots A to C, probability variation jackpot). In the case of C1 to C6 and the probability variation jackpot D), the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the jackpot is generated after the variation display is completed.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, or if it is a jackpot of a type that makes it difficult to win a prize ball (probability variation jackpot A1 to A64, probability variation jackpot B), the same main symbol is not aligned. Is done. This is because if a variable display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed in a jackpot of a type in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the player may be discouraged if the prize ball cannot be obtained. Further, when the jackpot type is any of the probabilistic jackpots A1 to A64, the time saving period of the normal symbol corresponding to each jackpot type is newly set. In other words, since the time saving period of the normal symbol that has been digested before it becomes a big hit is reset, the player may feel that the "consecutive state" is far away. That is, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game may be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when one of the jackpots A1 to A64 is won, the player notices that the time saving period of the normal symbol is reset by executing the variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned. It is configured to be difficult to reset. As a result, even if the jackpots A1 to A64 are won, it is possible to prevent the player from lowering the motivation for the game.

A variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned will be described more specifically. For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "normal jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which any of the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added is aligned. Further, in the case of "normal jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C1" to "probability variation jackpot C6", the main symbols to which even numbers "0,2,4,6,8" are added, and "7" are added. A variable display is performed in which any of the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" are added is aligned, and if it is "probability variation jackpot D", all numbers including the odd number "7" are displayed. A variable display is performed in which any of the main symbols to which is added is aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, or if it is a big hit of a type in which it is difficult to win a prize ball, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the third symbol when the third symbol is variablely displayed or when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. It is composed of a region Dm, a small region Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls, and a small region Ds2 for reducing and displaying the variation effect.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. If a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, and the small area Ds2 is. , This is an area in which the variable effect is reduced and displayed when a display effect different from the variable effect is executed in the main display area. By reducing and displaying the variable effect, it is possible to prevent the display effect different from the variable effect from being blocked by the third symbol and becoming difficult to see.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display showing the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the background of the third symbol. The production etc. is executed. In the present embodiment, the state in which the main symbol of the third symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5B) is limited to the period when the symbol starts to change and when the change stops. It is configured so that the changing symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2 during the fluctuation of. As a result, the player can confirm the effect displayed in the main display area Dm without being shielded by the third symbol.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of entry times is up to four times. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display or fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, is being executed by the lighting state. As the stop symbol after the end, the normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by the lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. The display is done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (as in the case of the first ball opening 64). For example, it may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

A first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can enter is arranged below the variable display device unit 80, and a second ball entry port 640 is arranged in the lower right of the first ball entry port 64. Has been done. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the first entry switch. The main control device 110 draws a special symbol (lottery for the special symbol 1). On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main control device 110 draws a special symbol (lottery for the special symbol 2). When the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed, the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged in the lower left direction of the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged in the upper right direction of the second winning opening 640, and a horizontally long rectangular second specific winning opening (large opening opening) 650a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls can be obtained than in the normal state. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time.

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and if a jackpot round remains after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is configured to be performed once (1 round) or 4 times (4 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the ball is awarded to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a that is open. A large number of prize balls will be paid out.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate. It is equipped with a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing to the front side with the axis as the axis. The first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are in a closed state in which the ball cannot or is difficult to win in the normal state. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a. Then, it operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normally closed state.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the period during which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened is 0.2 seconds at the maximum. That is, even if the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, it is difficult to insert the ball. On the other hand, the period during which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is configured to be 30 seconds at the maximum. That is, a large number of prize balls can be obtained at the jackpot where the second specific winning opening 650a is opened.

The first specific winning opening 65a is configured such that the opening / closing operation is difficult for the player to see due to the cover body 800 provided on the front surface thereof. As described above, when the first specific winning opening 65a becomes a jackpot (probability variation jackpot A1 to A64, probability variation jackpot B), it is difficult to distinguish it from a special symbol, so that the third symbol display device In 81, it is configured to execute a variable effect in which the main symbols are not aligned. Despite this configuration, if the opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is made easily visible, the jackpot that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened (probability variation jackpot A1 to A64, It is easy to determine whether or not it has become a probabilistic jackpot B). That is, there is no point in executing a variable effect in which the main symbols are not aligned. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is difficult to confirm the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a by the cover body 800, and it is difficult for the player to obtain the prize ball. It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether or not it has become. Although omitted in FIG. 2, the actual cover body 800 is provided with a pattern, a color, or the like so that the first specific winning opening 65a is difficult to see.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is reached, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened according to the jackpot type, but the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment. .. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the first specific winning opening The first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time, and the first specific winning opening 65a is triggered by a ball winning while the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is open. , And a gaming state in which the large opening opening provided separately from the second specific winning opening 650a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time may be formed as a special gaming state.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 4, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , The special figure variation pattern selection table 202d, the normal figure variation pattern selection table 202e, and the state setting table 202f are stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The value of the first random number counter C1 acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (at the time of starting winning) is defined in the first random number table 202a. If it matches any of the determination values, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

In the first random number table 202a, a determination value for the low probability state of the special symbol and a determination value for the high probability state of the special symbol are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), in the low probability state of the special symbol, 8 of "5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 2011, 262, 291" as a judgment value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol. The number of judgment values is specified (see FIG. 7B). Further, the first random number counter C1 is composed of a loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 8 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1 / 37.5".

On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, 10 determination values of "4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 249, 270" are defined as the determination values that are the big hits of the special symbol. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/30".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the number of determination values that are the jackpots of the special symbol changes by only two. Therefore, the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol does not change significantly between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol. Even if it becomes a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, most of them will not get a prize ball and the time saving period of the normal symbol will be set after the big hit is set "Probability change jackpot A1" to "Probability change jackpot" This is because it becomes "A64". That is, even if the special symbol becomes a big hit in the normal state of the special symbol, there is almost no merit for the player. Therefore, the longer the normal state of the special symbol continues, the less the player's interest in the game is. There is.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is basically necessary to end the time saving period of the normal symbol in order to shift to the "consecutive villa state" which is the most advantageous state for the player. That is, it is necessary to continuously remove the special symbol during the short period of time of the normal symbol. Therefore, during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the player can feel as if he / she is approaching the "ream villa state" step by step by continuously removing the special symbol. You can improve your interest. On the other hand, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, since the time saving period of the normal symbol is not set in the first place, no matter how many consecutive deviations of the special symbol are made, it does not approach the "consecutive state". That is, as the special symbols are continuously removed, the player's disappointment accumulates, and the player may lose motivation for the game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is not much different from the high probability state of the special symbol, so that the low probability of the special symbol is the most disadvantageous to the player. It is structured so that it is difficult to stay in the stochastic state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation for the game because the low probability state of the special symbol continues for a long time.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7C) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. It is specified in association with. As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b is for special figure 1 in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is defined when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1. It is composed of two types of data tables: a hit type selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2 in which a judgment value for determining a big hit type is defined when a big hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol 2. ing. Details of these data tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10.

FIG. 8A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned hit type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1, and FIG. 8B shows the specified contents of the hit type selection table 202b2 for special figure 2. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 8A, "normal jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot A1" to "probability variation jackpot A64", and "probability variation jackpot B" are selected in the hit type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1. The determination value of the first type counter C2 in the case is specified respectively. That is, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is determined to be one of the big hit types of "normal big hit A", "probable change big hit A1" to "probable change big hit A64", and "probable change big hit B".

As shown in FIG. 8A, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "normal jackpot A". The first hit type counter C2 is composed of a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 199". Of the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot A" is 10, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, "normal jackpot A" The probability of becoming is 5% (10/200).

Normally, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is one and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until five balls win), so as described above. The player can receive a maximum of 60 prize balls (5 x 12 pieces x 1 round) (the number of balls held can be increased by about 50). In addition, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving period of the normal symbol is not given (it shifts to the normal state of the normal symbol). As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes long (3 to 5 minutes) and the normal symbol becomes. In the case of hitting, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also shortened (0.2 seconds x 1 time). Therefore, even if the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the end of "normal jackpot A", it is necessary to aim to become a jackpot by lottery of special symbol 1. If the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in "probability change jackpot A", the time saving period of the normal symbol is set, so by passing the set time saving period, the player can reach the most advantageous "consecutive state". Can be migrated. In addition, if the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in "probability change jackpot B", it is possible to directly shift to the "consecutive villa state" after the jackpot ends.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 189", "probability variation jackpot A" is associated and defined. Of the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot A" is 180, so if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "normal jackpot A" The probability of becoming is 90% (180/200). That is, most of the cases where a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 is this "probability change big hit A".

In addition, "probability change jackpot A" is a general term for "probability change jackpot A1" to "probability change jackpot A64" that are given after the end of the jackpot and are given for a short period of time. Within the range of "~ 189", determination values corresponding to each of the above 64 types of jackpots are further defined. The correspondence between the 64 types of jackpots and the first hit type counter C2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

This "probability change jackpot A" has 4 rounds, and the first specific winning opening 65a is a jackpot that is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapse or until 5 balls win). , It becomes difficult for the player to win the prize ball. In addition, after the end of the jackpot, the probability shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving period (1 to 100 times) of the normal symbol according to the jackpot type is given. As described above, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes long (3 to 5 minutes), and when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a The opening time is also shortened (0.2 seconds x 1 time). Therefore, even if the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the end of the "probability change jackpot A", it is necessary to elapse the set time-saving period by continuously losing the special symbol 1 by lottery. After the set time saving period elapses, it becomes a "consecutive villa state" in which it is easy to receive a lottery for the special symbol 2. If a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it becomes easy to win the "probability change big hit D" that can obtain a large amount of prize balls, so that the player is in an advantageous state by being in the "consecutive villa state". As described above, even if the set time saving period has not passed, if the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in "probability change jackpot B", it is possible to directly shift to the "consecutive villa state".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "190 to 199", "probability variation jackpot B" is associated and defined. Of the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot B" is 10, so if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, "probability variation jackpot B" The probability of becoming is 5% (10/200).

This probability variation jackpot B has four rounds, and the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapse or until five balls win), so that the game is played. It becomes difficult for a person to win a prize ball. In addition, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, but the time saving period of the normal symbol is not given. That is, if the probabilistic jackpot B is won, the state directly shifts to the "consecutive villa state" after the jackpot ends.

Next, the hit type selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (b). As shown in FIG. 8B, "normal jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C1" to "probability variation jackpot C6", and "probability variation jackpot D" are selected in the hit type selection table 202b2 for special figure 2. The determination value of the first type counter C2 in the case is specified respectively. That is, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is determined to be one of the big hit types of "normal big hit B", "probable change big hit C1" to "probable change big hit C6", and "probable change big hit D".

As shown in FIG. 8B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "normal jackpot B". Of the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot B" is 10, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, "normal jackpot B" The probability of becoming is 5% (10/200).

This "normal jackpot B" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is one and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until five balls win). As you can see, the player can receive up to 60 (5 x 12 x 1 round) prize balls (the number of balls he has can be increased by about 50). In addition, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving period of the normal symbol is not given (it shifts to the normal state of the normal symbol).

As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes long (3 to 5 minutes) and the normal symbol becomes. In the case of hitting, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also shortened (0.2 seconds x 1 time). Therefore, even if the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the end of "normal jackpot B", it is necessary to aim to become a jackpot by lottery of special symbol 1. If the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in "probability change jackpot A", the time saving period of the normal symbol is set, so by passing the set time saving period, the player can reach the most advantageous "consecutive state". Can be migrated. In addition, if the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in "probability change jackpot B", it is possible to directly shift to the "consecutive villa state" after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, "probability variation jackpot C" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 19". Of the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot C" is 10, so if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery, "probability variation jackpot C" The probability of becoming is 5% (10/200).

In addition, "probability change jackpot C" is a general term for "probability change jackpot C1" to "probability change jackpot C6" that are given after the end of the jackpot and are different for a short period of time. Within the range of "~ 19", determination values corresponding to each of the above six types of jackpots are further defined (see FIG. 10 (a)).

In addition, the number of time reductions given also differs depending on whether or not it is in the "consecutive villa state" (that is, the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). As shown in FIG. 8B, a state other than the "consecutive state" (that is, a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state (normal state) of the normal symbol, or a high probability state of the special symbol, and In the time saving state of the normal symbol (probability variation time saving state)), 100 times of time saving period is set as the time saving period of the normal symbol regardless of which of "probability variation jackpot C1" to "probability variation jackpot C6" is won. By configuring so that only the shortest time period (100 times) is set, the player launches a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state" (a large amount of prize balls). It is possible to suppress (playing a game aiming at the "probability change jackpot D" that can be acquired). This is because the longer the time reduction period, the more difficult it is to shift to the "consecutive villa state", which is a great disadvantage for the player.

On the other hand, when the "big hit C" is obtained in the "consecutive villa state" (high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), a different number of time reduction periods is given according to the jackpot type. The correspondence between the "big hit C1" to "big hit C6" and the first hit type counter C2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The "probability change jackpot C" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is one and the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until five balls win). As you can see, the player can receive up to 60 prize balls (5 x 12 pieces x 1 round) (the number of balls held can be increased by about 50). In addition, after the end of the jackpot, the game shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving period of the normal symbol is given the number of times (10 to 100 times) according to the jackpot type and the state at the time of winning the jackpot. As described above, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes long (3 to 5 minutes), and when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a The opening time is also shortened (0.2 seconds x 1 time). Therefore, even if the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the end of the "probability change jackpot C", it is necessary to elapse the set time-saving period by continuously losing the special symbol 1 by lottery. After the set time saving period elapses, it becomes a "consecutive villa state" in which it is easy to receive a lottery for the special symbol 2. If a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it becomes easy to win the "probability change big hit D" that can obtain a large amount of prize balls, so that the player is in an advantageous state by being in the "consecutive villa state". As described above, even if the set time saving period has not passed, if the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in "probability change jackpot B", it is possible to directly shift to the "consecutive villa state".

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 199" in association with the "probability variation jackpot D". Of the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot D" is 180, so if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery, "probability variation jackpot D" The probability of becoming is 90% (180/200).

This probability variation jackpot D has 4 rounds, and the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until 5 balls win), so as described above. , The player can receive a maximum of 240 prize balls (5 x 12 pieces x 4 rounds) (the number of balls held can be increased by about 200). In addition, when the "probability change jackpot D" is completed, the state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, a different time saving period is given after the end of the jackpot, depending on whether or not the "probability change jackpot D" is the "consecutive villa state".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), a state other than the "consecutive villa state" (that is, a low-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a special symbol, and a time-saving state of a normal symbol). Then, a time saving period of 100 times is set as a time saving period of a normal symbol. By configuring so that only the shortest time period (100 times) is set, the player launches a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state" (a large amount of prize balls). It is possible to suppress (playing a game aiming at the "probability change jackpot D" that can be acquired).

On the other hand, in the case of "probability change jackpot D" in the "consecutive villa state", the time saving period of the normal symbol is not given after the jackpot ends. That is, in the "consecutive villa state", when the probability variation jackpot D is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the transition to the "consecutive villa state" (high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) is performed again after the end of the jackpot. do. As described above, in the "consecutive villa state", the lottery of the special symbol 2 is likely to be performed. Then, 90% of the cases where the special symbol 2 is a big hit in the lottery is this "probability change big hit D". Therefore, since it becomes easy to repeatedly win the "probability change jackpot D", the player can win a large number of prize balls by being in the "consecutive villa state". This "consecutive villa state" ends when a big hit is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and the "normal big hit B" or the "probability change big hit C" is won. In addition, even if a lottery for special symbol 1 is performed in the "ream villa state" and the "normal jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot A" is won, the special symbol is in a low probability state or a normal symbol after the jackpot ends. The "sequential villa state" ends due to the transition to the time saving state.

In this embodiment, the special symbol has a low probability state, and the jackpot (“normal jackpot A”, “normal jackpot B”) that shifts to the normal state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol, In addition, the jackpot ("probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot C") that shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol (probability variation time saving state), the high probability state of the special symbol, and the normal state of the normal symbol (consecutive villa state). ), But it is not limited to three types of jackpots (“probability variation jackpot B” and “probability variation jackpot D”). For example, a jackpot type that shifts to a low-probability state of a special symbol and a time-saving state of a normal symbol (non-probability variation time-saving state) may be provided. This makes it more difficult to predict the state from the hit probability of the normal symbol, so even if the special symbol is repeatedly removed, it is detected that it is a low probability state of the special symbol that does not shift to the "consecutive state". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the correspondence between the above-mentioned "probability variation jackpot A1" to "probability variation jackpot A64" and the first hit type counter C2, and the time saving period given after each jackpot will be described.

As described above, "probability variation jackpot A1" to "probability variation jackpot A64" shift to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after the end of each jackpot, and shorten the number of times of ordinary symbols according to each jackpot type. It is a jackpot type to which a period is given. In addition, the time saving period given increases in the order of "probability change jackpot A1" to "probability change jackpot A64", and the time reduction is at least once (in the case of probabilistic jackpot A1) and at most 100 times (in the case of probabilistic jackpot A64). A period is granted.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the "probability variation jackpot A1" is associated with two determination values of "10" and "11" as the values of the first hit type counter C2. Similarly, the "probability variation jackpot A2" is also associated with two determination values as the values of the first hit type counter C2, and the values are "12" and "13". Similarly, for "probability variation jackpot A3" to "probability variation jackpot A9", two values of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other. Further, in the case of "probability variation jackpot A1" to "probability variation jackpot A9", the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 1 to 9 times after the end of each jackpot.

Further, one determination value "28" is associated with the "probability variation jackpot A10" as the value of the first hit type counter C2. When this "probability change jackpot A10" is completed, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 19 times. That is, there is no jackpot in which the "probability variation jackpot A" is given 10 to 18 times as the time saving period of the normal symbol. The values of the first hit type counter C2 are also associated with each of the "probability change jackpot A11" to "probability variation jackpot A36", and the values are "29" to "54", respectively. That is, determination values having different values by 1 are associated with "probability variation jackpot A10" to "probability variation jackpot A36". Further, when the "probability variation jackpot A11" to the "probability variation jackpot A36" are completed, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 20 to 45 times, respectively. That is, "probability change jackpot A10" to "probability variation jackpot A36" are configured so that a time saving period in which the number of times is different by one is given.

The "probability variation jackpot A37" is associated with three determination values of "55, 56, 57" as the values of the first hit type counter C2. When this "probability change jackpot A37" is completed, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 64 times. That is, there is no jackpot type in which 46 to 63 times are given as the time saving period of the normal symbol in "probability variation jackpot A". For "probability change jackpot A38" to "probability variation jackpot A45", three values of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other, and the values are "55, 56, 57" to "79, 80, 81", respectively. ". That is, determination values having different values of 3 are associated with "probability variation jackpot A38" to "probability variation jackpot A45". Further, when the "probability change jackpot A38" to "probability variation jackpot A45" are completed, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 65 to 72 times, respectively. That is, the "probability variation jackpot A37" to "probability variation jackpot A45" are configured so that a time saving period in which the number of times differs by one is given.

The "probability variation jackpot A46" is associated with "82" as the value of the first hit type counter C2. When this "probability change jackpot A46" is completed, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 73 times. Further, also for "probability variation jackpot A47" to "probability variation jackpot A63", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is associated one by one, and the values are "83" to "99", respectively. That is, determination values having different values by 1 are associated with "probability variation jackpot A47" to "probability variation jackpot A63". Further, when the "probability change jackpot A47" to "probability variation jackpot A63" are completed, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 74 to 99 times, respectively. That is, the "probability variation jackpot A46" to "probability variation jackpot A63" are configured so that a time saving period in which the number of times differs by one is given.

The "probability variation jackpot A64" is associated with 90 determination values of "100 to 189" as the value of the first hit type counter C2. In addition, when the "probability change jackpot A64" is completed, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 100 times. There are 180 judgment values of "10 to 189" that are "probability change jackpot A", and 90 of them are assigned to "probability change jackpot A64". 50% (90/180) is "probability change jackpot A64".

Next, with reference to FIG. 9B, the time-short-term distribution of ordinary symbols given when the "probability change jackpot A" is won will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the range of the time saving period (rotation speed) of the normal symbol and the ratio (distribution) in which the range is selected when the “probability variation jackpot A” is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the ratio of selecting the range of 1 to 9 times as the time saving period of the normal symbol (that is, the ratio of selecting "probability variation jackpot A1" to "probability variation jackpot A9") is It is 10%. As described above, the number of judgment values associated with "probability change jackpot A1" to "probability change jackpot A9" is 18 of "10 to 27", so out of 180 judgment values that are "probability change jackpot A". This is because it corresponds to 10% (18/180).

If the time saving period of the normal symbol is 9 times or less, the time saving period can be passed with high probability and the state can be shifted to the "consecutive villa state". For example, if the time saving period of the normal symbol is three times, the special symbol is removed three times in a row, and the state shifts to the "consecutive state". As described above, since the probability of winning a special symbol is 1/30, the probability of losing 3 times in a row is about 90% (29/30 cubed). In addition, even if the time saving period is 9 times, the probability that the special symbol will be missed 9 times in a row is about 74% (29/30 to the 9th power), and the majority shifts to the "consecutive villa state". Therefore, even if the player recognizes that there is a possibility that the player may have become a "probability change jackpot A" by paying close attention to the first specific winning opening 65a, it can be expected that a short time period will be selected. .. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the short period of time spent until the "probability change jackpot A" is wasted (the "consecutive state" was far away). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As shown in FIG. 9B, there is no case where 10 to 18 times is selected as the time saving period of the normal symbol. In addition, the ratio of 19 to 27 times, 28 to 36 times, and 37 to 45 times selected as the time saving period of the ordinary symbol is 5% each. That is, the ratio of selecting "probability change jackpot A10" to "probability variation jackpot A18", "probability variation jackpot A19" to "probability variation jackpot A27", and "probability variation jackpot A28" to "probability variation jackpot A36" is 5% each. .. This is because the number of determination values associated with these is nine each, which corresponds to 5% (9/180) of the 180 determination values that are "probability variation jackpot A".

In this way, if the special symbol does not shift to the "consecutive state" even if the special symbol is removed 9 times in a row after the end of "Probability change jackpot A", the special symbol is removed at least 10 times in a row (from there). In other words, there is no possibility of shifting to the "consecutive villa state" (until the special symbol is continuously removed 19 times from the end of "probability change jackpot A"). Hereinafter, the range of the number of times that there is no distribution in a short period of time is referred to as a "zone without distribution". On the other hand, the range of the number of times that there is distribution in a short period of time (for example, 1 to 9 times) is called a "zone with distribution".

If the "zone without distribution" continues for a long time, there is a risk that the player will lose motivation for the game when the player determines that the zone has shifted from the "zone with distribution" to the "zone without distribution". be. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the "zone without distribution" is limited to 17 times at the maximum (zones of 46 to 63 times, which will be described later). Therefore, even if the player enters the "zone without distribution" when digesting the time saving period of the normal symbol, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation of the player for the game, and the next "zone with distribution". You can continue the game aiming at. Also, even if the player quits the game due to the "zone without distribution", it makes other players think that they will try to play until the next "zone with distribution". be able to. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 9B, there is no case where 46 to 63 times are selected as the time saving period of the normal symbol (it becomes a "zone without distribution"). In addition, the ratio of 64 to 72 times selected as the time saving period of the ordinary symbol is 15%. That is, the ratio of selecting "probability change jackpot A37" to "probability variation jackpot A45" is 15%. The judgment values associated with "probability change jackpot A37" to "probability change jackpot A45" are in the range of "55-81", and since the number is 27, 180 judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot A". This is because it corresponds to 15% (27/180) of them.

This zone has a higher percentage of selection than other "zones with distribution". By setting the zone immediately after the longest 46 to 63 times of each "zone without distribution" to the zone with a high ratio selected as the time saving period, until the player survives the "zone without distribution". It is possible to easily maintain the motivation to continue the game.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the ratio of 73 to 81 times and 82 to 90 times selected as the time saving period of the ordinary symbol is 5%, respectively. That is, the ratio of selecting "probability change jackpot A46" to "probability variation jackpot A54" and "probability variation jackpot A55" to "probability variation jackpot A63" is 5%, respectively. This is because the number of determination values associated with these is nine each, which corresponds to 5% (9/180) of the 180 determination values that are "probability variation jackpot A".

In addition, there is no case where 91 to 99 times are selected as the time saving period of the normal symbol (it becomes a zone without distribution). The fact that the state has not shifted to the "consecutive state" up to this zone means that 100 times is normally selected as the time saving period of the symbol. In other words, it means that the number of times the special symbol is removed to shift to the "renso state" is within 10 times remaining, so the majority of the players who have played to this zone are the previous "probability change jackpot A". The game is continued aiming at 100 times, which is a short period of time set afterwards. That is, even if the ratio of selecting this zone is 0%, it does not affect the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, since it is possible to increase the proportion of time-saving periods allocated to other zones, it is possible to make each zone more sharp. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game in consideration of the characteristics of each zone, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, as described above, the ratio of selecting 100 times as the time saving period of the normal symbol is 50% in the case of "probability variation jackpot A". When 100 times is selected as the time saving period, it is necessary to repeat the removal of the special symbol 100 times in a row in order to shift to the "consecutive state", but the probability of this event occurring is about 3% (29 /). 30 to the 100th power), which is a very low probability. Therefore, by increasing the rate at which the time saving period of 100 times is selected (probability variation jackpot A64 is selected), it is possible to prevent an excessive transition to the "consecutive villa state". Therefore, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being caused to the hall.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the variation effect is the same between the case where the special symbol is removed and the case where the "probability variation jackpot A" is obtained (the variation effect in which the same main symbols are not aligned is executed). It may be configured to execute a display effect such as a variation effect in a manner in which the player can easily recognize that the "probability variation jackpot A" has been obtained. As a result, the player is made to count the number of deviations after becoming the "probability change jackpot A", and whether or not there is a high possibility that the player will be in the "consecutive state" based on the number of deviations and the ratio of the zones with each distribution. Can be predicted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, the number of fluctuations after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be displayable on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player who is about to start the game can determine the number of deviations to the zone with the next distribution based on the number of fluctuations, and use it as a material for determining whether or not to start the game. Further, the number of fluctuations is not limited to the third symbol display device 81. For example, a signal indicating the start of the fluctuation effect or a signal indicating a jackpot is externally output and provided outside the pachinko machine 10. The display device may be configured to display the number of fluctuations since the end of the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the player starts the game based on the number of times, in the same manner as displaying the number of fluctuations on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the time saving period is set by the distribution shown in FIG. 9B, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the time saving period from 1 time to 100 times is evenly selected. As a result, the zone without distribution can be abolished, and it is possible to easily maintain the motivation of the player for the game. Further, for example, after the "probability variation jackpot A" is completed, a time saving period of 100 times may be set without fail. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive “consecutive villa state”, and thus it is possible to prevent a disadvantage to the hall. Further, the upper limit for a short period of time is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the correspondence between the above-mentioned "probability variation jackpot C1" to "probability variation jackpot C6" and the first hit type counter C2, and the time saving period given after each jackpot will be described.

As described above, "Probability change jackpot C1" to "Probability change jackpot C6" are jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained by lottery of special symbol 2 in the "consecutive state", and the special symbol is after the end of each jackpot. Along with shifting to the high probability state (probability change state) of, the time saving period of the normal symbol of the number of times according to each jackpot type is given. In addition, the time saving period given increases in the order of "probability change jackpot C1" to "probability change jackpot C6", with a minimum of 10 times (in the case of probabilistic jackpot C1) and a maximum of 100 times (in the case of probabilistic jackpot C6). A period is granted.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the "probability change jackpot C1", "probability variation jackpot C2", "probability variation jackpot C3", "probability variation jackpot C4", and "probability variation jackpot C5" are each of the first hit type counter C2. As values, "10", "11", "12", "13", and "14" are associated with each other. Further, when each of the above jackpots is completed, 10 times, 30 times, 50 times, 70 times, and 80 times are given as the time saving period of the normal symbol, respectively.

Further, each of the "probability variation jackpot C6" is associated with "15 to 19" as the value of the first hit type counter C2. When this "probability change jackpot C6" is completed, a time saving period of 100 times is given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10B, the ratio at which the time saving period is selected for each number of fluctuations will be described. As shown in FIG. 10B, the ratio of 10 times, 30 times, 50 times, 70 times, and 80 times of shortened time periods selected is 10%, respectively. On the other hand, the ratio of selecting 100 times of time saving period is 50%. Then, it is configured so that a time saving period other than the above is not selected. As is clear from comparing FIG. 9 (b) and FIG. 10 (b), in the case of "probability variation jackpot A", the ratio of selecting a time saving period of 50 times or less is 25%. On the other hand, in the case of "probability change jackpot C", the ratio of selecting a time saving period of 50 times or less is 30%. That is, when it becomes a big hit that triggers the end of the "consecutive villa state", a small time saving period is easily selected. As a result, after the "ream villa state" is completed, it is possible to easily shift to the "ream villa state" again by allowing a short period of time to elapse. Therefore, even after the "ream villa state" is completed, the player You can continue the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

The distribution in a short period of time is not limited to this mode. The distribution may be the same as when the probability change jackpot A is reached. That is, the probabilistic jackpot C1 to the probabilistic jackpot C64 may be provided so that each jackpot is given the same number of time reductions as the probabilistic jackpots A1 to A64.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 7 (a). The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11A) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored, and is acquired based on the ball passing through the normal entry port 67. When the random number counter C4 per 2 matches the determination value defined in the second random number table 202c, it is determined to be a hit of a normal symbol. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (a).

FIG. 11A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 11A, the second random number table 202c is defined as a table for low probability (normal state of normal symbol) and a table for high probability (normal state of normal symbol). Has been done.

In the second hit random number table for a low probability (normal state of a normal symbol), 218 values of "5-222" are defined as judgment values for hitting a normal symbol (FIG. 11 (a). )reference). Here, the second random number counter C4 is composed of a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 239. Of the 240 possible values of the second hit random number counter C4, there are 218 judgment values to be hit, so the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is about about in the normal state of the normal symbol. It is 91% (about 1 / 1.1).

Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "0 to 239" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 11A). That is, all the values that the random number counter C4 can take for the second hit are determined to be hits of the normal symbol (when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, it is determined to be 100% hit of the normal symbol).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by winning a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 2 in the "continuous villa state", and after the big hit is completed, the "continuous villa" is again obtained. It becomes easier to win the "probability change jackpot D" set in the "state". This "ream villa state" is basically a state in which the normal symbol shifts after a short period of time has elapsed. Specifically, it is a probabilistic state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol. In this "consecutive state", the player launches a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in order to draw a special symbol 2, so that the game becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640a. There is a risk that the person will be dissatisfied. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is configured to be as high as 90% or more. As a result, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is easily opened in the "consecutive state", which makes the player feel that it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress dissatisfaction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is shortened (1 second) and the electric accessory 640a is in the "consecutive state". It is configured so that the opening time of is longer (1 second x 3 times). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 in the "consecutive villa state", so that the player can play the game without stress during the "consecutive villa state". ..

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 7 (a). The special figure variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11B) displays the determination value of the first variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation effect (variation pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. It is a data table specified for each aspect. The details of the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 11B and 12.

FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an outline of the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 11B, the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d is composed of three types of data tables. That is, it is composed of the special figure 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d1, the special figure 2 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d2, and the common probability variation non-time reduction selection table 202d3.

The special symbol 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d1 is a special symbol 1 in a low probability state (normal) of the special symbol, a high probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol, and a time reduction state (time reduction) of the normal symbol. It is a data table that is referred to when the lottery is executed. Further, the special figure 2 normal / probability variation time saving selection table 202d2 shows the special symbol in the low probability state (normal) of the special symbol or the high probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol and the time reduction state (time reduction) of the normal symbol. It is a data table referred to when the lottery of 2 is executed. Further, the common probability variation non-time saving selection table 202d3 is a lottery for the special symbol 1 in the high probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol and in the normal state (non-time reduction) of the normal symbol (that is, in the "consecutive state"). , Or a data table that is referred to when either of the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed. Details of the above three types of data tables will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 12A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal / probability variation time saving selection table 202d1, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 normal / probability variation time saving selection table 202d2. 12 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the common probability variation non-time saving selection table 202d3. As shown in FIG. 12, the above three types of tables are data tables in which the types of fluctuation patterns that can be selected for each stop type are defined in association with the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1.

First, with reference to FIG. 12A, the specified contents of the special drawing 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d1 will be described. In the special figure 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d1, the fluctuation pattern type and the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 are defined in association with each stop type of complete deviation, reach deviation, and jackpot. There is. Specifically, when the stop type is completely out of range, if the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", "short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is selected. On the other hand, if the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "99 to 198", "long deviation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected.

When the stop type is out of reach, if the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", "normal reach" with a variation time of 15 seconds is selected. If the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "150 to 198", "super reach" with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected. That is, it is configured so that "normal reach" with a short fluctuation time is more easily selected than "super reach" with a long fluctuation time. This is because if only fluctuation patterns with a long fluctuation time are selected even though the deviation will eventually occur, the player's disappointment due to the deviation will increase, and there is a risk that the player's interest will be impaired. Is.

When the stop type is "probability change jackpot A" or "probability change jackpot B", if the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", the fluctuation time is 7 seconds "normal reach for probability variation hit". Is selected. If the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "99 to 198", "super reach for probability variation" with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected. That is, in the case of "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B", the variation pattern type in which the variation effect of the same variation time as in the case where the stop type is completely off is executed is selected.

Although the details will be described later, the fluctuation pattern type selected by the main control device 110 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command. Based on the fluctuation pattern command, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 executes the same display effect as the "short deviation" with the same fluctuation time when the fluctuation pattern type is "normal reach for probability variation jackpot A". To control. Further, when the fluctuation pattern type notified by the fluctuation pattern command is "super reach for probabilistic jackpot", control is performed so that the same display effect as "long deviation" with the same fluctuation time is executed. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine from the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that the "probability change jackpot A" or the "probability variation jackpot B" is difficult to obtain a prize ball. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by not being able to obtain the prize ball even though the jackpot is notified by the display effect. In addition, in the case of "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B", an effect as if the variation effect is continuing is executed as a display effect during the jackpot. That is, it is configured so that the appearance of the display effect does not change from the normal time. As a result, by winning the "probability change jackpot A", it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the time saving period has been reset. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the short period of time digested by that time has been wasted and lowering the motivation of the player for the game.

When the stop type is "normal jackpot A" and the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", "normal reach for normal hit" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is selected. If the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "99 to 198", "normal hit super reach" with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected. In this way, when selecting the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the "normal jackpot A" in which the prize ball is easily obtained, it is easy to select the fluctuation pattern type having a long fluctuation time as compared with the case where the stop type is "out of reach". As a result, when the player recognizes that the fluctuation pattern type has a long fluctuation time, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for obtaining a prize ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12B, the specified contents of the special drawing 2 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d2 will be described. In this special figure 2 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d2, the fluctuation pattern type that can be selected when the stop type is "complete deviation" is only "ultra-long deviation" with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds (5 minutes). That is, in the range where the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" (that is, all the values that the first variation type counter CS1 can take), "ultra-long deviation" is selected.

When the stop type is "out of reach", the only variation pattern that can be selected is "out of reach ultra long reach" with a variation time of 300 seconds. Further, when the stop type is "various jackpots", only "hit ultra long reach" with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds is selected. That is, when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in the low probability state (normal) of the special symbol, the high probability state (probability change) of the special symbol, and the time reduction state (time reduction) of the normal symbol, the lottery result is obtained. Regardless, the fluctuation pattern type with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds is selected.

In this way, by configuring so that an extremely long fluctuation pattern type is selected, once the fluctuation starts, it is disadvantageous that the lottery of special symbols cannot be received for a long time until the fluctuation ends. Since it can be set to a state, the player can enter the second position in a state other than the "consecutive villa state" (a low-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a special symbol, and a time-saving state of a normal symbol). It is possible to make the ball mouth 640 feel that the ball should not be hit. Therefore, the player is made to launch the ball aiming at the first entrance 64 in a state other than the "consecutive state", and the ball is aimed at the second entrance 640 in the "consecutive state". It can be launched. This pachinko machine 10 is designed on the assumption that only the lottery for the special symbol 1 is performed in the state other than the "consecutive villa state", and only the lottery for the special symbol 2 is performed in the "consecutive villa state". By preventing (suppressing) the player from aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "continuous villa state", the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought closer to the design value. Therefore, when the hole predicts sales from the design value of the ball output rate, it can be calculated more accurately.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a plurality of other configurations in order to prevent the ball from being launched by the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state". Is provided. For example, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extremely long (3 to 5 minutes) in a state other than the "consecutive villa state". Further, the opening period in which the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol hits is set to a short time (0.2 seconds x 1 time). As a result, even if the ball can be entered into the normal entry port 67, the electric accessory 640a is hardly opened (opens at a frequency of 0.2 seconds within a few minutes), so that the normal entry port 67 is opened. , And the player can prevent the ball from being launched toward the second entrance 640 provided on the downstream side thereof.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the detour accessory 700 is provided on the upstream side of the second entry port 640, the ball is launched and then reaches the second entry port 640. It takes 7 or more times to do this. Therefore, even if the ball is launched after recognizing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the electric accessory 640a is closed before the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (0.2 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “consecutive state”.

Further, as described above, even if the ball can be entered into the second entry port 640, if the ball is entered into the second entry port 640 if the special symbol is changing, the entry is suspended. Discarded without. That is, in a state other than the "consecutive state", the fluctuation time becomes extremely long, and even if the ball is inserted into the second entry port 640 during the fluctuation, a special symbol is designed based on the entry. 2 lottery will not be held. Therefore, in order to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is necessary to re-enter the ball into the second entrance 640 after the variation effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is completed. In a state other than the "consecutive villa state", since the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation time of 300 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol 2, the lottery can be received only every 300 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, since the game efficiency becomes extremely poor, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive villa state".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various configurations that are disadvantageous to the player when the pachinko machine 10 is launched into the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive villa state". As a result, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed even though it is not in the "consecutive state", and it is prevented (suppressed) that a large amount of prize balls are acquired by the player by winning the "probability change jackpot D". can.

In addition, when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed in the state other than the "consecutive villa state", the ball is launched aiming at the first entrance 64 in the 300-second variation effect performed based on the lottery. You may make a warning like this. As a result, it is possible to cause a player who plays a game aiming at the second entrance 640 even though the player is not in the "consecutive state" to quit the game method aiming at the second entrance 640. .. In addition, by displaying a warning effect, the clerk in the hall is also playing a game method different from the usual one (the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "ream villa state"). The player can be easily identified. Therefore, even if the player ignores the warning effect and continues the game method different from the usual one, the clerk in the hall who confirmed the warning effect can give direct attention. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the game method of launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "continuous villa state".

Next, with reference to FIG. 12 (c), the specified contents of the common probability variation non-time saving selection table 202d3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), the fluctuation pattern type that can be selected when the stop type is "completely off" is only "off" with a fluctuation time of 1 second. That is, "off" is selected in the range where the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" (that is, all the values that the first variation type counter CS1 can take). Further, the variation pattern type that can be selected when the stop type is "out of reach" is only "probability variation non-time saving out of normal reach" with a variation time of 2 seconds.

Further, when the stop type is "various jackpots", the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 179", and the "normal reach per probability variation non-time reduction" with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected. On the other hand, when the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "180 to 198" and the variation time is 5 seconds, "super reach per probabilistic non-time reduction" is selected.

In this way, in the high probability state (probability change) of the special symbol and the normal state (non-time saving) of the normal symbol (that is, in the "consecutive state"), the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed. When executed, it is configured to select a variation pattern type with a relatively short variation time (1 second to 5 seconds). This is because it is assumed that the player launches the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 where the entry is not suspended in the "consecutive state". That is, by configuring the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time to be selected, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball enters the second entry port 640 during the fluctuation. Therefore, when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation, the player is made to think that the lottery of the special symbol 2 is wasted, and the player feels dissatisfied with the game. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the "consecutive villa state" which is advantageous for the player without stress, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The fluctuation time set in each state is not limited to the contents specified in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c), and may be arbitrarily set. For example, in the special figure 2 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d2, the variation effect (variation pattern) of a longer variation time such as 1 hour or 5 hours may be selected. As a result, even if it becomes a "probability change jackpot D" in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by lottery of special symbol 2 in a state other than "ream villa state", it takes a very long time until the lottery result is obtained. can do. In other words, if a game method different from the usual one is used, the game efficiency can be extremely deteriorated, so even if it is added that a large number of prize balls can be obtained in the case of "probability change jackpot D". It can make you feel that it is not worth it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a game method different from the usual one. Further, for example, in the common probability variation non-time saving selection table 202d3, only the variation pattern type of the variation time of 1 second may be associated with all the variation types. As a result, it is possible to further prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 and being discarded during the variation effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 13A) displays the determination value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation effect (variation pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol. It is a data table specified for each aspect. That is, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit is defined. The fluctuation time is the period during which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol are lit alternately, and the stop symbol ("○" symbol if it hits the normal symbol, "x" if it is off. It means the total with the period when the symbol) is stopped and displayed. The details of the general map variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an outline of the general map variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 13A, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202e is composed of two types of data tables. That is, it is composed of a normal / probabilistic time-saving selection table 202e1 and a normal-figure non-time-saving selection table 202e2.

First, with reference to FIG. 13B, the specified contents of the normal / probabilistic time reduction selection table 202e1 will be described. In the normal / probabilistic time reduction selection table 202e1, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 are defined in association with each number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. There is. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for entering the normal entry port 67 is 0, and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the variation time is 180 seconds ( 3 minutes) variation pattern is selected. On the other hand, if the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "50 to 149", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 240 seconds (4 minutes) is selected, and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "150 to 149". If it is in the range of "198", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds (5 minutes) is selected.

In this way, when the number of reserved balls is 0, a very long fluctuation pattern of 3 to 5 minutes is selected, so that the second ball entry port 640 (and the normal ball entry port 67 on the upstream side thereof) can be opened. You can make them feel that they will lose if they aim. This is because the electric accessory 640a is not released during the change of the normal symbol, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 cannot be performed. Therefore, in the low probability state (normal) of the special symbol, the high probability state (probability change) of the special symbol, and the time saving state (time saving) of the normal symbol (that is, in a state other than the "ream villa state"), the player It is possible to launch a ball aiming at the first entry port 64.

Further, since a plurality of types of fluctuation times (3 minutes, 4 minutes, and 5 minutes) can be selected, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol ends. Therefore, in a state other than the "continuous villa state", it is possible to prevent the player from launching the ball at the timing when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol ends (the timing when the electric accessory 640a may be released). Can be suppressed).

In the present embodiment, the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol are configured to be changed alternately while the normal symbol (second symbol) is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time for switching from the "○" symbol to the "x" symbol and the time for switching from the "x" symbol to the "○" symbol may be randomly changed. As a result, during fluctuations, the period from when the "○" symbol is displayed until it is switched to the "x" symbol becomes longer, and when the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. Can be made difficult to distinguish (it can be made difficult to understand whether or not it was confirmed by the displayed symbol). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from launching the ball aiming at the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a in a state other than the "continuous villa state".

Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), when the number of reserved balls for entering the normal ball entry port 67 is 1 to 4, the variation is performed regardless of the value of the second variation type counter CS2. A variation pattern with a time of 0.2 seconds is selected. That is, if the fluctuation is started when the number of reserved balls is 0 and the entry to the normal symbol 67 is suspended during the fluctuation, it is short after the fluctuation effect started when the number of reserved balls is 0 is completed. During the period, the variable effect and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a are repeated. Then, when the holding ball is digested and the holding becomes 0, the fluctuation effect for 3 to 5 minutes is executed again. This operation will be described in more detail. In the following description, the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, when the probability of hitting the normal symbol is 100%) is assumed. That is, the description will be made on the assumption that the electric accessory 640a is always opened once for 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation effect of the normal symbol. This is because the time saving state of the normal symbol is the state of staying for the longest period in the game.

When a ball enters the normal entry port 67 while the number of reserved balls for entering the normal entry port 67 is 0, a variation effect (variation pattern effect) of 3 to 5 minutes is executed. If a ball enters the normal entry port 67 during the execution of this variation effect, the entry is suspended up to four times. Here, it is assumed that the number of reserved balls becomes 4 during the fluctuation period. Since a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of at least 3 minutes is set, if the player launches the ball aiming at the normal entry port 67, the ball can be easily entered into the normal entry port 67 four times or more. Because it can be done.

When the variation period of the variation effect started with the number of reserved balls for entering the normal entry port 67 has elapsed, the electric accessory 640a is closed after being opened for 0.2 seconds. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is closed, the variable effect corresponding to the first reserved ball is started. At the time when this variation effect is started, the number of reserved balls is 3, so the variation effect with a variation time of 0.2 seconds is executed, and the electric accessory 640a is released for 0.2 seconds. Similarly, for the second reserved ball and the third reserved ball, the electric accessory 640 is released for 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds.

Further, if the number of reserved balls is 0 at the time when the variable effect corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is executed, the variable effect of 3 minutes to 5 minutes is selected. Further, if a new reserved ball is generated, the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds is executed, and when the reserved ball becomes 0, the fluctuation effect of 3 minutes to 5 minutes is executed. Then, when a new ball entering the normal entry port 67 is suspended during the fluctuation effect of 3 to 5 minutes, the electric accessory 640a is released for 0.2 seconds after the variation effect is completed, as described above. And the fluctuation effect for 0.2 seconds are repeated.

The time from the end of the first variable effect (the variable effect started when the number of reserved balls is 0) to the start of the variable effect corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is Since it takes about 1.4 seconds (opening of the electric accessory 640a x 4 times + 0.2 second fluctuation x 3 times), when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is executed, a new reserved ball is executed. The number will be about two at most. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a limitation on the firing interval of balls, and is configured so that only 100 balls can be shot in one minute (that is, after one ball is fired, the ball is fired. This is because the interval between launching the next ball is set to be 0.6 seconds or more), so only two balls can be launched in 1.4 seconds.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low probability state (normal) of the special symbol, the high probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol, and the time saving state (time saving) of the normal symbol (that is, " When a ball is inserted into the normal ball entrance 67 in a state other than the "continuous villa state"), the normal ball port 67 held during the fluctuation effect is executed after the fluctuation effect of a long fluctuation time is executed. The opening of the electric accessory 640a for 0.2 seconds and the fluctuation effect for 0.2 seconds are repeated as many times as the number of times the ball enters the ball. That is, when the variation effect of the long variation time is completed, the opening of the electric accessory 640a and the variation effect according to the reserved ball are repeated in about 1 second. Then, the fluctuation effect of the long fluctuation time is executed again.

By executing the fluctuation corresponding to the reserved entry into the normal entry port 67 in a short period (around 1 second), the electric accessory 640a is released based on the end of the variation effect of the long fluctuation time. Even if the player launches the ball after confirming that it has been done, a short fluctuation time (0.2 seconds) before the ball reaches the second entrance 640 and after the fluctuation. It is possible to end the opening of the electric accessory 640a. This is because it takes 7 seconds or more from launching the ball to reaching the second entrance 640 by passing the detour accessory 700. In addition, as described above, when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in a state other than the "consecutive villa state", a fluctuation effect of 300 seconds (5 minutes) is set regardless of the lottery result. It is configured to. As a result, even if the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640, the variable effect continues for 5 minutes. Further, since the entry into the second entry port 640 is not suspended, the lottery for the next special symbol 2 cannot be executed until the fluctuation for at least 5 minutes is completed.

In this way, in a state other than the "consecutive state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes long, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits becomes short, so that the second ball is entered. It becomes difficult to get the ball into the mouth. Further, since the detour accessory 700 is configured to take a longer time for the ball to reach the second entrance 640, even if the lottery of the normal symbol is suspended, the change of the normal symbol ends. Even if the player launches the ball after the electric accessory 640a is opened, it is difficult for the ball to reach the second entrance 640 while the electric accessory 640a is open. Further, even if the ball can be entered into the second entry port 640, the fluctuation time is long (it takes a long time until the lottery result is obtained), so that it becomes difficult to execute the lottery for the special symbol 2. Since these are related to each other, it is significantly disadvantageous for the player to launch the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state". Therefore, in a state other than the "consecutive villa state", the player can be made to hit the ball aiming at the first entrance 64. Therefore, the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought close to the design value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13 (c), the specified contents of the selection table 202e2 for non-time saving of the normal figure will be described. Similar to the normal / probabilistic time saving selection table 202e1, the normal symbol probabilistic non-time saving selection table 202e2 also has the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the second variation type for each number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is defined in association with the value of the counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 13 (c), in the normal figure probability variation non-time saving selection table 202e2, the variation pattern with the variation time of 1 second is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls and the value of the second variation type counter CS2. It is configured in. As described above, in the high probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol to which this data table is referred, and in the normal state (non-time saving) of the normal symbol (that is, in the "consecutive state"), the electric accessory 640a Since the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is also long (1 second × 3 times), the frequency of opening the electric accessory 640a is significantly increased. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Further, in the present embodiment, each ball entry port is arranged so that the time it takes for the ball that has passed through the normal ball entry port 67 to reach the second ball entry port 640 is about 1.2 seconds. There is. As a result, in the "consecutive state", the variation effect executed by entering the ball into the normal ball entrance 67 is completed, and the variation effect is triggered at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened. The ball (that is, the ball that has entered the normal entry port 67) is configured to reach the second entry port 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 in the "consecutive state".

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The state setting table 202f is a data table that is referred to after the end of various jackpots to set the state after the end of the jackpot. In this state setting table 202f, the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot (whether the special symbol is in the high probability state or the low probability state) and the state of the normal symbol (the time saving period of the normal symbol, and the electric combination) are displayed. The opening period of the object 640a) and the variation pattern table to be set (which table is selected from the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d) are at least defined.

The state setting table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the "normal jackpot A" and the "normal jackpot B" are associated with a "low probability state of the special symbol" as the state of the special symbol. Further, as the state of the normal symbol, the "normal state of the normal symbol" (the time saving period of the normal symbol is 0 times) is associated, and the state in which the fluctuation time is long and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is short is associated. (That is, the normal / probabilistic time reduction selection table 202e1 is set to be selected). Further, as the tables referred to for selecting the variation pattern type, the special figure 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d1 and the special figure 2 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d2 are associated with each other. Further, "off" is associated with the state of the advantageous state flag 203i.

Therefore, at the end of "normal jackpot A" or "normal jackpot B", this state setting table 202f is referred to, a low probability state of the special symbol (probability variation flag 203f is turned off) is set, and the normal state of the normal symbol (normal symbol 203f is turned off). Set to 0) as the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203g, and set it in Special Figure 1 Normal / Probability Change Time Reduction Selection Table 202d1 and Special Figure 2 Normal / Probability Change Time Reduction Selection Table 202d2 as the fluctuation pattern table selected after the jackpot ends. , Set to "off" as the value of the advantageous state flag 203i.

On the other hand, the "probability variation jackpot A1" is associated with the "high probability state of the special symbol" as the state of the special symbol. Further, as the state of the normal symbol, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" having one time saving period is associated, and the state in which the fluctuation time is long and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is short is associated (that is,). , The normal / probabilistic time reduction selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 13B) is set to be selected. Further, as the tables referred to for selecting the variation pattern type, the special figure 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 12A) and the special figure 2 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d2 (FIG. 12). (B)) is associated. Further, the common probability variation non-time saving selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 12C) is selected based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is performed once (based on the end of the time saving period of the normal symbol). Is set. As a result, when a lottery for the special symbol 2 is performed after the time saving period (once) of the normal symbol is completed, the variation pattern type having a short variation time (1 second to 5 seconds) can be selected. can. Therefore, since the lottery of the special symbol 2 is smoothly performed during the "consecutive villa state", the player can be made to play the game in the "consecutive villa state" without feeling stress.

Therefore, at the end of the "probability variation jackpot A1", this state setting table 202f is referred to, the special symbol is set to the high probability state (probability variation flag 203f is turned on), and the time reduction state (time reduction) of the normal symbol having one time reduction period is set. Set to 1) as the value of the medium counter 203g, and set it in the special figure 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d1 and the special figure 2 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d2 as the fluctuation pattern table selected after the jackpot ends. Set to "off" as the value of the advantageous state flag 203i.

It should be noted that the "probability variation jackpot A2" to "probability variation jackpot A64" and "probability variation jackpot C" are also associated with other data, which are only associated with different times as the time saving period of the normal symbol. Is the same as "Probability change jackpot A1".

The "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot D" are associated with a "high probability state of the special symbol" as the state of the special symbol. Further, as the state of the normal symbol, the "normal state of the normal symbol" (the time saving period of the normal symbol is 0 times) is associated, and the state in which the fluctuation time is short and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is long is associated. (That is, it is set so that the selection table 202e2 for normal figure probability variation non-time saving (see FIG. 13C) is selected). Further, as a table referred to for selecting the variation pattern type, a common probability variation non-time saving selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 12C) is associated with the table.

Therefore, at the end of "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change jackpot D", this state setting table 202f is referred to, and the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variation flag 203f is turned on) is set, and the normal state of the normal symbol (probability variation flag 203f is turned on). It is set to 0) as the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g, set in the common probability variation non-time saving selection table 202d3 as the fluctuation pattern table selected after the jackpot ends, and set to “ON” as the value of the advantageous state flag 203i.

The "probability variation jackpot C1" is associated with a "high probability state of a special symbol" as a state of a special symbol. Further, as the state of the normal symbol, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" having a time saving period of 10 times is associated, and the state in which the fluctuation time is long and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is short is associated (that is,). , The normal / probabilistic time reduction selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 13B) is set to be selected. Further, as the tables referred to for selecting the variation pattern type, the special figure 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 12A) and the special figure 2 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d2 (FIG. 12). (B)) is associated. Further, the common probability variation non-time saving selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 12C) is selected based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times (based on the end of the time saving period of the normal symbol). Is set. As a result, when the special symbol 2 is drawn after the time saving period of the normal symbol is completed, the variation pattern type having a short variation time (1 second to 5 seconds) can be selected. Therefore, since the lottery of the special symbol 2 is smoothly performed during the "consecutive villa state", the player can be made to play the game in the "consecutive villa state" without feeling stress.

Therefore, at the end of the "probability change jackpot C1", this state setting table 202f is referred to, the special symbol is set to the high probability state (probability change flag 203f is turned on), and the time saving period is 10 times. Set to 10) as the value of the medium counter 203g, and set it in the special figure 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d1 and the special figure 2 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d2 as the fluctuation pattern table selected after the jackpot ends. Set to "off" as the value of the advantageous state flag 203i.

It should be noted that even for "probability change jackpot C2" to "probability change jackpot C6", only different times are associated as the time saving period of the normal symbol, and the other data associated with it is "probability variation jackpot C1". It is the same.

In this way, since the setting for each jackpot type is defined in the status setting table 202f, various status settings (described later) can be made by simply executing a simple process of reading the set value from the status setting table 202f at the end of the jackpot. It is possible to accurately set the probability change flag 203f, the time saving / medium counter 203g, the advantageous state flag 203i, and the like).

Subsequently, how the game state changes during the actual game by setting the state after the end of the jackpot based on the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. ..

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing transition conditions to other states for each possible state of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. First, a "normal state" (a low-probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) set when the pachinko machine 10 is initially set when the power is turned on will be described. The "normal state" is shown on the upper side of FIG. As shown in FIG. 15, in order to shift from this "normal state" to another state, it is necessary to be a big hit of a special symbol. As described above, the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 37.5.

When a special symbol becomes a big hit, the state of transition after the big hit ends differs depending on the big hit type. As shown in FIG. 15, in the low probability state of the special symbol, when the "normal jackpot A" is won by 5% of the case where the special symbol 1 is a big hit by the lottery, the special game state in which the number of rounds is one is set. After being granted, the normal state is resumed (see the upper left side of FIG. 15). Although it is possible to obtain a prize ball, it is disadvantageous for the player because it shifts to the "normal state" where it is difficult to be in the "consecutive state".

In addition, in the case of "Probability change jackpot B" where 5% of the jackpot is won by the lottery of special symbol 1, after the special game state of 4 rounds is given, the "consecutive villa state" is given. (High probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) shifts to (see the upper right side of FIG. 15). As described above, in this "consecutive villa state", it is easy to become a "probability change jackpot D" in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, which is advantageous for the player. As described above, in the case of "probability change jackpot B", the first specific winning opening 65a is opened only for a maximum of 0.2 seconds in each round, so that it is difficult for the player to obtain the prize ball. ..

In addition, if the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in "probability change jackpot A" (any of "probability variation jackpot A1" to "probability variation jackpot A64"), after the special gaming state with 4 rounds is granted, It shifts to the "probability variation time saving state" (high probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) (see the upper center of FIG. 15). As described above, the number of times is set according to the jackpot type in the time saving period of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 9A). In the "normal state", it was not possible to shift to the "consecutive villa state" unless the "probability change jackpot B" was won, but in the "probability change time saving state", in addition to winning the "probability change jackpot B", the normal design Even when the time saving state ends, the state shifts to the "continuous villa state", so that it becomes easier to shift to the "continuous villa state" as compared with the "normal state". Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player than the "normal state" by shifting to the "probability change time saving state". As described above, in the case of "probability change jackpot A", the first specific winning opening 65a is opened only for a maximum of 0.2 seconds in each round, so that it is difficult for the player to obtain the prize ball. ..

In this way, the "normal state" is a state in which it is difficult to shift to the "consecutive villa state", which is the most disadvantageous state for the player. As described above, this normal state shifts when the initial setting is performed (set to the initial state) when the power is turned on. Therefore, for example, when the hall newly introduces the pachinko machine 10 (pachinko machine in the initial state). When 10 is installed), all the introduced pachinko machines 10 can be started from a normal state which is disadvantageous to the player. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from starting from a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall by starting all the pachinko machines 10 from an advantageous state when the hall is opened.

In addition, the "normal state" is a state in which it is difficult to shift to the "consecutive villa state", but if it becomes a probabilistic jackpot B when it becomes a jackpot, it will be in the "consecutive villa state" without the short period of time of the normal symbol. Can be migrated to. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the winning of the probability change jackpot B will directly shift to the "consecutive villa state", the motivation for the game can be maintained.

Next, the "probability variation time saving state" (high probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) shown in the central portion of FIG. 15 will be described. As shown in the central part of FIG. 15, in order to shift from this "probability change time saving state" to another state, it becomes a big hit of a special symbol, or a normal symbol that shifts after the end of "probability change jackpot A". It is necessary to digest a short period of time (digest a specified number of times). As described above, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the special symbol is 1/30.

First, in the "probability change time reduction state", when the "probability change jackpot A" is won by 90% of the case where the special symbol 1 is a big hit, the "probability change time reduction state" is entered after the jackpot ends as in the "normal state". (See the center left side of FIG. 15). That is, the same state (“probability change time saving state”) is looped. Even if you win the "Probability change jackpot A", it is difficult for the player to get the prize ball, so if you continue to win the "Probability change jackpot A" (continue to loop the "Probability change time saving state"), it will be disadvantageous for the player. Become.

In addition, when the "normal jackpot A" is won by 5% of the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery, the game shifts to the "normal state" after the jackpot ends (see the lower left part of the center of FIG. 15). That is, it will be in a disadvantageous state after the end of the big hit. Then, in the case of "probability change jackpot B", which wins at 5% of the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery, the game shifts to the "consecutive villa state" after the jackpot ends (see the lower center of FIG. 15). ). In this "consecutive villa state", as described above, it becomes easy to win the "probability change jackpot D" in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, if the time saving state of the normal symbol ends before the special symbol becomes a big hit (when the special symbol is continuously removed for the set time saving period), the player will be in the most advantageous "consecutive state". Transition (see the center right side of FIG. 15).

Next, the "consecutive villa state" (high probability state of the special symbol and normal state of the normal symbol) shown in the lower part of FIG. 15 will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 15, in order to shift from this "consecutive villa state" to another state, it is necessary to be a big hit of a special symbol. As described above, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the special symbol is 1/30.

In the "consecutive villa state", if the "normal jackpot B" is won at 5% of the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit, the game shifts to the "normal state" after being given a special game state for one round. (See the lower left side of FIG. 15). That is, the "consecutive villa state" that is advantageous to the player ends, and the state becomes disadvantageous to the player ("normal state").

In addition, when the "probability change jackpot C" is won by 5% of the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit, after the special game state of one round is given, the game shifts to the "probability change time saving state" (FIG. 15). See bottom left). That is, in this case as well, the "consecutive villa state" that is advantageous to the player ends, and the state becomes disadvantageous to the player ("probability change time saving state"). As described above, the time saving period of the normal symbol set after the end of the jackpot is set to a different value depending on the jackpot type (“probability variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6”) (FIG. 10 (a)). reference).

Furthermore, when the "probability change jackpot D" is won by 90% of the cases where the special symbol 2 is a big hit by the lottery, the special game state of 4 rounds is given, and then the game shifts to the "consecutive state" again (Fig.). See bottom right of 15.) That is, the "consecutive villa state" that is advantageous for the player loops. As described above, in the case of "probability change jackpot D", the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until 5 balls are won) in each round, so that the player can win. You can get a lot of prize balls.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the "probability variation time saving state", by ending the time saving state of the normal symbol (because the special symbol is continuously removed for the set time saving period). It is possible to shift to the "continuous villa state". Therefore, the more the special symbols are removed continuously, the more the player can feel that the "consecutive state" is approaching. Can be provided to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, once the "ream villa state" is reached, 90% of the jackpots can be won, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained. In addition, the "ream villa state" is set again after the jackpot ends. It becomes. That is, it is in a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that the player will shift to this "series villa state" and loop this "sequential villa state" more times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 16, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the first variation type counter CS1 used for the variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the second variation is used for selecting the variation pattern. The type counter CS2 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 40). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the mouth 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 execution area 203b, and a random number counter C1 per first, a type counter C2 per first, and a stop type are provided according to the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640. Each value of the selection counter C3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a ball. 2 The value of the random number counter C4 per second is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the ball entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches a maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, as described above, the first random number table 202a has a high probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for probability time (the period during which the special symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently (see FIG. 7 (b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (0 to 199). After reaching the maximum value (199), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first random number. 1 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, when the probability of the special symbol is low, there are eight random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol, and the random numbers are "5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 2011, 262, 291". Is stored in the first random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 8 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1 / 37.5".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values "4,38,64,99,122,151,183,249,270" have a high probability. It is stored in the random number table for the first time. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/30".

In the present embodiment, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, "normal jackpot A", "normal jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot A1" to "probability variation" are obtained according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Of the 74 types of jackpots, "Big hit A64", "Probability change jackpot B", "Probability change jackpot C1" to "Probability change jackpot C6", and "Probability change jackpot D", one of the jackpot types is selected as the big value type for special figure 1. It is selected from the table 202b1 (see FIG. 8A) or the hit type selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 8B).

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is deviated from the “disengaged reach” (for example, Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: 90 to 99) and "completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "off reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, and it becomes difficult to select the "off reach". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "out of reach" is as wide as 80 to 99, and "out of reach" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do.

The first variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern type from the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11B). For example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198. It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The first variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the first fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be determined. It is determined. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of this, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11 (a)), it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. Further, as described above, the second random number table 202c has a high probability of hitting the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (a period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for time (the period during which the normal symbol is in a time-shortened state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

The second variation type counter CS2 is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern type from the general diagram variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 13A), and is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example. It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time of the variation effect indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 16, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 40) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 39) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and the like. It has a symbol holding ball number counter 203e, a probability change flag 203f, a time saving medium counter 203g, a look-ahead probability change middle flag 203h, and an advantageous state flag 203i.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are set to the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting prize, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol is drawn. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. The various types of information include hit / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

The special symbol 2 execution area 203b is a storage area that temporarily stores (stores) each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 at the timing when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640. The lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed based on each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 execution area 203b. As described above, since the ball entering the second entry port 640 is not held, the holding area is not provided unlike the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding first area). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in the other hold areas are stored. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 32).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 32 and S405 in FIG. 34). ). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 36).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. (S703: No in FIG. 37).

The probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation flag 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It indicates that the symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation flag 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial state of the probability variation flag 203f is set to off, a special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and the probability variation flag 203f is set to on at the end of any of "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot D". NS. Further, it is set to off when the "normal jackpot A" or the "normal jackpot B" ends.

When the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 33) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing, the state of the probability variation flag 203f is referred to, and if that state is on, the special symbol is based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B). While the lottery is performed, if the state of the probability variation flag 203f is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 7B) (S303 in FIG. 33). , S304). Similarly, in the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 35), if the probability variation flag 203f is on, the special symbol is based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B). While the lottery is performed, if the state of the probability variation flag 203f is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 7B) (S507 in FIG. 35). , S508).

The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving medium counter 203g is set to zero, a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and at the end of "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot C", the jackpot type is changed. The corresponding value is set. After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203 g becomes 0 (S215 in FIG. 32).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the second random number table for high probability time (see FIG. 11A). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0, the normal symbol is drawn based on the second random number table for low probability (see FIG. 11A). A lottery is held (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 36).

The pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is set by the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired according to the start winning. Whether the winning data should be analyzed as a probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol), or the pachinko machine 10 analyzes the winning data as the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). It is a flag indicating whether to do it.

When the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is on, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. On the other hand, when the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is off, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. This look-ahead probability changing flag 203h is initialized off at the time of initial setting of the RAM (see S915 in FIG. 39), and each time it is determined that the pre-read lottery result is "probability change jackpot A" to "probability change jackpot D". Is set to on (see S410 in FIG. 34 and S513 in FIG. 35). Further, each time the pre-read lottery result is determined to be "normal jackpot A" or "normal jackpot B", it is set to off (see S411 in FIG. 34 and S514 in FIG. 35).

If the pre-reading of the lottery in the special symbol is performed and the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is on, the first hit random number table for high probability, the stop type selection table for high probability, and the first hit. Each table in the type selection table is compared with the winning data acquired according to the starting winning. On the other hand, if the look-ahead probability changing flag 203h is off, each table of the first random number table for low probability, the stop type selection table for low probability, and the first type selection table for low probability, and the start winning prize The winning data obtained in the above is compared.

The advantageous state flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not it is the most advantageous "consecutive villa state" for the player described above. A table corresponding to the gaming state is selected from the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d and the normal map variation pattern selection table 202e according to the state of the advantageous state flag 203i. This advantageous state flag 203i is turned on when the "consecutive state" is reached (that is, when the time saving period set after the end of the jackpot ends, and when the "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change jackpot D" ends). (See S217 in FIG. 32). In addition, it is set to off at the end of "normal jackpot A", "normal jackpot B", "probability change jackpot A", and "probability variation jackpot C" that do not become "consecutive villa state" after the end of the jackpot.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a, a rear setting table 222b, and a continuous notice determination table 222c. The variation pattern table 222a is a data table for setting a detailed mode of the variation effect based on the rough variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. The variation pattern table 222a defines modes of variation effect corresponding to all variation pattern types that can be notified by the variation pattern command.

The back setting table 222b is a data table referred to for setting a back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, seven types of back surfaces, back surface A to back surface G, are configured to be selectable, and whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the "consecutive villa state" according to the set back surface type. It is structured so that it can be suggested whether or not, and the remaining time reduction period.

The back surface A is a rear view image (wilderness stage) in which the wilderness is displayed on the back surface (see FIG. 23 (a)). The back surface A is a back surface type that is easily set when the time saving period of the normal symbol is 20 times or more or in the low probability state of the special symbol. Further, the back surface B is a back image (river stage) in which the river is displayed on the back surface, and is a back surface type that is easily set when the time saving period of the normal symbol is within 20 times remaining (see FIG. 23 (b)). Further, the back surface C is a back image (forest stage) in which the forest is displayed on the back surface, and is a back surface type that is easily set when the time saving period of the normal symbol is within 10 times remaining (see FIG. 24 (a)). .. Further, the back surface D is a back image (cave stage) in which the cave is displayed on the back surface, and is a back surface type set in the case of the “consecutive villa state” (see FIG. 27 (a)).

The back surface E to the back surface G are for suggesting to the player when the time saving period of the normal symbol is likely to end (that is, when there is a possibility of shifting to the "consecutive state"). It is a back type (ceiling notification stage) (see FIG. 26 (a)). The back surface E to the back surface G are set when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends with the back surface A to C set respectively.

In this way, by changing the back surface type according to the state and the remaining time and short period, the player can be made to predict the state from the back image. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the back setting table 222b will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 18. The back setting table 202b is a data table in which each of the above-mentioned back types is defined in association with the value of the ceiling count counter 223e and the value of the back determination counter 223h, which will be described later. When the lottery of the special symbol is executed or when the jackpot is finished, it is determined whether or not to change the back type by referring to the back setting table 222b. Although details will be described later, the ceiling count counter 223e is a counter that counts the remaining time reduction period, and the rear determination counter 223h is 0 to 127 each time the main process (see FIG. 44) is executed by the MPU 221. It is a loop counter that is updated in the range of.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the rear setting table 222b is composed of six types of data tables having different specified contents. Specifically, it is set on the back A time setting table 222b1 that is referred to when it is set on the back A, the back B time setting table 222b2 that is referred to when it is set on the back B, and the back C. Based on the big hit, the rear C time setting table 222b3 which is referred to when the time is set, and the notification time setting table 222b4 for switching to the back which notifies the fact when there is a high possibility that the time saving period has passed. I set it on the ceiling reset time setting table 222b5, which is usually referred to when the time saving period of the symbol is reset, and on the back (rear side EG), which suggests the end of the time saving period, but the time saving period was not finished. It is composed of the rear rear setting table 222b6 for notification, which is referred to in the case (when the change on the rear surface is fake).

First, with reference to FIG. 17B, the rear surface A time setting table 222b1, which is one of the data tables constituting the rear setting table 222b, will be described. As described above, the back surface A time setting table 222b1 is a table referred to for determining whether or not to change the back surface type when the back surface A (wilderness stage) is set.

As shown in FIG. 17B, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 10 in the rear A time setting table 222b1, the value of the rear determination counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 13" on the rear A (wilderness stage). ) Is associated. Further, the back surface C is associated with the range in which the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is "14 to 127". That is, when the remaining time reduction period is 10 times with the back surface A, if the value of the back surface judgment counter 223h is in the range of "14 to 127", the back surface type is changed to the back surface C, and the back surface determination counter 223h If the value is in the range of "0 to 13", the back type remains the back A and is not changed. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that the ceiling count counter 223e can take, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface C is 114, which is "14 to 127". Therefore, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 10, the back surface The probability of being changed to C is about 89% (114/128).

When the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 20, the back surface A (wilderness stage) is associated with the value of the back surface determination counter 223h in the range of "0 to 13". Further, the back surface B is associated with the range in which the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is "14 to 127". That is, when the remaining time reduction period is 20 times with the back surface A, if the value of the back surface judgment counter 223h is in the range of "14 to 127", the back surface type is changed to the back surface B, and the back surface determination counter 223h If the value is in the range of "0 to 13", the back type remains the back A and is not changed. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that the ceiling count counter 223e can take, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface B is 114, which is "14 to 127". Therefore, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 20, the back surface The probability of being changed to B is about 89% (114/128).

Further, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 21 to 99, the back surface A (wilderness stage) is associated with the value of the back surface determination counter 223h in the range of "0 to 125". Further, the back surface B is associated with the value "126" of the back surface determination counter 223h. Then, the back surface C is associated with the value "127" of the back surface determination counter 223h. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that the ceiling count counter 223e can take, only one value is changed to the back surface B and one value is changed to the back surface C, so the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is In the case of 21 or more, the probability of being changed to the back surface B and the back surface C is about 0.8% (1/128), respectively.

Although not shown, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 9 times or less and the value is in the range of 11 to 19 times, the rear image is not changed regardless of the value of the rear determination counter 223h (rear surface A). Will remain).

Further, the method of selecting the back surface type in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is the same as the case where the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 21 to 99. That is, the back surface B is associated with the value "126" of the back surface determination counter 223h, and the back surface C is associated with the value "127" of the back surface determination counter 223h. This makes it difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the "normal state" or the time saving period of the normal symbol remains 21 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized as the most disadvantageous "normal state" for the player and quitting the game at that time, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e becomes 20 (that is, when the remaining time reduction period becomes 20 times), it is easy to change to the back surface B, and the ceiling count counter 223e When the value of is 10 (that is, when the remaining time saving period is 10 times), it is easily changed to the back surface B. Further, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 21 or more (when the remaining time saving period is 21 times or more), it is difficult to change to another back type. As a result, by changing to the back surface B, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a high possibility that the remaining time saving period is 20 times. It can make you want to continue the game until it is played at least 20 times. In addition, by changing to the back surface C, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that the remaining time saving period is 10 times, so from the change of the back surface until the special symbol lottery is performed at least 10 times. It can make you want to continue the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17 (c), the rear surface B time setting table 222b2, which is one of the data tables constituting the rear setting table 222b, will be described. As described above, the back surface B time setting table 222b2 is a table referred to for determining whether or not to change the back surface type when the back surface B (river stage) is set.

As shown in FIG. 17C, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 10 in the rear B time setting table 222b3, the value of the rear determination counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 13” for the rear B (river stage). ) Is associated. Further, the back surface C is associated with the range in which the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is "14 to 127". That is, when the remaining time reduction period is 10 times with the back surface B, if the value of the back surface judgment counter 223h is in the range of "14 to 127", the back surface type is changed to the back surface C, and the back surface determination counter 223h If the value is in the range of "0 to 13", the back type remains unchanged as back B. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that the ceiling count counter 223e can take, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface C is 114, which is "14 to 127". Therefore, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 10, the back surface The probability of being changed to C is about 89% (114/128).

On the other hand, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 21 to 99, the back surface A (wilderness stage) is associated with the value of the back surface determination counter 223h in the range of "0 to 13". Further, the back surface B is associated with the value of the back surface determination counter 223h in the range of "14 to 126". Then, the back surface C is associated with the value "127" of the back surface determination counter 223h. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that the ceiling count counter 223e can take, 14 values are changed to the back surface A. Therefore, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 21 or more, the value is changed to the back surface A. The probability is about 11% (14/128). Further, since only one value is changed to the back surface C, the probability of being changed to the back surface C is about 0.8% (1/128) when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 21 or more.

Further, the method of selecting the back surface type in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is the same as the case where the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 21 to 99. That is, the back surface A is associated with the range in which the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is "0 to 13", and the back surface C is associated with the value "127" of the back surface determination counter 223h. This makes it difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the "normal state" or the time saving period of the normal symbol remains 21 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized as the most disadvantageous "normal state" for the player and quitting the game at that time, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e becomes 10 (that is, when the remaining time saving period becomes 10 times), the back surface B is easily changed to the back surface C. There is. Further, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 21 or more (when the remaining time saving period is 21 times or more), it is easily changed from the back surface B to the back surface A (about 11%). As a result, even if the value of the ceiling count counter 222b1 on the back surface A is changed to the back surface B even though the value is 21 to 99, it can be changed to the back surface A again with a relatively short number of fluctuations. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the back surface B from being continued for a long time even though the time saving period is 21 times or more. That is, the longer the back surface B continues, the more likely it is that the remaining time saving period is 20 times or less. Therefore, the remaining time saving period can be predicted more accurately by having the player refer to the back surface.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18A, the back C time setting table 222b3, which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b, will be described. As described above, the back C time setting table 222b3 is a table referred to for determining whether or not to change the back type when the back C (forest stage) is set.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 11 or more in the rear C time setting table 222b3, the value of the rear determination counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 26” and the rear A (wilderness). Stage) is associated. Further, the back surface C is associated with the range in which the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is "27 to 127". That is, when the remaining time reduction period is 11 times or more, the value of the rear determination counter 223h is changed to the rear A in the range of "0 to 26", and the value of the rear determination counter 223h is "27 to 127". If it is in the range of ", the back type remains the back C and is not changed. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that the ceiling count counter 223e can take, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface A is 27 from "0 to 26", so when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 11 or more. The probability of being changed to the back surface A is about 21% (27/128).

Further, the method of selecting the back surface type in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is the same as the case where the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 11 to 99. That is, the back surface determination counter 223h associates the back surface A with the range of "0 to 26", and the back surface determination counter 223h associates the back surface C with the range of "27 to 127". This makes it difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the "normal state" or the time saving period of the normal symbol remains 11 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized as the most disadvantageous "normal state" for the player and quitting the game at that time, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 10 or less, the back surface C is not changed to another back surface type (back surface A or back surface B). Further, when the value of the changed ceiling count counter 223e is 11 or more (that is, when the remaining time saving period is 10 times), the back surface C is easily changed to the back surface A (about 21%). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the back surface C from being continued for a long time even though the time saving period is 11 times or more. That is, the longer the back surface C continues, the more likely it is that the remaining time reduction period is 10 times or less. Therefore, by having the player refer to the back surface, the remaining time reduction period can be predicted more accurately.

Next, the notification time switching table 222b4, which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b, will be described with reference to FIG. 18B. As described above, the notification time switching table 222b4 is a table referred to when there is a high possibility that the time saving period has passed, in order to switch to the back surface for notifying that fact.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shifts to a “consecutive villa state” in which it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 when a short period of time elapses. As described above, this "consecutive villa state" is advantageous for the player because it tends to be a "probability change jackpot D" in which a large number of prize balls can be easily obtained when a jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2. However, even in this "consecutive state", the ball does not prevent the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64. Further, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1, as described above, it is easy to win the "probability change big hit A" in which the time is shortened for the normal symbol after the end of the big hit. Therefore, if the player continues to launch the ball aiming at the first entrance 64 without noticing that it has entered the "continuous villa state", even though it has shifted to the "continuous villa state", " There is a risk that the "consecutive villa state" will end by winning the "probability change jackpot A".

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be changed to the back type (see FIG. 26), which suggests that the pachinko machine 10 has been in the “consecutive state” based on the elapse of a short period of time. In addition, this change of the back type is made when it is determined that a short period of time elapses due to pre-reading (that is, the lottery of special symbols for the number of reserved balls is executed to shift to the "consecutive state"). Will be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from launching the ball aiming at the first entrance 64 after the back type is changed. It is possible to prevent the lottery from being held.

As shown in FIG. 18B, when it is determined that the time saving period elapses in the state set on the back surface A, the value is changed to the back surface E regardless of the value of the back surface determination counter 223e. Similar to the back surface A, the back surface E displays a rear image of the wilderness, and since the time saving period may end, it is a game to stop the injection of the ball into the first entry port 64. A notification image (see FIG. 26 (a)) prompting the person is displayed.

Similarly, when it is determined that the time saving period elapses in the state set on the back surface B, the value is changed to the back surface F regardless of the value of the back surface determination counter 223e. Further, when it is determined that the time saving period elapses in the state set on the back surface C, the value is changed to the back surface G regardless of the value of the back surface determination counter 223e.

Even if the time saving period does not elapse, if the continuous advance notice effect (a story-like effect executed over a plurality of variable effects) is executed, it will be changed to this back surface E. It is configured in. As a result, even if the notification image (see FIG. 26A) is displayed, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not to shift to the "consecutive villa state" until the result of the continuous advance notice effect is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more enjoyable the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the ceiling reset setting table 222b5, which is one of the data tables constituting the rear setting table 222b, will be described with reference to FIG. 19A. As described above, this ceiling reset setting table 222b5 becomes a jackpot of a special symbol, and when a time saving period is newly set (or a normal state of a normal symbol is set), after the jackpot ends. It is a data table referred to for selecting a rear image according to the state of.

As shown in FIG. 19A, in the ceiling reset setting table 222b5, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 1 to 10 or more (when the time saving period given after the end of the jackpot is 10 times or less), The rear surface A (wilderness stage) is associated with the range in which the value of the rear surface determination counter 223h is "0 to 13". Further, the back surface C is associated with the range in which the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is "14 to 127". That is, when the time saving period given after the jackpot ends is 10 times or less, the back type is set to the back A in the range where the value of the back judgment counter 223h is "0 to 13", and the value of the back judgment counter 223h is set. If it is in the range of "14 to 127", the back surface type is set to the back surface C.

When the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 11 to 20 (when the time saving period given after the end of the jackpot is 11 to 20 times), the value of the rear determination counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 13". The back surface A (wilderness stage) is associated with it. Further, the back surface B is associated with the range in which the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is "14 to 127". That is, when the time saving period given after the jackpot ends is 11 to 20 times, the back type is set to the back A in the range where the value of the back judgment counter 223h is "0 to 13", and the back judgment counter 223h If the value is in the range of "14 to 127", the back surface type is set to the back surface B.

When the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 21 to 99 (when the time saving period given after the end of the jackpot is 21 times or more), the value of the back determination counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 89". (Wilderness stage) is associated. Further, the back surface B is associated with the range in which the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is "90 to 114". Further, the back surface C is associated with the range in which the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is "115-127". That is, when the time saving period given after the jackpot ends is 21 times or more, the back type is set to the back A in the range where the value of the back judgment counter 223h is "0 to 89", and the value of the back judgment counter 223h is set. The back surface type is set to the back surface B in the range of "90 to 114", and the back surface type is set to the back surface C in the range of "115-127" in the value of the back surface determination counter 223h.

When the special symbol is set to the low probability state (normal state), the back image is selected at the same ratio as when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 21 to 99. That is, the back surface determination counter 223h is associated with the back surface A with respect to the range of "0 to 89", the back surface determination counter 223h is associated with the back surface B with respect to the range of "90 to 114", and the back surface determination counter 223h is associated with the range. Is associated with the back surface C with respect to the range of "115-127". This makes it difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the "normal state" or the time saving period of the normal symbol remains 21 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized as the most disadvantageous "normal state" for the player and quitting the game at that time, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

In this way, the types of back images that are easily selected are different depending on the short period of time given after the end of the jackpot. Specifically, the back surface C is easily selected when the time saving period is 10 times or less. Further, when the time saving period is 11 to 20 times, the back surface B is easily selected, and when the time saving period is 21 times or more, the back surface A is easily selected. Furthermore, since the back surface A may be selected even when the time reduction period is short (within 20 times), even if the back surface A is set after the jackpot ends, it is said that the time reduction period of 21 times or more is selected. Cannot be determined. Therefore, even if a time saving period of 21 times or more is selected, it is possible to make the player feel that a small time saving period may have been set, so that the player can continue the game. When the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot, the back surface A is set. Further, when the "consecutive villa state" is set after the end of the jackpot, the back surface D is set.

The mode that suggests the remaining time saving period is not limited to this. For example, the character's clothing may be changed according to the remaining time and short period, or the character itself may be changed to a different character (for example, a girl's character). In addition, the display mode of the third symbol may be changed, or the sound effect, music, or the like may be changed according to the remaining time and short period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, a rear view setting table 222b6 for notification, which is one of the data tables constituting the above, will be described. As described above, in the rear side setting table 222b6 for notification, when the back surface E to the back surface G are set and the time saving state is not completed, the setting of the rear surface E to the rear surface G is completed and the normal rear surface (rear surface A) is completed. It is a data table referred to for returning to the back surface C). As a result, the player who has stopped launching the ball due to the display of the back surface E to the back surface G can shoot the ball again aiming at the first ball entry port 64.

As shown in FIG. 19B, the backside setting table 222b6 for notification defines the backside type to be set in association with the value of the continuous notice counter 223i. Although details will be described later, the continuous advance notice counter 223i is a counter for determining the number of times of continuous advance notice effect that is executed over five variable effects. The continuous advance notice counter 223i is set to 4 at the start of the continuous advance notice effect, the variable effect is executed, and the value is decremented by 1 each time the effect progresses.

As shown in FIG. 19B, when the currently set back surface is the back surface E, when the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i is 0 (that is, the variable effect to be executed last in the continuous advance notice effect). In some cases), it can be switched to the back surface A. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i is 1 to 4 (that is, when the continuous advance notice effect is in the middle), the value is not changed from the back surface E.

Further, when the currently set back surface is the back surface F, when the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i is 0 (that is, in the case of the last variable effect executed in the continuous advance notice effect), the process goes to the back surface B. Can be switched. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i is 1 to 4 (that is, when the continuous advance notice effect is in the middle), the value is not changed from the back surface F.

Further, when the currently set back surface is the back surface E, when the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i is 0 (that is, in the case of the last variable effect executed in the continuous advance notice effect), the process goes to the back surface A. Can be switched. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i is 1 to 4 (that is, when the continuous advance notice effect is in the middle), the value is not changed from the back surface E.

In this way, in the variable effect executed at the end of the continuous advance notice effect, the rear image is configured to return from the back type for notification (back E to back G) to the normal back type (back A to back C). Has been done. As a result, the player who has stopped launching the ball according to the back type (back surface E to back surface G) for notification can be made to launch the ball again.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The continuous notice determination table 222c is a data table used for determining whether or not to set a continuous notice effect (a story-like effect executed over a plurality of variable effects). The details of the continuous notice determination table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (c).

FIG. 19C is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuous notice determination table 222c. The continuous notice determination table 222c defines a determination value of the advance notice determination counter 223j when it is determined that the continuous advance notice is set in association with the value of the ceiling number counter 223e. Although details will be described later, the notice determination counter 223j is a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 127 each time the main process (see FIG. 44) is executed by the MPU 221. The continuous advance notice effect set here is a so-called ghost effect, and does not shift to the "consecutive villa state" even after the continuous advance notice effect ends.

As shown in FIG. 19C, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is in the range of 1 to 5, there is no value of the advance notice determination counter 223j which is determined to set the continuous advance notice effect. If the time reduction period is 5 times remaining, a continuous advance notice effect (not a mess) that shifts to the "consecutive villa state" is set.

On the other hand, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is in the range of 6 to 10, it is determined that the continuous notice effect is set in the range where the value of the notice determination counter 223j is "0 to 6". Further, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is in the range of 11 to 20, it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is set in the range of the value of the notice determination counter 223j of "0 to 13". Further, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 21 or more, it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is set in the range where the value of the notice determination counter 223j is "0 to 2".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is difficult to set the continuous advance notice effect when the remaining time reduction period is 21 or more, and the continuous advance notice effect is set when the remaining time reduction period is 11 to 20 times. It is configured to be easy. As a result, even if the player does not enter the consecutive villa state after the end of the continuous advance notice production, the player can be made to think that the time saving period may be within 20 times, so that the motivation to continue the game is motivated. Can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a ceiling count counter 223e, and a consecutive villa state flag 223f. , The back flag 223g, the back determination counter 223h, the continuous advance notice counter 223i, and the advance notice determination counter 223j are provided at least.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1608 in FIG. 46). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball number of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1603 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 51). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2107 in FIG. 51). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, it is determined to set the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) as it is.

As described above, the ceiling number counter 223e is a counter used for determining the remaining number of times in a short period of time set after the end of the jackpot. Based on the value of the ceiling count counter 223e, the rear image is changed, the continuous notice effect is set, and the like. The ceiling count counter 223e is set with a value according to the jackpot type when the jackpot fluctuation pattern is notified from the main control device 110 by the fluctuation pattern command (see S1705 and S1708 in FIG. 47). Further, each time the fluctuation pattern indicating the deviation of the special symbol is notified by the fluctuation pattern command, it is subtracted by 1 (see S1802 in FIG. 48).

The consecutive villa state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not it is the period for executing the "continuous villa state" effect, and if that state is on, the current state corresponds to the "continuous villa state". do. Specifically, the back surface D is set as the back image. Further, if the consecutive villa state flag 223f is off, a normal effect is set. When the variation type notified by the variation pattern command is the variation effect corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D (see S1710 in FIG. 47), the time saving state of the normal symbol is set in the consecutive villa state flag 223f. It is set to on when it is determined that the command has been completed (see S1804 in FIG. 48). Further, it is set to off when the fluctuation type notified by the fluctuation pattern command is normal jackpot A, normal jackpot B, probability variation jackpot A, or probability variation jackpot C (see S1706 and S1709 in FIG. 47).

The back flag 223g is a flag indicating the type of the back image currently set. This back flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte. Then, 00H to 06H are associated with each of the values corresponding to the back surface A to the back surface G. For example, when the back surface C is set, 02H (0010B in binary notation) is set. The value of the back flag 223g is changed each time the type of the back image is changed (see S1504, S1508, S1512 in FIG. 45, and S1810 and S1815 in FIG. 48).

The rear surface determination counter 223h is a counter referred to for determining whether or not to change the rear surface type. Based on the value of the back surface determination counter 223h and the specified contents of the back surface setting table 222b, it is determined whether or not to change the back surface type. The back surface determination counter 223h is composed of a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 127, and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 44).

The continuous advance notice counter 223i is a counter indicating how many times the variable effect is being executed when the continuous advance notice effect set over the five variable effects is executed. Depending on the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i, the mode of the variable effect executed during the continuous advance notice effect is set, or the rear image is set. The value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i is set to 4 when the continuous advance notice effect is set (see S1906 in FIG. 49), and is subtracted by 1 each time the start of the variable effect is notified by the variable pattern command during the continuous advance notice effect. (See S1903 in FIG. 49).

The advance notice determination counter 223j is a counter referred to for determining whether or not to set the continuous advance notice effect. Based on the value of the advance notice determination counter 223j and the specified contents of the continuous advance notice determination table 222c, it is determined whether or not to set the continuous advance notice effect. The notice determination counter 223j is composed of a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 127, and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 44).

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to have at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 52) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 54 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2203 and S2204 in FIG. 52).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 21, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 21 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 21 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 21 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 21 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 21 (c) are alternately displayed in the third symbol display device. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the seven types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 22A is an explanatory diagram showing " In contrast to the rear surface A corresponding to the "wilderness stage", FIG. 22B shows the rear surface B corresponding to the "river stage", the rear surface C corresponding to the "forest stage", the rear surface D corresponding to the "cave stage", and the rear surface D. It is shown for the back surface E to the back surface G corresponding to each ceiling notification stage.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to G is a character whose image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is prepared in ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to G (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the back type is changed based on the back setting table, the MPU 231 sets the range between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area, and the image at the initial position is the third symbol. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 22A, the back surface A corresponding to the wilderness stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. By making all the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the wilderness stage, which is the initial stage, resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. can do.

On the other hand, the back B corresponding to the river stage, the back C corresponding to the forest stage, the back D corresponding to the cave stage, and the backs E to G corresponding to the ceiling notification stage are shown in FIG. 22 (b). Only a part of the back surface area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.

Here, when it is decided to change the back image, in order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the back images. be. However, with such a configuration, a RAM having a very large capacity must be used as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the stage is changed even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. In this case, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the back B and the back C can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the scroll display can be displayed while changing with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surface B to the back surface G, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B to the back surface G, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

In the back surface B to the back surface G, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 20) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27, a specific example of the rear image actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a specific example during the continuous advance notice effect will be described. First, FIG. 23A is a diagram showing an example of the back surface A (wilderness stage) described above. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), when the back surface A (wilderness stage) is set, the back image is an image of an adventurer character 801 carrying a sword and a shield walking in a desolate wilderness full of rocky mountains. Is displayed as. The character 801 is configured to suggest a big hit expectation and an expectation that the time saving period ends by performing various actions in various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, the back surface A (wilderness stage) is a back surface type that is easily displayed when the time saving period of the normal symbol is 21 times or more or in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol. Therefore, based on the display of the back surface A, it is possible to predict the remaining time saving period until the time saving period ends.

FIG. 23B is a diagram showing a display example of the back surface B (river stage) described above. When this back surface B (river stage) is set, a display image in which the character 801 rides on a raft and descends the river is displayed as a back image. This back surface B (river stage) is a back surface type that is easily displayed when the time saving period of the normal symbol is 11 to 20 times remaining. Based on the display of this back B (river stage), it can be thought that there is a high possibility that the time saving period is within 20 times remaining, so that the player's motivation for the game is increased and a lottery of special symbols is drawn. Can make you want to see the situation until it is executed 20 times. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

FIG. 24A is a diagram showing a display example of the back surface C (forest stage) described above. When this back surface C (forest stage) is set, a display image in which the character 801 advances through the forest overgrown with trees is displayed as a back image. This back surface C (forest stage) is a back surface type that is easily displayed when the time saving period of a normal symbol is within 10 times remaining. Based on the display of this back C (forest stage), it can be thought that there is a high possibility that the time saving period is within 10 times remaining, so that the player's motivation for the game is increased and a lottery of special symbols is drawn. Can make you want to see what happens until it is executed 10 times. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 (b), 25, and 26, a display mode of the continuous advance notice effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. As described above, this continuous advance notice production is a production in which a production with a story is executed over five variable productions. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as this continuous advance notice effect, the effect of fighting the monster 802 that protects the entrance of the treasure hidden cave 803 is executed over five variable effects. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is suggested whether or not to shift to the "consecutive villa state" based on whether or not the monster 802 is defeated.

This continuous advance notice effect is configured to be set whenever the time saving period is 5 times remaining, and the effect of destroying the monster 802 is executed by the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, after the continuous advance notice production is completed (that is, when the time saving period becomes 0 times), it is configured to shift to the "consecutive villa state".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the time saving period is 5 times or more remaining, or even in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol, the continuous notice effect is set when setting the mode of the variation effect. There is. In this case, in the fifth variable effect from the start of the continuous advance notice effect, the effect that the character 801 is defeated by the monster 802 is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the state has not shifted to the "consecutive villa state".

FIG. 24B is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the continuous advance notice effect is executed in the state of being set on the back surface C (forest stage). .. When it is decided to start the continuous advance notice effect at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), an effect is displayed in which the cave 803 and the monster 802 that protects the entrance of the cave 803 appear in the traveling direction of the character 801. NS. Then, as shown in FIG. 25A, an effect in which the character 801 and the monster 802 are glaring at each other is displayed. These display effects are displayed during the variable effect in which the start of the continuous notice effect is set. Although omitted in FIGS. 25 and 26, the forest is displayed in the back even when the character 801 and the monster 802 are glaring at each other or during a battle. Has been done. Similarly, even when the continuous advance notice production is started on the wilderness stage or the river stage, the character 801 and the monster 802 are configured to engage in a battle against the background of the image of the wilderness or the river.

If the holding ball corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the end of the continuous advance notice effect is held during the execution of the variation effect, the notification image 804 shown in FIG. 25B is displayed (the rear image is the ceiling notification). Can be switched to the back for). Specifically, when the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 corresponding to the variable effect executed the fifth time of the variable effect is suspended, the reserved ball is supported for the small area Ds1. The reserved ball number symbol (fourth reserved ball number symbol) is displayed, and the broadcast image 804 is displayed. In the example of FIG. 25B, since it was the first continuous notice effect, the notification image 804 is controlled to be displayed when the fourth reserved ball number symbol is displayed, but the continuous notice effect is performed. The number of reserved balls on which the broadcast image 804 is displayed differs depending on the number of fluctuations after the setting. That is, if the continuous advance notice effect is being changed for the second time, the third reserved ball number symbol is displayed and the notification image 804 is displayed. In addition, if the continuous advance notice effect is being changed for the third time, the second reserved ball number symbol is displayed and the notification image 804 is displayed, and if it is being changed for the fourth time, the first reserved ball is displayed. It is controlled so that the number symbols are displayed and the notification image 804 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 25 (b), the characters "Maybe the ceiling !? Please support without hitting the ball!" Are displayed on the notification image 804. By displaying this character, it is possible to urge the player to stop launching the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved balls that exceeds the number of fluctuations executed during the continuous advance notice effect from being held during the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, despite the transition to the "consecutive villa state" after the end of the continuous notice production, the "consecutive villa state" is in progress based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 held during the continuous notice production. It is possible to prevent the lottery of the special symbol 1 from being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery of the special symbol 1 from becoming a big hit during the "ream villa state" and ending the "ream villa state". You can fully entertain the "state".

The notification image 804 is configured to be displayed even when the time saving period does not end after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (that is, when the continuous advance notice effect of Gase is displayed). That is, the notification image 804 is displayed when the reserved ball corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the end of the continuous advance notice effect is held regardless of whether or not the transition to the "continuous villa state" is performed as a result of the continuous advance notice effect. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether or not to shift to the "consecutive villa state" after the end of the continuous advance notice effect only by displaying the notification image 804, so that the player is made to confirm the result of the continuous advance notice effect more interestingly. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, a plurality of aspects of the broadcast image 804 may be provided. In addition, a mode that is set only when the continuous notice production ends and the state becomes a "consecutive villa state" (for example, a mode in which the characters "It's the ceiling !! Please support without hitting the ball!" Are displayed. ) And a mode that can be set regardless of the result of the continuous notice effect (for example, a mode in which the characters "Maybe the ceiling !? Please support without hitting the ball!" Are displayed). .. As a result, the player can be pleased by displaying the mode in which the transition to the "consecutive villa state" is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention not only to the effect content of the continuous advance notice effect but also to the aspect of the broadcast image 804, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 26A is an example of the display contents when the fourth variation effect of the continuous notice effect is set while the broadcast image 804 is displayed. In the fourth continuous notice effect, an effect in which the character 801 attacks the monster 802 is displayed. After this effect is displayed, when the variable effect corresponding to the fifth continuous effect is executed, the monster 802 collapses and the victory notification image 805 showing that the character 801 has won the monster 802 (victory !! Left). Either the effect (see Fig. 26 (b)) in which the characters "Stop hitting!" Is displayed) or the effect in which the monster 802 counterattacks and the character 801 is defeated is displayed. It is configured as follows. As a result, the player can easily recognize whether or not to shift to the "consecutive villa state".

Further, in the fifth production of the continuous advance notice production, the battle result between the character 801 and the monster 802 is displayed immediately after the start of the fluctuation. That is, in the case of shifting to the "continuous villa state", the display content shown in FIG. 26B is displayed immediately after the start of the fluctuation. As a result, even if the fourth variable effect of the continuous advance notice effect is completed without the reserved ball and the fifth variable effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started based on the new start prize after that, the fifth variable effect is started. It is possible to prevent the winning of the first ball opening 64 from being suspended during the variable effect of. By confirming the victory notification image 805, it is possible to make the player recognize that if the ball is hit to the left side (left hit) of the board surface 13, it will be lost. Therefore, even if the fourth variation effect is completed without holding the reserved ball corresponding to the number of variations until the end of the continuous advance notice effect (that is, when the notification image 804 cannot be displayed), the continuous advance notice effect is produced. It is possible to prevent the lottery of the special symbol 1 from being executed during the "consecutive villa state" based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 held during the fifth variation effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery of the special symbol 1 from becoming a big hit during the "ream villa state" and ending the "ream villa state". You can fully entertain the "state".

The mode of the continuous advance notice effect is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily defined as long as it can suggest whether or not the player will be in an advantageous state. For example, the adventurer character 801 is directed to climb a high tower, and it is configured to suggest whether or not it will be in a "consecutive state" depending on whether or not it can climb the tower without losing the interference of monsters such as 801. You may.

Further, the method for suppressing that the number of reserved balls exceeding the number of fluctuations executed during the continuous advance notice effect is held is not limited to displaying the broadcast image 804. For example, when the third symbol display device 81 is composed of a touch panel and the reserved balls for the number of fluctuations executed during the continuous advance notice effect are accumulated, two distant places of the third symbol display device 81 are played. You may encourage them to touch each other with both hands. As a result, the player's hand can be separated from the handle 51, so that the player can be prevented from launching the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the "consecutive villa state" from ending the "consecutive villa state", so that the player can be in the "consecutive villa state". Can be fully entertained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the rear surface D (cave stage), which is the rear surface type set in the “consecutive villa state”, will be described. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), when the back surface D is set, a back image in which the character 801 searches in the cave is displayed. Further, in the display area 806 provided at the lower part of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "cave search mode" are displayed. In addition, the characters "right-handed" are displayed on the left and right of the character. Here, as described above, in the "consecutive state", the ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640 by launching the ball toward the right side of the game board 13. In addition, a lottery for the special symbol 2 is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, and when it becomes a big hit, there is a 90% probability that it will be a "probability change big hit D". .. In this "probability change jackpot D", a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and after the jackpot ends, the "consecutive state" is set again (the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol are set). It is a jackpot (to be done) and is the most advantageous jackpot for the player. Therefore, in order to draw a lottery for the special symbol 2 that is likely to be the "probability change jackpot D" in the "consecutive villa state", the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the display area 806, and the right side of the game board 13 is displayed. It is urging the player to launch the ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from being accidentally launched at the first entrance 64 in the "consecutive villa state", so that the "consecutive villa state" can be further enjoyed.

FIG. 27B is a diagram showing an example of a display effect when a big hit is obtained by a lottery of the special symbol 2 in a state where the back surface D is set (“continuous villa state”). As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the variation effect corresponding to the jackpot is executed with the back surface D set, the variation effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is executed in the small area Ds2, and the character A production is performed in which 801 discovers the treasure chest 807. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol has become a big hit. After the variation effect is executed in the small area Ds2 and the stop symbol is displayed, the stop symbol is largely stopped and displayed with respect to the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5 (b)). .. As a result, the player can clearly confirm the stop symbol. This stop display state lasts for at least 1 second. Then, the state of the stop display ends when the next variable effect is started or the demo effect is started.

It should be noted that the effect in the case of performing the variable effect corresponding to the big hit is not limited to the effect of discovering the treasure box 807. Any mode can be determined as long as it suggests that the player will be in an advantageous state (a state in which a prize ball can be obtained). Also, it is not necessary to perform the same effect for all jackpot types. For example, if the "normal jackpot B" or the "probability variation jackpot C", which is a jackpot type in which the "consecutive state" ends after the jackpot ends, it is suggested that the jackpot is not desirable for the player. The effect may be executed in a mode. For example, the cave may collapse and the character 801 may escape from the cave for life. By executing the effect that the character 801 escapes from the cave, the player can easily recognize that the "cave stage" has ended (that is, the "consecutive state" has ended).

In addition, in the "consecutive villa state", the effect during the jackpot may be configured to suggest whether or not the "consecutive villa state" will continue after the jackpot ends. Specifically, for example, in the variable effect of notifying the jackpot, the effect of finding the closed treasure chest 807 is executed, and the effect of opening the treasure box 807 is executed in the subsequent effect of the jackpot. It may be configured as. And if there are treasures in the treasure box 807, it will be in the "ream villa state" even after the big hit, but if the treasure box 807 opens, the trap switch will be activated and the cave will collapse. , It may be configured to suggest that the "consecutive state" ends after the jackpot ends.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a kimono, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. ,, If it is any of the jackpot C, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, in the case of "probability change jackpot A" and "probability change jackpot B" (big hits where it is difficult to win a prize ball), it is difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot has been achieved. Each of the above effects is executed. That is, in the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect, the display effect is executed as if the variable effect for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot continues (executed before the jackpot is reached). 1 variable effect is executed by connecting the execution period of the variable effect to be performed and the effect period of each of the above-mentioned effects executed during the jackpot). Therefore, in the data table storage area 233b, "probability change jackpot A" and "probability change jackpot B" (big hits for which it is difficult to win a prize ball) are used as data tables corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect. ) A dedicated data table and a data table corresponding to a jackpot in which a player other than these can win a prize ball are stored, and a display data table according to the jackpot type is set. This makes it difficult to recognize that the jackpot is difficult to win, and even though the jackpot is notified, the jackpot ends without getting the prize ball, which discourages the player. Can be suppressed.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of "wilderness stage", "river stage", "forest stage", "cave stage", and each "ceiling notification stage"). Information that specifies whether to display any of G is described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to G is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the specified stage among the back surfaces A to G as a drawing target, and also The range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 28) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 29).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, in the example of FIG. 29). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 52) (see S2205 in FIG. 52). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3805 in FIG. 63 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2501 in FIG. 54 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 54 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2508 in FIG. 54 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2509 in FIG. 54 (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 55 to 59) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3701 in FIG. 63 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 63 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is set for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 54 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3405 in FIG. 60) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and draws a drawing list (FIG.) described later. 30) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is obtained. Add to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 30, a back image and a third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other image contents to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 54 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3407 in FIG. 60). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2202 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3913 in FIG. 64). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3914 in FIG. 64). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4002 in FIG. 65).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 54 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S4002 in FIG. 65).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 41. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 199, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is executed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 ( S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. do.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 draws a lottery for the special symbol 1, and executes a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting the variation display based on the lottery result (S208). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 33. When this special symbol 1 fluctuation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the normal jackpot is B, the probability variation jackpot A, or the probability variation jackpot B.

In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs provided in the first symbol display device 37 are lit in different lighting modes according to the jackpot type. Each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol 1 variation start processing is displayed. , It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S212). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S212: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S213), and the process shifts to S218. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S213, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 40) is executed, it branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. (See S1102 in FIG. 41). The jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S212, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1. If it is determined that the above is not the case (that is, it is 0) (S214: No), the process shifts to S218. Further, in the processing of S214, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S214: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S215).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving medium counter 203g after subtraction becomes 0 (S216), and if it is 0 (S216: Yes), the time-saving period ends due to the variation effect of the special symbol this time, which is normal. Since it means that the symbol shifts to the normal state (that is, shifts to the "consecutive state"), the advantageous state flag 203i is set to be turned on to indicate that the symbol is in the "consecutive state" (S217). , The process shifts to S218.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is not 0 (S216: No), the processing of S217 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command for stopping the fluctuation of the third symbol is set in the third symbol display device (S218), and this process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S208). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is a process of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203f of the RAM 203 is ON (S302), and if it is determined that it is ON (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol. Therefore, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B), whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol. (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "4,38,64,99,122,151,183,218,249,270" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the first random number is set. When the value of the counter C1 and the random number value that is the hit of these match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203f is 0 in the processing of S302 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 Based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 7B), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 3 stored in the first random number table for low probability one by one. Eight random number values of "5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 2011, 262, 291" are set as the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the hits of these are set. If it matches the random number value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305). : Yes), the display mode at the time of big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the hit type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1, and the jackpot of 66 kinds of special symbols is compared. Among (normal jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A1 to probability variation jackpot A64, probability variation jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is (see FIG. 8A).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (normal jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A1 to probability variation jackpot A64, probability variation jackpot B). NS. Further, in order to display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (normal jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A1 to probability variation jackpot A64, probability variation jackpot B) is set as the stop type. Will be done.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the special figure 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 12A). Based on the above, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the above, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the special figure 1 normal / probability variation time reduction selection table 202d1 are displayed. The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S306 or the process of S308 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 40). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640. , This is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters when there is a start winning prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of held lottery N1 in the special symbol 1) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. do.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. Special symbol 1 Stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the state of the look-ahead probability changing flag 203h of the RAM 203 and the various counter values stored in the processing of S406, the winning or failing of the lottery (whether or not it is a big hit) in the special symbol and its stop type (in the case of a big hit). Is a jackpot type) and its fluctuation pattern is predicted (S408). Here, if the look-ahead probability changing flag 203h is on, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit depends on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S406 and the first random number table for high probability. It is determined by comparing the 10 random number values (winning values) stored in (see FIG. 7B) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "4,38,64,99,122,151,183,218,249,270" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the first random number is set. When the value of the counter C1 and the random number value that is the hit of these match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

On the other hand, if the look-ahead probability changing flag 203h is off, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined by the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S406 and the first random number table for low probability. It is determined by comparing the random number values (winning values) of 8 stored in FIG. 7B) one by one. As described above, eight random number values of "5,52,78,119,138,201,262,291" are set as the big hit of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is set. And, when these hit random numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the processing of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b. Then, determine what the jackpot type is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, the outlier reach is used as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406. Determine if it is present or completely off.

Next, the fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type from the special figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11B and 12) stored in the ROM 202. The fluctuation pattern is selected according to (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stopping type, and the predicted stopping type are determined. A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408).

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 40) described later. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

After the winning information command is set by the process of S409, it is determined whether or not the lottery predicted by the process of S408 is a big hit of the special symbol (S409). If the lottery result predicted by the processing of S407 is any of "probability change jackpot A" to "probability change jackpot D" (S409: Yes), the look-ahead probability change in progress flag 203h is set to on (S410), S413. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result predicted by the processing of S407 is not "probability change jackpot A" to "probability change jackpot D" (S409: No), the predicted lottery result is "normal jackpot A" or "normal". It is determined whether or not it is "big hit B" (S411). Then, when it is determined that it is either "normal jackpot A" or "normal jackpot B", the look-ahead probability changing flag 203h is set to off (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, in the processing of S411, when it is determined that the "normal jackpot A" or "normal jackpot B" is not obtained (that is, the lottery result is out of the special symbol), the processing of S412 is skipped and the processing of S413 is performed. Move to. In the process of S413, the special symbol 2 winning process for setting the start of the variation effect based on the ball entering the second ball opening 640 is executed (S413), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the above-mentioned special symbol 2 winning process (S413) will be described. This special symbol 2 winning process (S413) is a process for setting the start of the variation effect based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. In this special symbol 2 winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has been detected in the second ball opening 640 (S501). If the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640 is not detected in the process of S501 (S501: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640 is detected by the processing of S501 (S501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variation effect is being executed (S502). If the variation effect is being executed (S502: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the ball entering the second entry port 640 is discarded without being held.

In the process of S502, if the variation effect is not being executed (S502: No), the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold counts N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504), and it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, the variation effect in the special symbol 1 is suspended). If this is the case (S504: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: Yes), the first random number counters C1 and 1 are updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. By storing each value of the hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 in the special symbol 2 execution area 203b of the RAM 203, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is controlled.

Next, it is determined whether or not the current is a high probability state of the special symbol by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203f is on (S506), and if the probability variation flag 203f is on, the process of S505 is performed. The stored value of the first random number counter C1 and the 10 random number values (winning values) stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B) are used one by one. By comparing, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S507), and the process shifts to S509. As described above, 10 random numbers of "4,38,64,99,122,151,183,218,249,270" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the first random number is set. When the value of the counter C1 and the random number value that is the hit of these match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S506 that the probability variation flag 203f is off (S506: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S505 and the first value for low probability. By comparing each of the 8 random numbers (hits) stored in the hit random number table (see FIG. 7B) one by one, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S508). The process shifts to S509. As described above, eight random number values of "5,52,78,119,138,201,262,291" are set as the big hit of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is set. And, when these hit random numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

In the processing of S509 executed after the end of S507 or S508, it is determined whether or not the determination result by the processing of S507 or S508 is a jackpot of a special symbol (S509), and if it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S509). : Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S505, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S510). In the process of S510, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type. Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S511). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S511, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, either the table (Special Figure 2 Normal / Probability Change Time Reduction Selection Table 202d2 or Common Probability Change Non-Time Reduction Selection Table 202d3) to be referred to according to the game state (whether or not it is in the "continuous villa state"). ) Is selected, the selected table and the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1, normal reach, super reach, and ultra long Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as reach. As described above, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d.

When the processing of S511 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot type is any of "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot D" (S512), and "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot D". If either is the case (S512: Yes), the look-ahead probability changing flag 203h is set to ON (S513), and the process shifts to S517. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not "probability change jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot D" (that is, "normal jackpot A" or "normal jackpot B") (S512: No), the look-ahead probability change in progress flag 203h is set to off and the process shifts to S517.

In the process of S509, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S509: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S515). In the process of S515, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the above, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S516). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. Specifically, either the table (Special Figure 2 Normal / Probability Change Time Reduction Selection Table 202d2 or Common Probability Change Non-Time Reduction Selection Table 202d3) to be referred to according to the game state (whether or not it is in the "continuous villa state"). ) Is selected, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and ultra long reach is determined based on the selected table and the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of RAM 203.

After the processing of S513, S514, or S516 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S511 or the process of S516 is set (S517). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S510 or S515 is set (S518). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 40). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S518 is completed, the process returns to the start winning process. By this special symbol 2 winning process (S413), the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be executed only when the variation effect is not executed and the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 does not exist.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of a special symbol (S609). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11A) for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). ). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability (see FIG. 11A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 239", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. That is, it is determined that the value of the random number counter C4 for the second hit is a hit of a normal symbol in the entire range that can be taken (see FIG. 11 (a)).

In the processing of S608, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S611. In the processing of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 and the low probability. Based on the second hit random number table for time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability (see FIG. 11A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-222", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,223-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 11 (a)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hitting is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state flag 203i is on (that is, it is in the "consecutive state") (S614), and if it is on (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 3 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the advantageous state flag 203i is off (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. While setting it to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

On the other hand, in the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state flag 203i is on (S619), and if the advantageous state flag 203i is on (S619: Yes), the normal figure probability variation non-time saving selection table 202e2 and the second 2 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the advantageous state flag 203i is off (S619: No), the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is based on the values of the normal / probabilistic variation time reduction selection table 202e1 and the second variation type counter CS2. The fluctuation time of (S621) is set, and this process is terminated. As a result, in the "ream villa state", compared with the case of the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol, the high probability state (probability change) of the special symbol, and the time reduction state (time reduction) of the normal symbol, The variable display time is very short, "1 second", and the release period of the second entrance 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 3 times". 2 The ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball entry port 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 40) is executed next, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 40) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the first This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter The value (M) of 203e is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S913 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and it is determined whether the calculated RAM determination value is normal (S907). If it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in the processing of S907 (S907: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data is destroyed. Therefore, the process is shifted to S913 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 40, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S90: No). S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the status of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of startup is generated based on the status of the probability change flag 203f and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g. It is output to the voice lamp control device 113. Since the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are not backed up, the stored contents are lost when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state (whether or not it is a high probability state of the special symbol and the time saving period of the normal symbol are determined based on the state command output from the main control device 110. ) Is determined, and various effects are set based on the determined gaming state. As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during business hours, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the execution of an effect that is inconsistent with the actual gaming state after the power is restored. Although the details will be described later, the state command output by the process of S901 is the state command process (see FIG. 43) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 42) by the MPU of the voice lamp control device 113. Is analyzed by, and various flags are updated based on the game state notified by the state command.

When the processing of S910 is completed, the effect permission command is then transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 to allow the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various effects (S911). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process (see FIG. 39) is completed will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device on the sub side (see FIG. 31). The external output process to be transmitted to the peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 34) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 34) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 41) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated (S1002). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the values of the first variable type counter CS1 and the second variable type counter CS2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the first variable type counter CS1 and the second variable type counter CS2 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the special symbol jackpot state is reached. In this case, the jackpot effect is executed, and the jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 33), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol. It starts at the display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 33) ends, the first symbol display is displayed. The variation display executed in the device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is set to the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 33). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the display device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 36). Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if it is determined that the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first variation type counter CS1, and the second variation type counter CS2 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 38 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area to be backed up and the work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S213 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1103: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), depending on the jackpot type, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a It is released (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1104, unless it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. (S1107). Specifically, when the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is open, 0.2 seconds have passed, or when five balls have won a prize, the closing condition is set. Judge that it was established. Further, when the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when 30 seconds have passed or when five balls have won a prize. ..

In the process of S1107, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the first The specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (S1108) to end this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not satisfied (S1107: No), the ending effect is produced. It is determined whether it is the start timing (S1109). Specifically, when the final round of the special game state is completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

In the process of S1109, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending command is set (S1110), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (S1111). Specifically, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect, it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot. Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the big hit (S1111: Yes), the state setting table 202f is read out (S1112), and the current big hit type and the state setting table 202f after the end of the big hit are specified. Based on the settings, the probability change flag 203f of the RAM 203, the time saving / medium counter 203g, the free state flag 203i, etc. are updated (S1113), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1111 that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1111: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 51, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1419 (see FIG. 44) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1416 in FIG. 44), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1419. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1419 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1318. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1318 is executed (see S1418 in FIG. 44). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1419 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1419 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S1209) in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210).

When the processing of S1210 is completed, the state command processing for determining the state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed based on the state command (see S910 of FIG. 39) output from the main control device 110 based on the power-on (see S910 in FIG. 39). S1211), interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely cut off, so that the process of S1208 via the processes of S1204 to S1206 was started. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the state command process is performed. Execute (S1211), set interrupt permission (S1212), and move to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, the state command process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the start-up process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. This state command process (S1211) is a state command output to the voice lamp control device 113 in order to notify the gaming state at the time of power recovery in the start-up process (see FIG. 39) in the main control device 110. This is a process performed to accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 based on the above.

In this state command processing (S1211), first, it is determined whether or not the state notified by the state command is a high-probability state of the special symbol (S1301), and it is not a high-probability state of the special symbol (that is, the special symbol). If it is determined (S1301: No), the value of the ceiling count counter 223e corresponding to the remaining time in a short period of time is set to 0, and whether or not it is in the "consecutive villa state" is determined. The indicated consecutive villa state flag 223f is set to off (S1302), and this process is terminated. By the process of S1302, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can determine that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol in the process executed thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously performing the effect corresponding to the "consecutive villa state" and misidentifying the state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time saving period notified by the state command is 0 (S1303). .. Then, when it is determined that the time saving period is 0 (S1303: Yes), the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is set to 0, and the consecutive villa state flag 223f is set to ON (S1304) to perform this process. finish. By the process of S1304, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can determine that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "consecutive villa state" in the process executed thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game despite the "continuous villa state" by accidentally executing the effect corresponding to the state other than the "continuous villa state".

In the process of S1303, when it is determined that the time saving period notified by the status command is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1303: No), the notified time saving period is set to the value of the ceiling count counter 223e. At the same time, the consecutive villa state flag 223f is set to off (S1305), and this process ends. By the process of S1305, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can determine that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high-probability state of the special symbol and a time-saving state of the normal symbol in the subsequent processes. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from mistakenly performing the effect corresponding to the "continuous villa state" and misidentifying the player as the "continuous villa state".

By executing the state command processing in this way, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1401 was executed (S1401), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1411. In the process of S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1402 to S1411 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1412, the variation display setting process of S1413, and the process of updating the counter values of S1414 and S1415 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1413 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1413 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1402). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1408 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1407 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1409, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1410) is completed, the back surface setting process is executed after hitting (S1411), and the process shifts to S1412. This back-to-back setting process (S1411) is a process for setting a back-back image after the big hit is completed. The details of the hit-back back setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In the process of S1412, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1412). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1413). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

When the processing of S1413 is completed, the backside determination counter 223h used for determining whether or not to change the backside image is updated (S1414). Specifically, the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to the value, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in the present embodiment), the value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the back surface determination counter 223h is stored in the back surface determination counter 223h.

Next, the advance notice determination counter 223j used for determining whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect is updated (S1415). Specifically, the value of the advance notice determination counter 223j is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to the value, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in the present embodiment), the value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the advance notice determination counter 223j is stored in the advance notice determination counter 223j.

When the processing of S1415 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1416). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1416 (S1416: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1418), and the power-off process is executed (S1419). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1420), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1416: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1417), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1417: No), the process returns to the process of S1401 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1317: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the hit-back back setting process (S1411) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this hit-back back setting process. This hit five back setting process (S1411) is a process for setting the back type at the end of the big hit.

In this hit-back back setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the big hit (S1501). The end timing of the jackpot specifically means the end time of the ending effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened and the prize ball is a hard-to-find jackpot (probability variation jackpot A and probability variation jackpot B), the same effect as during the jackpot is produced. Is executed. Therefore, even during the ending effect, the effect as if the normal variable effect is being executed is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that a big hit, for which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, has been won. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing when the time saving period is reset based on the big hit A. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to accurately determine the remaining time saving period, so that the player can predict the remaining time saving period from the back image or the like. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

If it is determined in the process of S1501 that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1501: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end timing of the jackpot is (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ending jackpot is the normal jackpot A (S1502), and if it is the normal jackpot A (S1502 :). Yes), set the display rear image change command corresponding to the back surface A (S1503), set the value “00H” corresponding to the back surface A for the back surface flag 223g (S1504), and end this process. do. The display rear image change command set by the process of S1503 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending jackpot is not the normal jackpot A (S1502), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is either the probabilistic jackpot B or the probabilistic jackpot D (S1505). When it is determined by the processing of S1505 that the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D (that is, "the consecutive villa state is set" after the jackpot ends) (S1505: Yes), it corresponds to the "continuous villa state". In order to set the back type to the back D (cave stage), set the display back image change command corresponding to the back D (S1506), and set the value "03H" corresponding to the back D to the back flag 223g. After setting (S1507), this process ends. The display rear image change command set by the process of S1506 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1505, if it is determined that the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D is not (either the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot C) (S1505: No), the time reduction newly set at the end of the jackpot In order to set the rear image based on the period, the ceiling count counter 223e and the ceiling reset setting table 222b5 (see FIG. 19A) are read out (S1508). Although the details will be described later, the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is updated in a short period of time corresponding to the jackpot when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the jackpot is received. Therefore, in this process, by referring to the ceiling count counter 223e, the back image can be set according to the short period of time set at the end of the jackpot.

When the processing of S1508 is completed, the value of the rear determination counter 223h is then read, and the rear type to be set after the jackpot is completed is set based on the ceiling reset setting table 222b5 read in the processing of S1508 and the value of the ceiling count counter 223e. Identify (S1509). For example, when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 5 (that is, the time saving period given after the end of the big hit is 5 times) and the value of the back judgment counter 223h is "85", the back type after the end of the big hit is set. The back surface C (forest stage) is selected (see FIG. 19 (a)).

After the processing of S1509, the display rear image variation command corresponding to the specified back type is set (S1510), the value corresponding to the specified back type is set to the back flag 223g, and this processing is terminated. The display rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image on the third symbol display device 81.

By executing this hit-back back setting process (S1411), it is possible to switch to an appropriate back type according to the time saving period and the state after the end of each big hit.

Next, the command determination process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1412). This command determination process (S1412) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern is a process for extracting the variation pattern type from the received variation pattern command. The selection process is executed (S1603), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1604). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (special). The number of holdings N1) of the variation display in the symbol is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). Further, in the process of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1608 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the process of S1608 for the special symbol 1 reserved ball number of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected, At the time of the special symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. When the process of S1608 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1607, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1607: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1609). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1609: Yes), the ceiling notification process is executed (S1610), and the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball slot 64 or the second ball slot 640, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main control device 110. Then, each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main control device 110, the original lottery is performed from each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3, separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various information obtained when is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The ceiling notification process is a process of switching to the back surface type (back surface E to back surface G) for notification based on the read-ahead result. Details of this ceiling notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1609, if the winning information command has not been received (S1609: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1611). Then, when the opening command is received (S1611: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1612), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1611, if the opening command is not received (S1611), then it is determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1613). Then, when the round number command is received (S1613: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1614), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number command (S1613: Yes). S1615), this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1613, when the round number command has not been received (S1613: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1616). Then, when the ending command is received (S1616: Yes), the display ending command is set (S1617), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened and the prize ball is a hard-to-find jackpot (probability variation jackpot A and probability variation jackpot B), it is as if a normal variable effect is being executed during the ending effect. The production is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that a big hit, for which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, has been won. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing when the time saving period is reset based on the big hit A. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to accurately determine the remaining time saving period, so that the player can predict the remaining time saving period from the back image or the like. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the process of S1616, if the ending command is not received (S1616: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1618). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process. This variation pattern selection process (S1603) is a process for extracting a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In this fluctuation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is notified by the fluctuation pattern command (S1701), and it is not the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot (that is, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation). If it is determined (S1701), the backside setting process at the time of disconnection for determining whether or not to change the backside image is executed (S1702). Next, a continuous notice setting process for setting the start of the continuous notice effect is executed (S1703), and this process ends. The details of the backside setting process (S1702) and the continuous notice setting process (S1703) at the time of disconnection will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49, respectively.

In the process of S1701, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is (S1701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has notified the normal jackpot A or the normal jackpot B ( S1704). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot and shifts to the normal state of the normal symbol (the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given). Then, when it is determined that the normal jackpot A or the normal jackpot B (S1704: Yes), the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is set to 0 (S1705). Then, the consecutive villa state flag 223f is set to off (S1706), and the process shifts to S1712.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1704, when it is determined that the normal jackpot A and the normal jackpot B are not (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot C (S1707). .. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot type in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends. Then, in the processing of S1707, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot C (S1707), the time saving period given after the end of the jackpot is set as the value of the ceiling count counter 223e (S1708), and the series The villa state flag 223f is set to off (S1709), and the process shifts to S1712.

In the processing of S1707, if it is determined that neither the probability variation jackpot A nor the probability variation jackpot C (that is, the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D) (S1707: No), the "consecutive state" is obtained after the jackpot ends. The value of the ceiling count counter 223e is set to 0 (S1710), the consecutive villa state flag 223f is set to ON (S1711), and the process shifts to S1712.

In the process of S1712, which is transferred after the process of S1706, S1709, or S1711, the corresponding variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern table 222a based on the variation pattern command notified from the main controller 110 (S1712), and this process is performed. finish. Based on the variation pattern extracted here, the display variation pattern command is set by the variation display setting process (see FIG. 51).

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the detached back setting process (S1702) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. As described above, this detached back setting process (S1702) is executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 47), and is a process for determining whether or not to change the back image.

In the back setting process at the time of disconnection, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is larger than 0 (S1801), and if it is larger than 0 (S1801: Yes), the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is subtracted by 1. S1802). Since the value of the ceiling count counter 223e indicates the remaining time saving period, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the counter value every time a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is received, so that the time saving period is shortened by the voice lamp control device 113. Can be grasped accurately.

When the processing of S1802 is completed, the back flag 223g is then read (S1803), and the table corresponding to the back type specified by the value of the read back flag 223g is read out from the back setting table 222b (S1804). Specifically, if the current state is the back surface A (if the value of the back surface flag 223g is "00H"), the setting table 222b1 at the time of the back surface A is read, and if the current state is the back surface B (the value of the back surface flag 223g is). If it is "01H"), the back B time setting table 222b2 is read, and if the current state is the back C (if the value of the back flag 223g is "02H"), the back C time setting table 222b3 is read. If the current back type is back E to back G for notification (that is, if the value of the back flag 223g is "04H" to "06H"), the back side setting table 222b6 for notification is read out.

Next, based on the data table read by the process of S1804 and the value of the ceiling count counter 223e, the back surface type is specified (S1805), and as a result, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to change the back image. (S1806). Then, when it is determined that it is necessary to change the back image (S1806: Yes), the display rear image change command corresponding to the changed back is set (S1807), and the value corresponding to the changed back is set. The back flag is set to 223f (S1808), and the process shifts to S1809. The display rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to change the back image in the processing of S1805 (the current back type and the back type specified by the processing of S1804 are the same) (S1805: No), S1807, S1808. The process of is skipped and the process is transferred to S1809.

In the processing of S1809, as a result of subtracting 1 by the processing of S1802, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling count counter 223e becomes 0 (S1809), and if it is 0 (S1809: Yes), the time saving period elapses. (That is, it means that the villa state is set), so the villa state flag 223f is set to ON (S1810), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S1809 that the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is not 0 (1 or more) (S1809: No), the processing of S1810 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

Further, in the processing of S1801, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S1801), then it is determined whether or not the consecutive villa state flag 223f is on. If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S1811: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the consecutive villa state flag 223f is on (that is, "continuous villa state") (S1811: Yes), then the back flag 223e is read out (S1812), and whether or not the current back type is the back D. (S1813).

If it is determined in the process of S1813 that the current back surface type is the back surface D (S1813: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the back surface type is not the back surface D (S1813: No), the time of disconnection is based on receiving the variation pattern command corresponding to the detachment of the special symbol for the first time after the "consecutive villa state" is reached. It means that the back setting process (S1702) has been executed. Therefore, by setting the display rear image change command corresponding to the rear surface D, the change to the rear surface of the cave stage corresponding to the "consecutive villa state" is set (S1814), and the value corresponding to the rear surface D is ". "03H" is set to the back flag 223f (S1815), and this process ends.

In this way, by performing the backside setting process (S1702) at the time of disconnection, it is possible to determine whether or not to change the backside image according to the remaining time and a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the remaining time saving period from the type of the rear image, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the continuous advance notice setting process (S1703) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. This continuous advance notice setting process (S1703) is executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 47), and is a process for determining whether or not to set the continuous advance notice effect.

In this continuous notice determination process (S1703), first, the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is read out (S1901), and it is determined whether or not the value is 0 (S1902). Then, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is not 0 (that is, any of 1 to 4) (S1902: No), the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is subtracted by 1 (S1903), and the subtraction thereof is performed. The mode of the fluctuation pattern is extracted based on the value of the subsequent continuous advance notice counter 223i and the fluctuation pattern table 222a (S1904). Based on the variation pattern extracted here, the display variation pattern command is set by the variation display setting process (see FIG. 51).

In the fluctuation pattern table 222a, selectable fluctuation pattern types are defined for each fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command. Further, for one fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern effect that can be selected in normal time (when the continuous notice effect is not set), a variation pattern effect that can be selected in the first variation effect of the continuous notice effect, and a variation pattern effect that can be selected in the first variation effect of the continuous notice effect. A variable pattern effect that can be selected in the second variable effect of the continuous notice effect, a variable pattern effect that can be selected in the third variable effect of the continuous advance notice effect, and a variation that can be selected in the fourth variable effect of the continuous advance notice effect. Selectable when the pattern effect, the variable pattern effect that can be selected in the fifth variation effect of the continuous notice effect, and the last variation in the time saving state of the normal symbol are executed in the state where the continuous notice effect is not set. Fluctuation pattern production (variation pattern production corresponding to the ceiling notification notice) is at least specified. In the process of S1904, the corresponding fluctuation pattern is extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222a according to the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1902, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 0 (S1902: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 4 (S1903). If it is determined to be 4 (S1903: Yes), the remaining time reduction period is 5 times (since the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is updated before the start of fluctuation, the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is By setting the continuous advance notice effect (which is one less than the time saving period), it is possible to shift to the "consecutive villa state" at the end of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, in this case, 4 is set to the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i (S1906), and the mode of the variation pattern that can be selected in the first variation effect of the continuous advance notice effect is extracted from the variation pattern table 222a (S1907). , End this process.

In the process of S1905, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is not 4 (5 or more or 3 or less) (S1905: No), then whether or not the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is larger than 4. (S1908), if it is larger than 4 (S1908: Yes), whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect based on the value of the advance notice determination counter 223j and the continuous advance notice determination table 222c (see FIG. 19C). (S1909). In the continuous advance notice effect, the effect is executed over 5 variable effects, so even if the continuous notice effect is set when the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is larger than 4, "renso" after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. There is no transition to "state" (so-called ceiling production).

If it is determined by the process of S1910 that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed (S1910: Yes), the start of the continuous advance notice effect is set by executing the above-mentioned processes of S1906 and S1907, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is not executed (S1910: No), the variation pattern effect for normal time corresponding to the variation time notified by the variation pattern command is performed from the variation pattern table 222a. Extraction (S1911) is performed, and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S1908, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is not greater than 4 (3 or less) (S1908: No), the remaining time reduction period is 4 times in the state where the continuous notice effect is not set. Since it means that the value is as follows, it is next determined whether or not the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 0 (S1912). That is, it is determined whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol ends due to this fluctuation.

When it is determined by the processing of S1912 that the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is not 0 (S1912: No), the fluctuation pattern effect for normal time corresponding to the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command is extracted (S1912: No). S1911), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 0 (S1912: Yes), the fluctuation pattern effect that can be selected when the last fluctuation in the time saving state of the normal symbol is executed from the fluctuation pattern table 222a ( The variation pattern effect corresponding to the ceiling notification notice) is extracted, and this process is terminated.

Since the continuous advance notice effect can be set by this continuous advance notice setting process (S1703), when the continuous advance notice effect that is easy to be set in the case of the "continuous villa state" is set, the player is asked to " You can have a sense of expectation for "the state of consecutive villas".

Next, the ceiling notification process (S1610) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this ceiling notification process (S1610). This ceiling notification process determines whether or not to shift to the "continuous villa state" based on the pre-reading result notified by the winning information command, and when it is confirmed that the transition to the "continuous villa state" is confirmed, the game is played. This is a process for notifying a person to stop launching a ball.

In this ceiling notification process, first, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading result notified by the prize information command is the prize information indicating the jackpot (S2001), and if it is the jackpot (S2001: Yes), the time saving period is reset. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is out of the special symbol (S2001: No), the value (A) of the ceiling count counter 223e is read out (S2002), and it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 0. (S2003).

If the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is 0 (S2003: Yes), the time reduction of the normal symbol is not in progress, so the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling count counter 223e is not 0 (1 or more) (S2003: No), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is read out (S2004), and the ceiling count counter It is determined whether or not the difference between the value (A) of 223e and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 0 (S2005). That is, it is determined whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol ends when the variation effect for the number of reserved balls is executed.

In the processing of S2005, when it is determined that the difference between the value (A) of the ceiling count counter 223e and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is not 0 (S2005: No), it is equivalent to the number of reserved balls. Even if the variation effect is executed, the time saving period does not end, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference between the value (A) of the ceiling count counter 223e and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is 0 (S2005: Yes), the back flag 223g is read out ( S2006), from the notification time setting table 222b4 (see FIG. 18B), the back surface type for notification corresponding to the current back surface is specified (S2007).

Next, a display rear image change command corresponding to the specified back type is set (S2008), a value corresponding to the changed background type is set to the back flag 223 g (S2009), and this process is terminated. The display rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image on the third symbol display device 81.

By executing this ceiling notification process, it is possible to urge the stop of launching the ball when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends by executing the ball entering the reserved first ball entry port 64. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved balls that exceeds the remaining time saving period from being held, so that even though the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and the state shifts to the "consecutive state", it is normal. It is possible to prevent the lottery of the special symbol 1 from being executed during the "consecutive villa state" based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 held during the time saving state of the symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent (prevent) the end of the "consecutive villa state" due to a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the "consecutive villa state". You can entertain the "state".

Note that the back type for notification is executed only when the time saving period has elapsed. For example, even when the continuous notice effect of Gase is set, it may be configured to change to the back type for notification by receiving the winning command corresponding to the last variable effect of the continuous notice effect. .. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is irrelevant, so that the player can be made to confirm the continuous advance notice effect more interestingly to the end.

Further, even when the winning information command corresponding to the probability change jackpot B is received, it may be changed to the back type for notification. When the probability change jackpot B is reached, it will be in the "consecutive state" after the jackpot ends. , A lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed with the reserved ball, and it is possible to prevent the "consecutive villa state" from ending by winning the normal jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the variation display setting process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1413). This variation display setting process (S1413) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2106 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S2102), and then the processing of S1712 of the fluctuation pattern selection processing processing (see FIG. 47), or the processing of S1712. In the processes of S1907, S1911, and S1913 of the continuous notice setting process (see FIG. 49), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2104). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S2105). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2106.

In the process of S2106, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2106). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2106: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2106: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S2107), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2108).

Next, in order to set the extracted stop type (stop type notified from the main control device 110), a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed and controlled. It is set to be transmitted to the device 114 (S2109). When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 65, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2201 in FIG. 52) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 52) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2201) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. Is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 53, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2301 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2302. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2301 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2301. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2302 and S2302, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2301 to S2305 may be executed without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2203, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2204, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2205). As a result, when the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 63 (a)) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3702 in FIG. 63 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 21 is drawn. The determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 54 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 54 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting prize) at the first entry port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 21 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 30) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2502) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2503) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2502), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59.

In the display setting process (S2503), one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like. Specificly specify the content of the image. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2504). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simple display setting process (S2509). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505), which are determined in the task process (S2504), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 30 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop corresponding to the stop type (various jackpots, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is detected. The type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2509) is executed to display the image of S2504. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2502), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 55, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2602), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2603).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2604), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605), the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. 56A. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2701).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2701 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2703, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer Initialize 233f to 0 (S2705). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2706), the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2705, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2702e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2704, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 55. In the processing of S2604, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606). If there is a display variable type command (S2606: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2607), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. 56B. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (various jackpots, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2801). , The change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the production is finally set (S2802).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. Is set to (S2803), and this process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2504), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2803, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2802.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2606, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2608), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S2608: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2609), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2609) will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a). FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2903). S2904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2905), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2904, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901 The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2902. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether the operation had stopped.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for one round or four rounds) on the third symbol display device 81 are completed. Therefore, if the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. A lot of waiting time was generated, and there was a risk that the player might feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether the operation was stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are performed in the third symbol display device 81 (for 5 rounds). ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the variable effect that becomes a big hit is completed. As a result, when the fluctuation effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2608, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2608: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2610), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2610: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2611), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2611) will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (b). FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3004). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3005), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 55. In the processing of S2610, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2612), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2612: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2613), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3101). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S3101 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag is turned on. The data table determination flag corresponding to the other ending display data table is set to off (S3103). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3103, which ending display mode the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to is supported. Can be easily determined.

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3104). S3105). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3106), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 55. In the processing of S2612, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2614), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S2614: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2615), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2615) will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (a). FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag is set to on (S3201). When the back image change flag is on, it is determined that the back image needs to be changed when the back image change command is received in the normal image transfer setting process (S3703). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to G), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3202), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64), when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3201 is turned on, the rear image after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3202. Specify the image type. When the specified back image type is back B to back G, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. When the rear image type after the change is rear A, all the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235c, so the image is not transferred.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to G according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S3202 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3202, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 55. In the processing of S2614, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2614: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2616), and there is an error command. If (S2616: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2617), and the process returns to S2601 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2617) will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3301). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3302), and the error command is performed. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3301, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3302 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3302 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 55. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2616 (S2616: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2618), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

In the processing of S2601 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes). ), The processing of S2602 to S2618 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2601 to S2618 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2601 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type commands are extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 56 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 56 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other processes are executed. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 56A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2701, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2702, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2503), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 60, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3401), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3401: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S3402 to S3404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3405. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3402), S3403 to S3404 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3403). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3403: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3404).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3501).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3501, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3502), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 60. After the warning image setting process (S3404) or in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3403: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3405.

In S3405, the pointer update process is executed (S3405). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3601). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3601, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3602). As a result, if it is End information (S3602: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3603), and if it is a demo display data table (S3603: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3604), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3605), and this process is completed and displayed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3606). ), Ends this process and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3602, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3602: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 60 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3406). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3406 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3407), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3408). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3408: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3408: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3409).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is on (S3409: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3410), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3411). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3412), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3413). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3414), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3415), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3415 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2504), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3415, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3409, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3409: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3416). If the demo display flag is off (S3416: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S3417), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3418). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3419). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3420), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that it is displayed.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3416: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2509), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54 (b)), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table, which specifies that the image (either of FIGS. 21B and 21C) to be stopped and displayed, is set in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2505), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3701 (S3701: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3702), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3801), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3801: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3802). In the process of S3802, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3802: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3802: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3803. Further, as a result of the processing of S3801, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3801: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3803.

In the process of S3803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3803), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3803: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3803 (S3803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3805), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 54 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 54 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 55 to 59) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) (see S3701: No in FIG. 63 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3703), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3405) of the display setting process (S2503) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3902), and if it is the transfer data information (S3902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3903) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905.

Further, in the process of S3902, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3902: No), the processes of S3903 and S3904 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3905. In the process of S3905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3906).

In the process of S3906, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S3906 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3906: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3906: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3907. Further, as a result of the processing of S3905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3905: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3907.

In the process of S3907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3907), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3907: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3908), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3907: No), it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3509). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3909: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3910), the rear image provided for each rear image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3911). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3912), and the process proceeds to the process of S3913.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3911, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3913, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913). The discrimination in the process of S3913 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3913 (S3913: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3914). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3914, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3915), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2506), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 30 (S4001). That is, in the processing of S4001, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2504). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S4002 (S4003). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 54 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, there are two types of entrances, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, as the entrances that trigger the lottery of special symbols. By providing a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640, a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and it becomes easier for the player to win the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot D). It is configured in. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter into the second entry port 640, and the ball enters the first entry port 64. If a special symbol is a big hit in a lottery based on, it is difficult to get a prize ball, and it is easy to win a big hit (probability change jackpot A) that shifts to a time saving state of a normal symbol after the end of the jackpot. There is. That is, it is configured so that a state in which it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640 is likely to be repeated. Then, by ending the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is configured to shift to a state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640 (“continuous villa state”), and in the “continuous villa state”. By becoming the "probability change jackpot D", it is configured to shift to the "consecutive villa state" again after the jackpot ends.

Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game for one purpose of shifting to the "consecutive villa state". Here, in order to end the time saving period of the normal symbol and shift to the "consecutive state", the special symbol is continuously removed the same number of times as the time saving period of the normal symbol set after the end of the probability variation jackpot A. Must be. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the "consecutive state" is approaching as the special symbol continues to deviate, so that the player's motivation for the game even if the special symbol deviates continuously. Can be maintained.

In a general pachinko machine, a player plays a game mainly for the purpose of becoming a big hit, so there is no merit for continuous deviation of special symbols. Therefore, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game will be lowered as the deviation continues. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the more the special symbols are disengaged, the closer to the player's advantageous "consecutive state". It is possible to provide a novel playability that can be made.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 64 types of "probability variation jackpot A1" to "probability variation jackpot A64" are given as jackpot types to which a time saving period of a normal symbol is given when a jackpot is obtained by lottery of special symbol 1. The jackpot type is provided. Since the time saving period of the ordinary symbol given to each of these 64 types of jackpots is different, the ease of transition to the "consecutive state" differs depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, even if the player recognizes that the jackpot has been achieved (the time saving period has been reset), it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the time saving period that has passed up to that point has been wasted, and to suppress the jackpot for a short period of time. You can expect it to be. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from being launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes extremely long. It is configured to (3 to 5 minutes). Further, the opening period in which the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol hits is set to a short time (0.2 seconds x 1 time). As a result, even if the ball can be entered into the normal entry port 67, the electric accessory 640a is hardly opened (opens at a frequency of 0.2 seconds within a few minutes), so that the normal entry port 67 is opened. , And the player can prevent the ball from being launched toward the second entrance 640 provided on the downstream side thereof. That is, the player intentionally enters the ball into the second entrance 640 with the aim of winning the "probability change jackpot D" that can win a large number of prize balls even though it is not in the "consecutive state". It is possible to prevent the game method of trying to make the ball from being performed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the detour accessory 700 is provided on the upstream side of the second entry port 640, the ball is launched and then reaches the second entry port 640. It takes more than 7 seconds to do this. Therefore, even if the ball is launched after recognizing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the electric accessory 640a is closed before the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (0.2 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “consecutive state”. Further, when the holding ball of the normal symbol exists, the fluctuation time is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol held in about 1 second after the fluctuation of 1 is completed and the opening of the electric accessory 640a are performed. Is configured to end. Therefore, regardless of the presence or absence of the reserved ball of the normal symbol, when the ball is launched after the electric accessory 640a is opened, the ball is prevented (suppressed) from entering the second entry port 640. Can be done.

Further, as described above, even if the ball can be entered into the second entry port 640, the entry is discarded without being held if the special symbol is changing. That is, in a state other than the "consecutive state", the fluctuation time becomes extremely long, and even if the ball is inserted into the second entry port 640 during the fluctuation, a special symbol is designed based on the entry. 2 lottery will not be held. Therefore, in order to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is necessary to re-enter the ball into the second entrance 640 after the variation effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is completed. In a state other than the "consecutive villa state", since the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation time of 300 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol 2, the lottery can be received only every 300 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, since the game efficiency becomes extremely poor, even if a large number of prize balls can be obtained in the case of "probability change jackpot D", the player feels that it is not worth it. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “continuous villa state”.

In this way, in a state other than the "consecutive state", the player is suppressed from launching the ball aiming at the second entry port 640 (that is, the ball is launched aiming at the first entry port 64). , In the "Renso state", the ball can be launched aiming at the second entrance 640, so in a state other than the "Renso state", the "Probability change jackpot D" is won and a large number of prize balls are played. It is possible to suppress the acquisition by a person. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is designed on the assumption that only the lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed in the state other than the "consecutive villa state", and only the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed in the "consecutive villa state". The ball ejection rate can be brought close to the design value. Therefore, when the hole predicts sales from the design value of the ball output rate, it can be calculated more accurately.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to suggest the time saving period of the ordinary symbol by the type of the back image. Specifically, if the back A (wilderness stage) is displayed, there is a high possibility that the remaining time saving period is 21 times or more, and if the back B (river stage) is displayed, the remaining time saving period is high. If the period is 20 times or less and the back surface C (forest stage) is displayed, the remaining time saving period is likely to be 10 times or less. As a result, the remaining time saving period can be predicted from the type of the back image, so that the player can check the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more interestingly.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the time saving period elapses due to the look-ahead (that is, the lottery of the special symbols for the number of reserved balls is executed to shift to the "consecutive villa state"), the first 1 Notifying that the launch of the ball to the entry port 64 is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of a number of reserved balls that are equal to or greater than the number of fluctuations until the transition to the "consecutive villa state". That is, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the special symbol 1 from being executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 after the transition to the "consecutive villa state". Therefore, after becoming the "ream villa state", the special symbol 1 lottery results in a normal jackpot A or a probabilistic jackpot A, and the "ream villa state" ends without receiving any benefit from the "ream villa state". Can be suppressed. Therefore, when the state shifts to the "continuous villa state", the player can fully enjoy the "continuous villa state".

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In the above embodiment, the rear image is changed at the start of the variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rear image may be changed at the end of the fluctuation. As a result, the process of executing the variation pattern and the process of changing the rear image can be executed at different timings, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, when the special symbol 2 is drawn and a big hit is made, the first hit type counter C2 is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the "consecutive state". Although it was configured so that the jackpot type of the above was selected, a different jackpot type may be selected depending on whether or not it is in the “consecutive state”. Then, when the game is not in the "consecutive state" (that is, the special symbol is in the low probability state and the normal symbol is in the normal state, or the special symbol is in the high probability state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state). It may be configured so that a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous to the person is selected.

As a disadvantageous jackpot, for example, in a low probability state (non-probability variation) of a special symbol or a time saving state of a normal symbol (probability variation time reduction), if a jackpot is obtained by lottery of the special symbol 2, a prize ball is won. It may be configured so that only the jackpot type, which is difficult to play, is selected. That is, in each round of jackpots, only jackpots in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 0.2 seconds elapse or five balls win) are selected. You may. More specifically, for example, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery, it is possible to shift to a low probability state (non-probability change) of the special symbol after the end of the big hit and win a prize ball. It is configured to be a difficult normal jackpot C, and 95% of the cases where a jackpot is won in the special symbol 2 lottery, the time saving period of the regular symbol is set 100 times after the jackpot ends, and the prize ball can be won. It may be configured to be a difficult probability variation jackpot E.

By configuring in this way, even if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it can be configured so that no merit is generated for the player. Therefore, it is possible to fundamentally eliminate the game method of trying to obtain a large number of prize balls by inserting the ball into the second entrance 640 even though the ball is not in the "consecutive state". This pachinko machine 10 is designed on the assumption that only the lottery for the special symbol 1 is performed in the state other than the "consecutive villa state", and only the lottery for the special symbol 2 is performed in the "consecutive villa state". By preventing the player from aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "continuous villa state", the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought close to the design value. Therefore, when the hole predicts sales from the design value of the ball output rate, it can be calculated more accurately.

In the above embodiment, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter into the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive villa state", but in addition to this, the player is in the "consecutive villa state". When a ball is launched aiming at the second entry port 640 in a state other than the above, the display image, voice, or the like may be notified so that the ball is launched aiming at the first entry port 64. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state". Further, when the ball is launched aiming at the first entrance 64 in the "consecutive state", the ball may be notified to be launched aiming at the second entrance 640. As a result, despite the transition to the "ream villa state", the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in a normal jackpot A or a probabilistic jackpot A, and it is possible to prevent the "ream villa state" from ending. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from winning a large number of prize balls by winning the "probability change jackpot D" in a state other than the "consecutive villa state". Further, the pachinko machine 10 is designed on the assumption that only the lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed in the state other than the "consecutive villa state", and only the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed in the "consecutive villa state". Therefore, the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought closer to the design value by preventing the player from aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive villa state". Therefore, when the hole predicts sales from the design value of the ball output rate, it can be calculated more accurately.

As an opportunity for notification, for example, a sensor means capable of detecting the passage of a ball through the opening 710 of the detour accessory 700 is provided, and the passage of the ball by the sensor means in a state other than the "consecutive state". May be configured to execute the notification when is detected. Further, it may be configured to execute the notification when the ball entering the normal ball entry port 67 is detected in a state other than the "consecutive villa state". This is because the normal entry port 67 is located on the upstream side of the second entry port 640, so that the ball can easily enter the normal entry port 67 by launching the ball aiming at the second entry port 640. .. As a result, it is not necessary to newly provide the sensor means, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. As a control for executing notification when a ball enters the normal ball entry port 67, the free state flag 203i is turned off in the process of S614 or S619 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36). When it is determined that (S614: No or S619: No), the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured to set a command for executing the notification. That is, a command is set to give a warning by a warning image or a warning sound to a player who is launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 even though it is not in the "consecutive state". It may be configured to output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) in the main process (see FIG. 40) of the control device 110.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to suggest the remaining time saving period until the state becomes a continuous villa depending on the type of the back image, but the suggesting method is not limited to this. For example, the character's clothing may be changed according to the remaining time and short period, or the character itself may be changed to a different character (for example, a girl's character). Further, the display mode of the third symbol may be changed, the sound effect, the music, or the like may be changed according to the remaining time and short period. Further, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a guideline for the remaining short period of time as a number or the like. In this case, a number smaller than the actual time saving period may be displayed with a certain probability (so-called ghost display). Further, in the case where the display is performed, for example, when the continuous advance notice effect fails, the number suggesting the remaining time saving period may be increased and changed to a value corresponding to the actual time saving period.

In the present embodiment, the back surface D (cave stage) is always displayed when the state is "consecutive villa state", but the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even in the "consecutive villa state", the back image may be changed from the back A to the back C with a low probability each time the variation effect is executed. Further, in the case of the back surface A to the back surface C in the "consecutive villa state", it may be configured to determine whether or not to return to the back surface D each time the variation effect is executed. In addition, when the jackpot type "normal jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" is reached, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined time (maximum 0.2 seconds). ) It may be configured to be an open jackpot, and as an effect during the jackpot, it may be configured to execute the same effect as in the normal time. That is, even if it becomes "normal jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C", it may be configured so that it is difficult for the player to notice that the jackpot has been achieved. As a result, even if the back image is changed from the back D to any of the back A to the back C, is the back type changed by satisfying the back type change condition during the "consecutive villa state"? It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the back type has been changed based on the fact that the "normal jackpot B" or the "probability variation jackpot C" is won and the "consecutive villa state" ends. Therefore, even if the back type is changed from the back D, it is possible to make the player think that the "continuous villa state" may still be continued, so even if the "continuous villa state" ends. Even if it does, the game can be continued. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened when the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B is reached. However, in addition to the above jackpot, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened. It may be configured to be. For example, a small hit whose state does not change after the end of winning may be provided so that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened four times (four rounds) even when the small hit is won. As a result, even by looking at the operation of the first specific winning opening 65a, it is not possible to determine whether the small hit, the probabilistic jackpot A, or the probabilistic jackpot B was won, so whether or not the time saving period has been reset. Can be made more confusing.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is exhausted by pre-reading and the state shifts to the "consecutive state", a notification is displayed so as to stop the launch of the balls to the first entry port 64. In addition to this, at the stage when it is determined by pre-reading that the game will shift to the "ream villa state", the fluctuation time until the hold is exhausted is determined, and 1 "ream" is determined for the fluctuation time for the number of reserved balls. You may set an effect that suggests "a villa state". As a result, various display effects can be executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the "consecutive villa state", the consecutive villa state is configured so as not to end until the normal jackpot B or the probabilistic jackpot C is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if an upper limit (for example, 15 times) is set for the number of consecutive high-probability states of a special symbol, and the special symbol becomes a high-probability state 15 times or more, the special symbol is low regardless of the type of jackpot. It may be configured to shift to a stochastic state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the "continuous villa state" from continuing for too long, and thus it is possible to prevent the hall from being given an unexpected disadvantage.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 102. In the first embodiment, the high-probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol and the normal state (non-time saving) of the normal symbol are configured to be advantageous to the player in the "consecutive villa state". In this "consecutive villa state", it is easy to obtain a relatively large number of prize balls, and it is easy to win a jackpot (probability change jackpot D) in which the "consecutive villa state" is given again after the end of the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player. It was. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, the state other than the "ream villa state"), it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and the jackpot shifts to the normal symbol time saving state after the jackpot ends. It was configured to make it easier to win (Probability Change Jackpot A). That is, even if a big hit is made in a state other than the "continuous villa state", it is difficult to shift to the "continuous villa state" and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball. Then, when the time saving state of the normal symbol given after the end of the jackpot ends, it is configured to shift to the "consecutive villa state". As a result, it is possible to have the player play the game with one goal of ending the short period of time and shifting to the "consecutive villa state". That is, since the game can be performed with the expectation that the lottery of the special symbol will continue to be missed, it is possible to provide a novel playability that has never been seen before.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" is set to the "consecutive villa state" which is advantageous for the player. As in the first embodiment, the "continuous villa state" in the present embodiment is easy to obtain a relatively large number of prize balls, and after the end of the big hit, the "normal symbol time saving state" is given again (that is, the "continuous villa state"). Since it becomes easy to win a jackpot (normal jackpot D, probability variation jackpot G, probability variation jackpot H) (which is given a "state"), it becomes an advantageous state for the player. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of states are provided as states other than the "consecutive villa state". Specifically, a probabilistic state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol (probability change non-time saving state), a low probability state of the special symbol, and a normal state of the normal symbol (non-probability non-time saving state) are provided. Has been done. Then, the "non-probability change non-time saving state" is configured so as to be easier to shift to the "consecutive villa state" than the "probability change non-time saving state". In addition, it is configured so that the transition from the "probability change non-time saving state" to the "non-probability change non-time saving state" is easier than the "consecutive villa state". For this reason, in many cases, the transition from the "probability change non-time saving state" to the "consecutive villa state" is performed via the "non-probability change non-time saving state". Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability of gradually approaching an advantageous state.

Further, in the present embodiment, every time a special symbol is drawn in the "probability change state of the special symbol", a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift (fall) to the "low probability state of the special symbol". ing. In other words, the timing of transition (falling) from the "probability change non-time reduction state" to the "non-probability change non-time reduction state" can be randomized, so that the timing to start the game (the number of fluctuations after the jackpot ends) Regardless of this, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will shift to the "non-probability change non-time saving state" where it is easy to shift to the "continuous villa state".

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the pachinko machine 110 is provided in the main control device 110. The configuration of the ROM 202 has been partially changed, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114, and The configuration of the character ROM 234 has been partially changed, the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the voice lamp control device 113. The point is that the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structure of the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. As shown in FIG. 66, in the present embodiment, the detour accessory 700 (FIG. 3) arranged on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment. See) has been abolished. Instead of the detour accessory 700 (see FIG. 3), a large number of nails and wind turbines are provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. Further, a normal ball entry port 67 is provided on the right side of the front view with respect to these nails and the wind turbine.

In this embodiment, the detour accessory 700 is abolished because the operation control between the "normal symbol time saving state" and the "normal symbol normal state" is changed from the first embodiment. This is because even if the thing 700 is abolished, it is difficult for the special symbol 2 to be drawn in a state other than the "consecutive villa state".

More specifically, as in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the player who wins the big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2 has more prize balls than the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 wins the big hit. It is configured to make it easier to win big hits that are easy to win. Further, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in a state other than the "consecutive villa state" (probability change non-time saving state and non-probability change non-time saving state), the ball is aimed at the first entrance 64 by left-handing. It is assumed that the game method of launching the ball is performed, and in the "consecutive villa state" (that is, the probable variation time reduction state and the non-probability variation time reduction state), the game method of launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 is performed. Therefore, if the ball easily enters the second entrance 640 even though it is not in the "consecutive state", there is a risk that a prize ball that greatly exceeds the design value of the ball output rate will be paid out. Yes, it may give the hall an unexpected disadvantage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "normal state of the normal symbol" and the "normal state of the normal symbol" are controlled differently from those of the first embodiment, so that the ball enters the second ball in the "consecutive state". It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the ball into the mouth 640.

In the "normal state of the normal symbol" in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol is significantly lower than that in the "time saving state of the normal symbol". Specifically, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2" in the "time saving state of a normal symbol", whereas the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2" in the "normal state of a normal symbol". 240 ”(see FIG. 69 (a)). Therefore, in the "normal state of the normal symbol" (that is, the state other than the "continuous villa state"), the probability of hitting the normal symbol is extremely higher than that of the "normal symbol time saving state" (that is, the "continuous villa state"). Since it is lowered, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state".

Further, in the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (that is, the "ream villa state") in the present embodiment, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set when the normal symbol is hit. , "1 second x 2 times" is set, whereas in the "normal state of the normal symbol" (that is, a state other than the "continuous villa state"), it is extremely "0.2 seconds x 1 time". It gets shorter. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the deterrent effect against the ball entering the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state".

In this way, it is defined as the "ream villa state" that the detour accessory 700 can be abolished by changing the control contents of the "normal state of the normal symbol" and the "normal state of the normal symbol". This is because the state is different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. That is, in the first embodiment, since the "probability variation non-time saving state" is set to the most advantageous "consecutive villa state", the ball enters the second entrance 640 even in the "normal state of the normal symbol". It was necessary to make it easier to ball, and it was necessary to set the "probability variation state of the normal symbol" so that the probability of hitting the normal symbol was higher than that of the "normal state of the normal symbol". Therefore, in the first embodiment, it is difficult to prevent the ball from entering the second entry port 640 only by changing the control according to the state of the normal symbol. Therefore, by providing the detour accessory 700, the ball is prevented (suppressed) from entering the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive villa state".

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the "time saving state of the normal symbol" is set to the "continuous villa state", the second ball is entered in the "normal state of the normal symbol" (that is, a state other than the "continuous villa state"). There is no harmful effect on the difficulty of the ball entering the mouth. Therefore, by simply changing the control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640, the ball can easily enter the second specific entry port 640 in the "ream villa state", and the "ream villa state" is set. In a state other than the "state", it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second specific entry port 640. That is, since the detour accessory 700 can be omitted, the structure of the game board 13 can be simplified, so that the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the raw material cost can be kept low.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 76. First, FIG. 67A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the present embodiment, the first type selection table 202b, the second random number table 202c, the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d, which are defined in the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, are used. Figure Instead of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e and the state setting table 202f,
The first hit type selection table 202 g, the second hit random number table 202h, the special figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202i, the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202j, and the state setting table 202k are provided. The contents of these data tables are changed from the data tables having the same name, which differ only in the reference numerals specified in the ROM 202 of the first embodiment, but the uses are the same as those of the data tables in the first embodiment. be. Further, a fall lottery table 202m is newly added to the ROM 202 of the present embodiment. Details of the data table defined in ROM 202 in these second embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 (b) to 71 (a).

FIG. 67B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first type selection table 202g defined in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment. The first hit type selection table 202g is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, similarly to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7C) in the first embodiment. It is composed of. The first hit type selection table 202g includes a special symbol 1 hit type selection table 202g1 and a special symbol 2 in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are defined when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1. It is composed of two types of data tables, a hit type selection table 202g2 for special figure 2 in which a determination value for determining a big hit type is defined when a big hit is obtained by the lottery. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type that can be selected when the jackpot of the special symbol becomes a jackpot is changed from the first embodiment. Therefore, the specified contents of each table constituting the first type selection table 202g are also changed from the first embodiment.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment as well, when the hit type selection table 202g1 for special figure 1 is referred to (that is, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of special symbol 1). When a jackpot that is almost impossible to obtain a prize ball is easily given to the player, while the hit type selection table 202g2 for special figure 2 is referred to (that is, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of special symbol 2). It is structured so that a jackpot that can win a large number of prize balls is easily given. In addition, if a big hit is achieved by the lottery of the special symbol 2 in the "continuous villa state", the "continuous villa state" is set again after the big hit ends (the time saving state of the normal symbol is given), so that the "continuous villa state" is once given. As long as you continue to win the jackpot before the end of the time saving period of the normal symbol, you can continue to win a large number of prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player extremely advantageous by being in the "consecutive state", and it is possible to have the player play the game with one goal of shifting to the "consecutive state". can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

FIG. 68A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned special drawing 1 hit type selection table 202g1. As shown in FIG. 68A, in the hit type selection table 202g1 for special figure 1, the jackpot type is defined in association with each value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, "normal jackpot C" is associated with the range of "0 to 9" as the first hit type counter C2. As described above, the first type counter C2 is a counter capable of taking 200 counters of "0 to 199". Of these, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot C" is 10 from "0 to 9", so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, the probability of becoming "normal jackpot C" is 5% (10). / 200).

The normal jackpot C is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two, and the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapse or until five balls win) in each round. be. Since it is difficult for the player to win the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 0.2 seconds, even if the player wins the normal jackpot C, the player does not get the prize ball and the special game state is set. In most cases, it will be terminated. In addition, after the end of the normal jackpot C, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. It should be noted that whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given after the end of the normal jackpot C depends on the game state at the time when the normal jackpot C is reached (whether or not the normal jackpot C is given in the probability variation non-time saving state). It is configured in.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the normal jackpot C is obtained in the probability variation time saving state, the time saving period of the normal symbol is not given. That is, when the jackpot C is reached in the probability-changing time-saving state in which it is difficult to shift to the "consecutive villa state", the player shifts to the non-probability-changing non-time-saving state in which it is relatively easy to shift to the "consecutive villa state". It can make you feel as if you are approaching the state of a series of villas.

On the other hand, when the normal jackpot C is reached in a state other than the probabilistic non-time saving state (that is, the non-probability non-time saving state or the "continuous villa state"), the normal symbol time saving period is given 60 times after the end of the normal jackpot C. .. That is, the period from the end of the normal jackpot C until the lottery of the special symbol is performed 60 times is an advantageous "consecutive state" for the player. The player can be pleased by shifting to the "consecutive state" which is most advantageous for the player after the end of the normal jackpot C.

In addition, in this embodiment, basically, a game method of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in the "consecutive villa state" (probability change time reduction state, non-probability change time reduction state) is assumed, and the "ream villa state" is assumed. A game method is assumed in which a ball is launched aiming at the first entry port 64 in a state other than the "state" (probability change non-time saving state, non-probability change non-time saving state). Therefore, as described above, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so that it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640 in a state other than the "consecutive villa state".

On the other hand, the entry of the ball into the first entry port 64 is not hindered in the "consecutive state". For this reason, the lottery of the special symbol 1 may be executed in the "consecutive villa state", and a big hit may occur. Specifically, for example, when a beginner who has not played the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment plays a game so much, or when a start winning prize corresponding to the transition to the "consecutive villa state" is detected, the game is played. This is the case where a big hit is achieved due to a start-up prize held before the person is notified of the "consecutive state". In the case of the above example, if the "consecutive villa state" is terminated, there is a high possibility that the player will be dissatisfied with the game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1 in the "continuous villa state", the "continuous villa state" is given even after the end of the big hit (to the time saving state of the normal symbol). It is configured to migrate). As a result, if the player makes a mistake in the direction in which the ball is launched, or if the player wins a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1 before the "consecutive villa state" is notified, relief can be achieved. Therefore, the player can play the game with more peace of mind.

As the value of the first hit type counter, "probability variation jackpot E" is associated with the range of "10 to 189". Since the number of judgment values for "probability variation jackpot E" is 190, which is "10 to 189", the probability of becoming "probability variation jackpot E" is 90% (180/200) when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery. Is.

Like the normal jackpot C described above, the probability variation jackpot E has two rounds, and in each round, the first specific winning opening 65a has a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapse, or five balls). It is a big hit that will be opened (until you win a prize). In addition, after the end of the probability change jackpot E, the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol. As with the normal jackpot C, whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given after the end of the jackpot depends on whether or not the gaming state at the time when the probability variation jackpot E is reached (whether or not the probability variation jackpot E is reached in the probability variation non-time reduction state). It is configured differently depending on the). More specifically, similarly to the normal jackpot C, when the probability variation jackpot E is obtained in the probability variation time reduction state, the time reduction period of the normal symbol is not given. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot E is reached in a state other than the probability variation non-time reduction state (that is, the non-probability variation non-time reduction state or the "consecutive state"), the time reduction period of the normal symbol is given 60 times after the end of the probability variation jackpot E. (See FIG. 68 (a)).

As the value of the first hit type counter, "probability variation jackpot F" is associated with the range of "190 to 199". Since the number of judgment values that become "probability change jackpot F" is 10 from "190 to 199", the probability of becoming "probability variation jackpot F" is 5% (10/200) when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery. Is.

Like the normal jackpot C and the probability variation jackpot E described above, the probability variation jackpot F has two rounds, and in each round, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds have elapsed, or until 0.2 seconds have elapsed, or , Until 5 balls are won) It is a big hit that is opened. In addition, after the end of the probability change jackpot F, the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol. In addition, unlike the normal jackpot C and the probability variation jackpot E, 100 times of normal symbol time reduction period is given after the end of the probability variation jackpot F regardless of the gaming state at the time when the probability variation jackpot F is reached. That is, even if the gaming state is the probabilistic non-time saving state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to shift to the "consecutive villa state" by becoming the probabilistic jackpot F. In addition, since the time saving period is relatively long, there is a high possibility that a big hit will be made during the consecutive villa state. Therefore, even if the gaming state is the probabilistic non-time saving state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic jackpot F will directly shift to the "consecutive villa state".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1, a big hit that is difficult to obtain a prize ball is given. For this reason, in a probabilistic non-time saving state or a non-probable non-time saving state in which it is relatively difficult to allow the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, it is necessary to aim at the first ball entry port 64. , Even if it becomes a big hit, it will be in a disadvantageous state where you can hardly get a prize ball. Therefore, in the probabilistic non-time saving state and the non-probable change non-time saving state, the player can be made to play the game while wishing to quickly shift to the advantageous "ream villa state". Therefore, it is possible to increase the joy in the case of shifting to the "continuous villa state", and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the "continuous villa state".

Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1 in the probabilistic non-time saving state which is the most disadvantageous for the player, the non-probability change non-time saving state which is relatively advantageous and the most advantageous "consecutive villa state". Is configured to be low (5% each), and even if a big hit occurs in the probabilistic non-time saving state, the probabilistic non-time saving state can be easily set again. Therefore, in the probabilistic non-time saving state, instead of a big hit, the fall lottery (lottery for whether or not to shift from the probabilistic non-time saving state to the non-probable non-time saving state) is won, which is executed every time a special symbol lottery is performed. It is possible to provide a novel playability in which a game is played with the expectation that it will be played.

Next, the hit type selection table 202g2 for special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the hit type selection table 202g2 for special figure 2 is the value of the first hit type counter C2, similarly to the hit type selection table 202g1 for special figure 1 (see FIG. 68 (a)). The jackpot type is specified in association with each other. Specifically, "normal jackpot D" is associated with the range of "0 to 9" as the first hit type counter C2. Since the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot D" is 10 from "0 to 9", the probability of becoming "normal jackpot D" is 5% (10/200) when a jackpot is won in the special symbol 2 lottery. Is.

The normal jackpot D is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is four, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until five balls win) in each round. In many cases, five balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 650a before 30 seconds have elapsed, so that the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. In addition, after the end of the normal jackpot D, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol.

Whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given after the end of the normal jackpot D is configured to differ depending on the game state at the time when the normal jackpot D is reached (whether or not the normal jackpot D is given in the probability variation non-time saving state). Has been done. More specifically, when the normal jackpot D is obtained in the probability variation time saving state, the time saving period of the normal symbol is not given. On the other hand, when the normal jackpot D is reached in a state other than the probabilistic non-time saving state (that is, the non-probability non-time saving state or the "consecutive state"), the normal symbol time saving period is given 60 times after the end of the normal jackpot D. (See FIG. 68 (b)).

As the first hit type counter C2, "probability variation jackpot G" is associated with the range of "10 to 189". Since the number of judgment values for "probability change jackpot G" is 180 of "10 to 189", the probability of becoming "probability variation jackpot G" is 90% (180/200) when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery. Is.

Like the normal jackpot D, the probability variation jackpot G has four rounds, and in each round, the second specific winning opening 650a is set for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until five balls win). It is a big hit to be opened. In addition, after the end of the probability change jackpot G, the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol.

Whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given after the end of the probability variation jackpot G is configured to differ depending on the gaming state at the time when the probability variation jackpot G is reached, as in the case of the normal jackpot D. More specifically, when the probability variation jackpot G is obtained in the probability variation time reduction state, the time reduction period of the normal symbol is not given. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot G is reached in a state other than the probability variation non-time reduction state (that is, the non-probability variation non-time reduction state or the "consecutive state"), the time reduction period of the normal symbol is given 60 times after the end of the probability variation jackpot G. (See FIG. 68 (b)).

A "probability variation jackpot H" is associated with the range of "190 to 199" as the first hit type counter C2. Since the number of judgment values for "probability change jackpot H" is 10 from "190 to 199", the probability of becoming "probability variation jackpot H" is 5% (10/200) when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery. Is.

The probability variation jackpot H is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is eight, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until five balls win) in each round. In addition, after the end of the probability change jackpot H, the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol.

Whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given after the end of the probability variation jackpot H is configured to differ depending on the game state at the time when the probability variation jackpot H is reached, as in the case of the normal jackpot D and the hit G to the nucleus. ing. More specifically, when the probability variation jackpot H is obtained in the probability variation time reduction state, the time reduction period of the normal symbol is not given. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot H is reached in a state other than the probability variation non-time reduction state, the time reduction period of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the probability variation jackpot H (see FIG. 68 (b)). That is, the probability variation jackpot H is the most advantageous jackpot for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the time saving period given after the jackpot ends is also the largest.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2 in the "consecutive villa state", in addition to being given a big hit that can obtain a relatively large amount of prize balls, the big hit It is configured so that it will be in the "ream villa state" after the end of. As a result, once it is possible to shift to the "continuous villa state", it will be a very advantageous state in which the jackpot with many prize balls and the "continuous villa state" are repeated unless the time saving period of the normal symbol elapses. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2 in a state other than the "continuous villa state", the time saving period is not given (the state does not shift to the "continuous villa state"). There is. This is to suppress an irregular game method in which a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 even in a state other than the "consecutive state". That is, if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the player is always given the time saving period of the normal symbol (that is, the "consecutive villa state" is set), and the player is "consecutive villa". In a state other than the "state" (probability change non-time saving state or non-probability change non-time saving state), there is a risk of directly shifting to the "consecutive villa state" by making a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 2. In order to prevent such an irregular game method from being fundamentally established, in this embodiment, even if a big hit is obtained by lottery of the special symbol 2 in a state other than the "ream villa state", after the big hit is completed, "ream" It is configured so that it does not become a "villa state". As a result, it is possible to more surely enjoy the innovative playability of stepping up from the probabilistic non-time saving state to the non-probable non-time saving state and from the non-probable non-time saving state to the "continuous villa state". Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69A, the details of the second random number table 202h defined in the ROM 202 in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the second random number table 202h in the present embodiment is also used at a low probability (normal state of a normal symbol) like the second random number table 202c in the first embodiment. A table and a table for high probability (normal symbol time saving state) are defined.

In the second hit random number table for the low probability (normal state of the normal symbol), only "5" is defined as the determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 69 (a)). Since only one judgment value to be a hit is specified out of the 240 possible values of the second hit random number counter C4, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) in the normal state of the normal symbol is specified. Is 1/240.

Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 69 (a)). Of the 240 possible values of the second hit random number counter C4, there are 200 hit judgment values, so the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is 1 in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. It becomes /1.2 (200/240).

In this way, by configuring the hit probability of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol to be significantly lower than the hit probability of the normal symbol in the time saving state (that is, the "renso state"), the "renso" By drawing the special symbol 2 in a state other than the "state", it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of aiming for a big hit in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained. That is, even if the right-handed hit is executed in a state other than the "continuous villa state", since the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low, the electric accessory 640a is hardly opened, and the special symbol 2 is drawn. Never. In addition, by continuing to hit right, there are rare cases where a lottery for special symbol 2 is performed, but since it is only a big hit with a probability of 1/30 or 1 / 37.5, the lottery for special symbol 2 is used. In most cases, a jackpot consumes far more balls than the prize balls that can be earned by the jackpot.

In addition, if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2 in a state other than the "consecutive villa state", it may shift to the normal state of the normal symbol as described above (that is, shift to the "consecutive villa state"). Therefore, there is no merit for the player to perform a right-handed hit in a state other than the "consecutive state", and the more the player hits the right, the easier it is to consume the ball. Therefore, the player can be made to perform a left-handed hit in a state other than the "continuous villa state" and a right-handed hit in the "continuous villa state". It is possible to prevent the injustice of trying to get the prize ball.

Next, the details of the special figure variation pattern selection table 202i in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (b). Similar to the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment, the special figure variation pattern selection table 202i is the first for determining the display mode of the variation effect (variation pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. This is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined for each display mode.

As shown in FIG. 69 (b), the special figure variation pattern selection table 202i is composed of three types of data tables. That is, it is composed of a selection table 202i1 for other than the special figure 1 consecutive villa, a selection table 202i2 for other than the special figure 2 consecutive villa, and a selection table 202i3 for the common consecutive villa state.

The selection table 202i1 for other than the special symbol consecutive villa is the data referred to when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is executed in the state other than the "consecutive villa state" (probability change non-time saving state or non-probability change non-time saving state). It's a table. Further, the selection table 202i2 for other than the special figure 2 consecutive villa is a data table that is referred to when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in a state other than the "continuous villa state". Further, the common consecutive villa state selection table 202i3 is a data table that is referred to when either the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in the "continuous villa state". Details of the above three types of data tables will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned selection table 202i1 for other than the special figure 1 consecutive villa, and FIG. 70 (b) shows the specified contents of the selection table 202i2 for other than the special figure 2 consecutive villa. FIG. 70 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the common consecutive villa state selection table 202i3. As shown in FIG. 70, the above three types of tables are data tables in which the types of fluctuation patterns that can be selected for each stop type are defined in association with the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1.

First, with reference to FIG. 70 (a), the specified contents of the selection table 202i1 for other than the special figure 1 consecutive villa will be described. In the selection table 202i1 for other than the special figure 1 consecutive villa, the fluctuation pattern type and the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 are defined in association with each stop type of complete deviation, reach deviation, and jackpot. .. Specifically, when the stop type is completely different, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 (regardless of whether it is "0 to 198"). ..

When the stop type is out of reach, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 (regardless of which of "0 to 198"). When the stop type is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 9 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 (regardless of which of "0 to 198").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball starts and wins the first ball entrance 64 in a state other than the "consecutive villa state", the fluctuation time varies from 7 to 10 seconds regardless of the stop type. It is configured so that fluctuation patterns that do not differ significantly in time are selected. This is because even if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1, the prize ball can hardly be won. That is, it is difficult to recognize from the fluctuation pattern whether or not it is a big hit, and it is prevented (suppressed) that the player feels disappointed that the prize ball cannot be obtained. In addition, in accordance with setting the fluctuation time to the same value, in the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the display effect in a mode in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot has been achieved is executed. For example, as a stop symbol in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, so-called breaks are configured to stop. This makes it more difficult to tell whether the prize ball was a big hit or a miss.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70 (b), the specified contents of the selection table 202i2 for other than the special figure 2 consecutive villas will be described. In the selection table 202i2 for other than the special figure 2 consecutive villas, the fluctuation pattern type that can be selected when the stop type is "completely off" is only "ultra-long off" with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds (5 minutes). That is, in the range where the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" (that is, all the values that the first variation type counter CS1 can take), "ultra-long deviation" is selected.

When the stop type is "out of reach", the only variation pattern that can be selected is "out of reach ultra long reach" with a variation time of 300 seconds. Further, when the stop type is "big hit", only "hit super long reach" with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds is selected. That is, when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in the probability variation non-time reduction state or the non-probability variation non-time reduction state, the variation pattern type having a variation time of 300 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol.

In this way, by configuring the fluctuation pattern type with an extremely long fluctuation time to be selected, once the fluctuation starts, a lottery of special symbols can be received for a long time until the fluctuation ends. There can be no disadvantage. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should not be hit to the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive villa state" (probability change non-time reduction state or non-probability change non-time reduction state). Therefore, the player is made to launch the ball aiming at the first entrance 64 in a state other than the "consecutive state", and the ball is aimed at the second entrance 640 in the "consecutive state". It can be launched. This pachinko machine 10 is designed on the assumption that only the lottery for the special symbol 1 is performed in the state other than the "consecutive villa state", and only the lottery for the special symbol 2 is performed in the "consecutive villa state". By preventing (suppressing) the player from launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "continuous villa state", the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought closer to the design value. can. Therefore, when the hole predicts sales from the design value of the ball output rate, it can be calculated more accurately.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a plurality of other configurations in order to prevent the ball from being launched by the second entrance 640 in a state other than the "consecutive state". Is provided. For example, in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is extremely low (1 / 1.2 → 1/240) in a state other than the “continuous villa state”. In addition, even if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2 in a state other than the "continuous villa state", the time saving period is not given after the end of the big hit (it does not shift to the "continuous villa state"). .. As a result, it is difficult to execute the lottery for the special symbol 2, and even if the lottery for the special symbol is executed, it takes a long time of 300 seconds for the result to be obtained, and even if the lottery is a big hit. , After the jackpot is over, a state other than the "consecutive state" will always be set. Therefore, there are many disadvantages for the player to hit right (a game method of launching a ball in the direction of the second entrance 640) in a state other than the "consecutive villa state", and in a state other than the "consecutive villa state". Can make the player more reliably perform a left-handed strike (a game method of launching a ball in the direction of the first entry port 64).

In addition, when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed (the player makes a right-handed hit) in a state other than the "consecutive villa state", in the 300-second variation effect performed based on the lottery, the first An effect may be provided to warn the player to launch the ball aiming at the entry port 64. As a result, it is possible to make a player who makes a right-handed hit (a game method aiming at the second entrance 640) quit right-handed even though he / she is not in the “continuous villa state”. In addition, by displaying a warning effect, it is possible to easily identify the player who is performing a game method different from the usual one (the player is hitting right in a state other than the "ream villa state") to the clerk in the hall. Can be done. Therefore, even if the player ignores the warning effect and continues the game method different from the usual one, the clerk in the hall who confirmed the warning effect can give direct attention. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the irregular game method of hitting right in a state other than the "continuous villa state".

Next, with reference to FIG. 70 (c), the specified contents of the common consecutive villa state selection table 202i3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 70 (c), when the stop type is "completely off", the first variable type counter CS1 is used regardless of whether the lottery is for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. In the range of "0 to 98" as a value, a "short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is associated. Further, in the range of "99 to 198" as the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, a "long deviation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated.

When the stop type is "out of reach", the range of "0 to 149" as the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is associated with "normal reach" having a variation time of 15 seconds. Further, the range of "150 to 198" as the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is associated with "super reach" having a variation time of 30 seconds.

Further, when the stop type is "big hit", the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is associated with "normal reach" having a variation time of 15 seconds. Further, the range of "99 to 198" as the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is associated with "super reach" having a variation time of 30 seconds. That is, in the case of a big hit, it is configured so that "super reach" is more easily selected than in the case of a miss. As a result, the player can have a feeling of expectation for a big hit by executing "super reach" with a long fluctuation time.

Next, the fall lottery table 202m will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (a). The fall lottery table 202m is a data table in which the determination value of the fall lottery counter C5, which will be described later, is stored. The value of the fall lottery counter C5 acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (at the time of starting winning) is any of the values specified in the fall lottery table 202m. When it matches the judgment value of, it is set to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (to fall).

More specifically, four determination values of "43, 107, 195, 222" are defined as determination values for determining a fall in a probabilistic state of a special symbol. Here, the fall lottery counter C5 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239". Of the 240 possible values of the fall lottery counter C5, there are four judgment values that are determined to fall, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Is 1/60 (4/240).

In the fall lottery table 202m in the present embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol has fallen in the probabilistic state (determination value for the probabilistic state of the special symbol) is defined, and the special symbol is defined. The judgment value for the low probability state of is not specified. This is because it is wasteful of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low-probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol is already in the low-probability state.

In the present embodiment, the fall lottery table 202m is compared with the regularly updated fall lottery counter C5, and whether or not to shift (fall) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol. Is judged. That is, it is possible to randomize the timing of transition from the probabilistic non-time saving state, which is difficult to shift to the "continuous villa state", to the non-probable non-time saving state, which is relatively easy to shift to the "continuous villa state". Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the game is started, the game can be performed with the expectation that the player will be determined to have fallen and will shift to the non-probability change non-time saving state.

In the present embodiment, a lottery (judgment) is made as to whether or not to shift (fall) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, but it is a lottery (judgment) to shift to another state. You may. For example, it may be determined by a lottery executed for each change whether or not to shift from the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, the "consecutive villa state") to the normal state of the normal symbol. As a result, it is possible to randomly determine how long the "continuous villa state" will last, so that the game can be performed in the hope that the "continuous villa state" will continue for each change. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a more tense feeling in the "consecutive villa state", and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, for example, it may be configured so that it is possible to draw a lottery whether or not to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the probabilistic state of the special symbol. As a result, even if the probabilistic non-time saving state, which is difficult to shift to the "continuous villa state", is temporarily changed to the non-probable non-time saving state, which is easy to shift to the "continuous villa state", a special symbol is displayed before it becomes a big hit. If you win the lottery, you can shift to the probabilistic non-time saving state again. Therefore, in the non-probability non-time saving state, it is not possible to shift to the "consecutive state" unless a big hit is made before winning the lottery to shift to the probabilistic state. You can feel a sense of tension. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (b). As shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area is replaced with the special symbol 2 execution area 203b provided in the RAM 203 (see FIG. 6) of the first embodiment. 203j is provided. Further, in the present embodiment, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203k is newly added.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203j has four reserved areas (special symbol 2 reserved first area to fourth area) like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, in addition to the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, the value of the fall lottery counter C5 is stored. In the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type are also applied to the four hold areas (special figure 1 hold first area to fourth area). In addition to each value of the selection counter C3, the value of the fall lottery counter C5 is stored.

In the present embodiment, if a ball enters the second entry port 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. ing. That is, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to four times. In the first embodiment, since the probabilistic non-time saving state is defined as the "consecutive villa state" which is advantageous to the player, in order to make it difficult for the lottery of the special symbol 2 to be executed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second ball is entered. It was configured so that entry into the mouth 640 was not suspended.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the time saving state of the normal symbol is defined as the "consecutive villa state" which is advantageous to the player, the electric accessory 640a is in a state other than the "consecutive villa state" (non-time saving state). It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 only by controlling the above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the second ball opening 640 can be held up to four times, and the ball entering the second ball opening 640 during the variable effect in the "consecutive state" becomes useless. It can be difficult (hard to be discarded). Therefore, since the "consecutive villa state" can be made more advantageous to the player, the player's expectation for the "consecutive villa state" can be improved.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203k is a counter that counts the number of balls (starting prize) entered into the second entry port 640 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203k is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see S426 in FIG. 89). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S222 in FIG. 87).

The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203k (holding number N2 of the variation display in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S223 in FIG. 87 and S421 in FIG. 89). ). The number of reserved balls command in the present embodiment includes information indicating whether the value of the number of held times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 has been changed or the value of the number of held times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2 has been changed. It has been. With this information, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately distinguish between the number of times the variable display is held N1 in the special symbol 1 and the number of times the variable display is held N2 in the special symbol 2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, in addition to the various counters (see FIG. 16) used for the control in the first embodiment, whether or not to shift (fall) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol. A fall lottery counter C5 used for determining the above is provided.

Like the other counters provided in the RAM 203, the fall lottery counter C5 is added with 1 to the previous value at each update timing (for example, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 86)) that is regularly visited, and the maximum value is increased. It is a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the value.

As described above, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment includes a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a composed of four holding areas (special drawing 1 holding first to fourth areas) and four holding areas (special drawing 2 holding first). A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203j composed of (1st to 4th areas) and a special symbol reserved ball execution area commonly used for the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 are provided. In each of these areas, a random number counter C1 per first, a type counter C2 per first, a stop type selection counter C3, according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, And each value of the fall lottery counter C5 is stored.

The fall lottery counter C5 will be described in detail. The fall lottery counter C5 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 239), reaches the maximum value (for example, 239 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 239), and then returns to 0. It is composed. The value of the fall lottery counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86 in the present embodiment)), and the ball is entered at the first entry slot 64 or the second entry. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203j at the timing when the ball mouth 640 is won. The value of the random number that shifts (falls) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is defined in the above-mentioned fall lottery table 202m (see FIG. 71 (a)), and the fall lottery counter. When the value of C5 matches the random number value (judgment value) defined in the fall lottery table 202m (see FIG. 71 (a)), it is determined that the fall has occurred. When it is determined that the player has fallen based on the fall lottery counter C5 (see S323: Yes in FIG. 88), the special symbol is set to a low probability state (see S324 in FIG. 88).

In the fall lottery counter C5 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are four random numbers (judgment values) for falling, and the random number values (judgment values) "43,107,195,222" are fall lottery. It is stored in the table 202m. In this way, while the total number of random numbers (judgment values) is 240, the total number of random numbers (judgment values) that fall is 4, so the probability of winning a special symbol is "1/60" (4 /). 240).

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the transition condition from one gaming state to another gaming state will be described. In the following description, in order to make it easier to understand each state, the probabilistic non-time saving state, which is the state of staying for the longest time during a normal game, is referred to as a "normal mode". In addition, a non-probability non-time saving state (a state as if preparing for the "ream villa state") that always shifts to the "ream villa state" when a big hit is made is called a "preparation mode". Further, the probabilistic change time saving state and the non-probability change non-time saving state are collectively referred to as "ream villa mode (ream villa state)".

First, the state transition in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state), which is the most disadvantageous for the player (that is, the most difficult to shift to the "consecutive villa mode" (consecutive villa state)), will be described. This "normal mode" is shown on the upper side of FIG. 73. As shown in FIG. 73, when a big hit is obtained in the "normal mode" or a lottery result corresponding to a fall is obtained by a fall lottery, the game shifts to another game state. In the present embodiment, the same first random number table 202a as in the first embodiment is defined in the ROM 202, so that the probability of hitting the special symbol in the probabilistic state of the special symbol is the same as in the first embodiment. Is 1/30.

In the "normal mode (probability change non-time saving state)", when the "probability change jackpot E" is won by 90% of the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit, the mode shifts to the "normal mode" after the jackpot ends (Fig. See top center of 73). That is, it loops the "normal mode". Even if the player wins the "probability jackpot E", it is difficult for the player to get the prize ball, so if he continues to win the "probability change jackpot E" (continues to loop the "normal mode"), he cannot get the prize ball. Will continue to consume the ball. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, when the "normal jackpot C" is won by 5% of the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state) after the jackpot ends (FIG. 73). See above). That is, since the state shifts to a state in which it is relatively easy to shift to the "consecutive villa state", it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by a jackpot, but it is more advantageous to the player than the "probability change jackpot E". Then, in the case of "probability change jackpot F", which is won by 5% of the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery, it is defined as "ream villa mode" (consecutive villa state) after the jackpot ends. Among the types of states, the state shifts to the probabilistic time saving state (see the upper left side of FIG. 73). In this "renso mode", as described above, it becomes easy to win a jackpot (probability variable jackpot G, H, and normal jackpot D) in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, which is the most advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery before the big hit of the special symbol (see Fig. 71 (a)), the "preparation mode" (non-probability change) that is relatively easy to shift to the "consecutive villa mode". It shifts to the non-time saving state (see the upper right side of FIG. 73).

In this way, in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state), even if a big hit is made, the same state (normal mode) is looped with a 90% probability, while the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery. In that case, it is configured to surely shift to the "preparation mode" which is more advantageous than the "normal mode". Therefore, the game will be played in the hope that the lottery result will correspond to the fall. In a general gaming machine, the game is played in the hope that the jackpot will continue during the probabilistic state, but in this pachinko machine 10, the game can be played while hoping that the probabilistic state will end early. , It is possible to provide a novel playability that other gaming machines do not have.

Next, the state transition in the "preparation mode" (non-probability non-time saving state), which is more advantageous for the player than the above-mentioned "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state) (easy to shift to the "renso mode"), will be described. .. This "preparation mode" is shown in the central portion of FIG. 73. As shown in FIG. 73, in the "preparation mode", only when a big hit occurs, the game shifts to another gaming state. As in the first embodiment, the probability of hitting the special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 37.5.

Even when a special symbol is a big hit in the "preparation mode", the state of transition after the end of the big hit is different depending on the big hit type, as in the probabilistic non-time saving state. As shown in FIG. 73, in the "preparation mode", when the "normal jackpot C" is won by 5% of the jackpots obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1, the "consecutive villa mode" (consecutive villa state) after the jackpot ends. ), Of the two types of states defined as), the state shifts to the non-probability change non-time saving state (see the central portion of FIG. 73). As mentioned above, in this "renso mode", it becomes easy to win a big hit that can win a large amount of prize balls. Therefore, it is difficult to win the prize ball with the "normal jackpot C" itself, but the player can expect the player to acquire the mode of the prize ball by the "renso mode" set after that. It is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, if the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in a "probability change jackpot E" that wins 90% of the jackpot, or a "probability change jackpot F" that wins 5%, the "renso mode" (renso mode) Of the two types of states defined as (states), the state shifts to the probabilistic time saving state (see the left side of the central portion in FIG. 73). For this reason, it is difficult to win a prize ball with the "probability change jackpot E" or the "probability change jackpot F" itself, but the player is expected to win a large amount of prize balls by the "renso mode" set after that. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, since the jackpot probability (1/30) in the probabilistic time-saving state is higher than the jackpot probability (1 / 37.5) in the non-probability non-time-saving state, the time-saving period elapses without becoming a jackpot in the "renso mode". It is unlikely that it will end ("Renso mode" will end). Therefore, it becomes a big hit in the "renso mode", and the expectation for getting a large number of prize balls can be further increased.

In this way, the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state) is a state in which the player shifts to the "ream villa mode" by hitting any of the jackpots, which is a relatively advantageous state for the player.

Next, the "ream villa mode" (consecutive villa state) shown in the lower part of FIG. 73 will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of states (probability variation time reduction state and non-probability variation time reduction state) are defined as the "consecutive villa mode". First, the probability variation time saving state will be described with reference to the lower left side of FIG. 73. As shown on the lower left side of FIG. 73, in the probabilistic time saving state, when the special symbol is a big hit, when the normal symbol time saving period set at the end of the previous big hit has passed, and when the fall lottery is used to deal with the fall. When the lottery result is obtained, it shifts to another state.

Specifically, in the probabilistic time saving state, if it becomes the "probability change jackpot G" that wins at 90% when the special symbol 2 lottery wins, or the "probability change jackpot H" that wins at 5%, 4 rounds or A special game state of 8 rounds is given, and the probability change time saving state is set again (see the lower left side of FIG. 73). That is, since the "ream villa mode" (ream villa state), which is advantageous for the player, loops, the player can be pleased.

In addition, when the "normal jackpot D" is won by 5% of the jackpot by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the special game state of 4 rounds is given, and then the state shifts to the non-probability change time saving state (FIG. 73). See the lower center part). That is, although the probabilistic state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, a short period of time is given, so that the "ream villa mode" itself, which is advantageous for the player, continues. Further, in the probabilistic change time saving state, even if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery executed for each fluctuation, the transition to the non-probability change time saving state is similarly performed.

On the other hand, when the time saving period of the normal symbol has passed, the mode shifts to the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state). As mentioned above, in the "normal mode", it is difficult to win a prize ball even if it becomes a big hit, and it is configured so that the same state can be easily looped, which is disadvantageous to the player. .. Therefore, it is possible to have a player who plays a game in the "renso mode" play a game in the hope that he will win the next big hit before the time saving period of the normal symbol ends. That is, since the game can be performed while giving a feeling of tension in the "renso mode", it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the non-probability variation time saving state shown on the lower right side of FIG. 73 will be described. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 73, in the non-probability variation time saving state, when the special symbol hits the jackpot or when the time saving period of the normal symbol set at the end of the previous jackpot elapses, the state changes to another state. Transition.

Specifically, in the probabilistic time saving state, if it becomes the "probability change jackpot G" that wins 90% when the special symbol 2 lottery wins, or the "probability change jackpot H" that wins 5%, 4 rounds or 8 A special game state of the round is given, and after the end of the jackpot, it is set to a probabilistic time reduction state (see the lower center of FIG. 73). That is, in addition to looping the "ream villa mode" (ream villa state), which is advantageous for the player, the player shifts to the probabilistic state of the special symbol having a high jackpot probability, so that the player can win the jackpot again at short intervals. Can be expected.

In addition, when the "normal jackpot D" is won by 5% of the jackpots obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, after the special game state of 4 rounds is given, the state shifts to the non-probability change time saving state again (FIG. 73). See bottom center right side). That is, since the non-probability change time saving state loops, the player can be pleased by continuing the "ream villa mode" which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, when the time saving period of the normal symbol has passed, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state). As mentioned above, in the "preparation mode", it is difficult to win a prize ball even if it becomes a big hit, but it is in a state of shifting to the "renso mode" by becoming a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the mode will be changed to the "renso mode" again (the "renso mode" will be pulled back in a short period of time).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the fall lottery executed in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state) is the lottery result corresponding to the fall, the "ream villa mode" (ream). It is configured to shift to the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state) that makes it easy to shift to the villa state). Then, by winning one of the jackpots in the "preparation mode", the mode shifts to the "renso mode" after the jackpot ends. In this "renso mode", it is easy to become a big hit that can win a large number of prize balls, and after the big hit, the "renso mode" is set again until at least 60 special symbol lottery is executed. NS. Therefore, by continuing to win the jackpot before the short period of time elapses, a large number of prize balls can be continuously obtained, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that the player shifts to the "renso mode" and loops the "renso mode" more times. It is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 114 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222, and FIG. 74 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 74A, the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a notice type determination table 222d in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. .. On the other hand, in the ROM 222 of the present embodiment, the back setting table 222b and the continuous notice determination table 222c of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment are deleted.

The notice type determination table 222d newly added to the ROM 222 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the display effect suggesting a fall can be executed in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state), and the effect type when the display effect is executed. It is a data table to do. More specifically, when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery, the production type of the display effect for notifying the fall is determined, or when the fall is not caused by the fall lottery, the fall occurs. It is used to determine whether or not to execute such a display effect (gase effect). The details of the notice type determination table 222d will be described later with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment includes a probability change state flag 223k and a continuous villa state counter. 223m, a notice type lottery counter 223n, a notice start flag 223p, a notice type flag 223q, a look-ahead probability change state flag 223s, and a look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223t are provided. Further, in the RAM 223 of the present embodiment, the ceiling number counter 223e and the consecutive villa state flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 of the first embodiment are deleted.

The probability change state flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is in the probability change state. If it is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability change state, and if it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. Is shown. The probability variation state flag 223k is set to on when a variation pattern corresponding to any of the probability variation jackpots E to H is notified by the variation pattern command notified from the main controller 110 (see S1723 in FIG. 96). ). On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command notifies the fluctuation pattern corresponding to either the normal jackpot C or D, or when the fall command indicating that the result of the fall lottery has become the lottery result corresponding to the fall is notified. Is set to off (see S1724 in FIG. 96 and S4601 in FIG. 102). Further, in the initial setting executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is updated based on the state command output from the main control device 110 (see S1311 and S1312 in FIG. 93). The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the state (whether it is on or off) of the probability change state flag 223k and execute the corresponding effect (display effect, voice effect, etc.).

The consecutive villa state counter 223m is a counter indicating the remaining number of times in the "continuous villa mode" (continuous villa state). That is, it is a counter that counts how many times the time saving period of a normal symbol remains. In this consecutive villa state counter 223m, when the jackpot type to which the time saving period is given is notified by the fluctuation pattern command, the time saving period determined for each jackpot is set as the counter value (S1727, S1729 in FIG. 96). , S1730). In addition, the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is notified (see S1822 in FIG. 97). The voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the current state is the "series villa mode" based on the value of the villa state counter 223 m, and executes the corresponding effect (display effect, voice effect, etc.).

The notice type lottery counter 223n is a counter referred to when selecting the type of display effect (various display effects suggesting a fall) to be executed in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state) from the notice type determination table 222d. .. The notice type lottery counter 223n is composed of a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 99", and is a value in the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Is updated one by one. That is, instead of the update processing of the back determination counter and the advance notice determination counter in the first embodiment (see S1414 and S1415 in FIG. 44), the update process of the advance notice type lottery counter 223n is executed (not shown). When selecting the type of display effect, the value of the notice type lottery counter 223n is compared with the above-mentioned notice type determination table 222d (see FIG. 75), and the display effect corresponding to the value of the notice type lottery counter 223n is compared. The type is selected.

The notice start flag 223p is a flag for storing the type of display effect determined based on the notice type determination table 222d and the value of the notice lottery counter 223n, and each value that the notice start flag 223p can take. The type of display effect is associated with. When the type of display effect suggesting a fall is determined, the value of the notice start flag 223p is set to a value corresponding to the determined display effect (see S4408 in FIG. 100). In the present embodiment, the mode of the detailed display effect is determined based on the value of the notice start flag 223p and the number of reserved balls at the start time of the next fluctuation. When the mode of the detailed display effect is determined, the value of the notice start flag 223p is reset (see S4207 in FIG. 98).

The notice type flag 223q is a flag indicating the type of display effect suggesting a fall during execution. For example, a storage area of 1 byte is allocated to the notice type flag 223q, and different display effect types are associated with each other according to the flag value. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 (a). For example, for the value “00H” of the notice type flag 223q, “no notice”, that is, information indicating that the notice effect is not executed. Are associated with each other. Further, for example, for the value "03H" of the notice type flag 223q, the display effect for notifying the transition to the "preparation mode" (non-probability variation non-time saving state) in the variation period over three variation effects is being executed. Information indicating is associated with. This notice type flag 223q is the notice effect indicated by the notice start flag 223p when a value corresponding to the execution of the display effect is set in the above-mentioned notice start flag 223p at the start of fluctuation (see S4201: No in FIG. 98). The corresponding value is set based on the type of the ball and the number of reserved balls (see S4205 in FIG. 98).

When the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r receives the prize information command output from the main control device 110, whether the start time of the variation effect corresponding to the received prize information command is the probability change state of the special symbol or the special symbol It is a flag indicating whether or not it is in a low probability state. If the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is on, the information notified by the winning information command is analyzed as the probability change state of the special symbol at the start of the fluctuation. On the other hand, if the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is off, the information notified by the winning information command is analyzed as being in the low probability state of the special symbol. This look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is updated every time the winning information indicating a big hit is notified by the winning information command (see S4506 and S4513 in FIG. 101). More specifically, when any of the probabilistic jackpots E to H is notified by the winning information command, the look-ahead probability variation state flag 223r is set to on, and when any of the normal jackpots C and D is notified. The look-ahead probability variation flag 223r is set to off. Further, the look-ahead probability change flag 223r is also set to off when the winning information corresponding to the fall is notified by the winning information command (see S4502 in FIG. 101). In the present embodiment, in the advance notice start flag setting process (see FIG. 100), a process of selecting a display effect for notifying a fall is performed based on the look-ahead probability change flag 223r and the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s, which will be described later. Whether or not it is determined.

When the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s receives the winning information command output from the main control device 110, the remaining number of times of the normal symbol in a short period of time at the start time of the variation effect corresponding to the received winning information command (that is, , It is a counter which shows the remaining number of times of "remaining villa mode" (consecutive villa state). The look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s is updated every time the winning information indicating the jackpot is notified by the winning information command (see S4505, S4511, and S4512 in FIG. 101). More specifically, when the winning of the probabilistic jackpots E and G and the normal jackpots C and D in the "consecutive villa mode" is notified, 60 is set to the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s (FIG. 68). reference). Further, when the winning of the probability variation jackpot H in the "ream villa mode" is notified, 100 is set to the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s (see FIG. 68 (b)). Further, regardless of whether or not the player is in the "renso mode", when the winning of the probability variation jackpot F is notified, 100 is set to the value of the look-ahead probability variation state counter 223s (see FIG. 68 (a)). ..

In addition, the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s is updated by subtracting the value by 1 each time the winning information corresponding to the deviation in the "continuous villa mode" (time saving state of the normal symbol) is notified (). See S4507 in FIG. 101). As described above, based on the value of the look-ahead continuous villa state counter 223s and the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r, it is determined whether or not to perform the process of selecting the display effect for notifying the fall.

Next, the details of the notice type determination table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). As described above, the advance notice type determination table 222d shows whether or not the display effect (notice effect) suggesting a fall (shift to the "preparation mode") can be executed in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state), and the display effect (display effect). It is a data table for determining the effect type when executing the advance notice effect). As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the notice type determination table 222d is composed of a false notice determination table 222d1 and a genuine notice determination table 222d2.

Refer to the Gase notice judgment table 222d1 when the winning information notified by the winning information command is not the lottery result corresponding to the fall (transition to the "preparation mode") (when the lottery result corresponds to the non-falling). It is a data table to be used, and is referred to for determining whether or not to execute the display effect (notice effect) of Gase, which suggests the transition to the "preparation mode", and the type of effect when executing the display effect of Gase. Will be done.

The genuine notice judgment table 222d2 is a data table that is referred to when the winning information notified by the winning information command is a lottery result corresponding to a fall (transition to the "preparation mode"), and is entered into the "preparation mode". It is referred to for determining the effect type (notice type) of the display effect (notice effect) that notifies the transition.

First, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the details of the above-mentioned Gase notice determination table 222d1 will be described. FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the Gase notice determination table 222d1. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the Gase notice determination table 222d1, the effect type (notice type) of the display effect (notice effect) to be executed is defined in association with each value of the advance notice type lottery counter 223n. ..

Specifically, "no notice" is associated with the range in which the value of the notice type lottery counter 223n is "0 to 94". That is, in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state), when the lottery result corresponds to the non-fall and the value of the notice type lottery counter 223n is "0 to 94", the display effect of the ghost (notice). Directing) is not set ("No notice" is set).

Further, the value "95" of the notice type lottery counter 223n is associated with "Gaselong notice" as the effect type (notice type). When this "Gaselong notice" is selected, a display effect (continuous notice effect) suggesting a fall (transition to the "preparation mode") is executed over all the reserved balls held at the start of the fluctuation. .. That is, the reserved ball corresponding to the start winning prize that triggers the execution of the advance notice effect is stored regardless of which area of the special figure 1 reserved 1st to 4th areas in the RAM 203 is stored. Regardless of the area where the ball is held, it is set so that the continuous advance notice effect is performed with the variable effect corresponding to all the reserved balls. In this "Gaselong notice", the character 801 is defeated by the monster 802 (see Fig. 85 (a)), so the lottery result of the fall lottery for the player was non-fall (the production is Gase). It can be easily recognized.

The value "96 to 99" of the notice type lottery counter 223n is associated with "Gase short notice" as the effect type (notice type). When this "Gase short notice" is selected, a notice effect (see FIG. 85 (a)) in which the character 801 is defeated by the monster 802 is executed in the variable period of one variation effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the notice effect of the ghost (the notice effect of the ghost preparation mode) is executed in a part of the case where the lottery result corresponding to the non-fall is obtained. As a result, the player can be made to confirm the advance notice effect in the expectation that the fall notification will be performed as a result of the effect. In addition, the set Gase preparation mode notice effect includes a Gase long notice in which a notice effect is set for all reserved balls, and a Gase short notice in which the notice effect is executed only by the latest one variable effect. Has been done. By providing variations in the Gase production, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (c), the genuine notice determination table 222d2, which is one of the data tables defined in the notice type determination table 222d, will be described. FIG. 75 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the genuine notice determination table 222d2. Similar to the Gase notice judgment table 222d1, the real notice judgment table 222d2 defines the effect type (notice type) of the display effect (notice effect) to be executed for each value of the notice type lottery counter 223n. (See FIG. 75 (c)).

Specifically, a "long notice" is associated with the range in which the value of the notice type lottery counter 223n is "0 to 89". Similar to the above-mentioned "Gaselong notice", this "long notice" is a display effect (continuous notice) that suggests a fall (transition to the "preparation mode") over all the reserved balls held at the start of the fluctuation. It is a notice production in which the production) is executed. That is, regardless of which area of the special figure 1 reserved first area to fourth area in the RAM 203, which is the result of the lottery corresponding to the fall, is stored, all the reserved balls are stored. It is set so that a continuous notice effect is performed with a variable effect corresponding to the reserved ball of. In this "long notice", the effect that the character 801 wins the monster 802 is executed, so that the player can easily recognize that the lottery result of the fall lottery was a fall (shifted to the "preparation mode"). be able to.

Here, regardless of the holding area where the holding ball that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is held, it is possible to set the advance notice effect for all the holding balls. This is because the operations of the electric accessory 640a, the first specific winning opening 65a, and the second specific winning opening 650a do not change at all before and after the transition). On the other hand, for example, in the case of a big hit, if the continuous notice effect is set for all the reserved balls, the big hit may be started in the middle of the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect may be started. There is a risk that the player will grasp the result of the production without confirming to the end. Therefore, it may not be possible to fully enjoy the continuous advance notice production.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 that shifts to a state advantageous for the player when the short-time period of the normal symbol ends, as in the first embodiment, the holding ball corresponding to the short-term end of the normal symbol In the case of being held, the same problem as described above occurs even when the continuous notice effect over all the reserved balls is executed regardless of the end timing of the normal symbol for a short period of time. That is, since the operation control of the electric accessory 640a is changed before and after the end of the normal symbol for a short period of time, the player can grasp the result of the continuous advance notice effect only by observing the operation of the electric accessory 640a. That is, it may not be possible to fully enjoy the continuous advance notice production.

In addition, in the first embodiment, if a big hit is obtained by lottery of the special symbol 1 after a lapse of a short period of time, there is a high possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. For this reason, the longer the timing of notifying the player that the normal symbol has shifted to the normal state, which is advantageous to the player, the longer the period during which the player continues to launch the ball into the first entry port 64, and thus the special symbol There is a high possibility that a lottery of 1 will result in a big hit. Therefore, it may be disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the player falls (shifts) from the "normal mode" to the "preparation mode", the probability that the special symbol will be a big hit (1/30 → 1) will change before and after the transition of the state. / 37.5) only. That is, it is not possible to determine whether the electric accessory 640a is in the "normal mode" or the "preparation mode" from the appearance of the operation. In addition, in the present embodiment, a game method of launching a ball aiming at the first entry port 64 is assumed in both the "normal mode" and the "preparation mode". Therefore, even if the timing of notifying the shift to the "preparation mode" (fall) is delayed, the player does not suffer any disadvantage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a continuous advance notice effect is set for all the reserved balls regardless of the reserved area in which the reserved balls that are the lottery results corresponding to the transition (fall) to the "preparation mode" are stored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a continuous advance notice effect over more variable effects. As a result, the degree of freedom of the continuous advance notice production can be improved, so that it is difficult to predict the result of the production, and it is possible to realize a more interesting display production.

A "short notice" is associated with the value "90 to 99" of the notice type lottery counter 223n as an effect type (notice type). When this "short notice" is selected, after the effect type is selected, the notice effect in which the character 801 wins the monster 802 in the variable period of the first variable effect executed is executed.

Here, regardless of the holding area where the holding ball, which is the lottery result corresponding to the fall, is held, the fall can be notified by the variable effect that is executed first after the execution of the advance notice effect is decided. This is because the operations of the electric accessory 640a, the first specific winning opening 65a, and the second specific winning opening 650a do not change at all before and after the fall (transition to the "preparation mode"). That is, since it is not possible to determine whether the electric accessory 640a is in the "normal mode" or the "preparation mode" from the appearance of the operation, the timing of notifying the fall and the timing of the actual fall are different. Even so, the player cannot recognize it.

By executing a notice effect that notifies the fall in the variable effect that is executed first after the "short notice" is decided, the player can be made to shift to the "preparation mode" that is advantageous to the player sooner. I can inform you. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the period of the "preparation mode" is longer than the original period, and thus it is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game.

In the present embodiment, when the notice effect is selected from the Gase notice determination table 222d1, the probability of selecting the "Gase short notice" is higher than that of the "Gase long notice" (FIG. 75 (b). )reference). That is, while only one of "95" is specified as the judgment value (value of the notice type lottery counter 223n) that becomes the "Gaselong notice", the judgment value that becomes the "Gase short notice" (notice type lottery counter). Since four "96 to 99" are specified as the value of 223n), the "Gase short notice" is configured to be four times easier to be selected than the "Gase long notice".

On the other hand, when the notice effect is selected from the genuine notice determination table 222d2, the probability of selecting the "long notice" is higher than that of the "short notice" (see FIG. 75 (c)). That is, while 90 judgment values of "0 to 89" are specified as judgment values (values of the notice type lottery counter 223n) that become "long notice", judgment values that become "short notice" (notice type lottery counter). Since 10 of "90 to 99" are specified as the value of 223n), the "long notice" is configured to be 9 times more likely to be selected than the "short notice".

In this way, by reversing the selection ratio of the effect between the notice effect of Gase and the advance notice effect of notifying the fall, it is expected that the player will fall from the type of effect (shift to "preparation mode"). The degree can be predicted. Specifically, when a notice effect (“short notice” or “gase short notice”) that ends with one variable effect is executed, the degree of expectation of a fall (the degree of expectation to shift to the “preparation mode”) is increased. You can make it feel low. This is because, while it is easy to select "Gase short notice" when the notice effect of Gase is executed, it is difficult to select "Short notice" when the lottery result corresponds to the fall. In addition, when a notice effect (“long notice” or “gase long notice”) that is executed over a plurality of variable effects is executed, the expectation of falling (expectation to shift to the “preparation mode”) is high. You can feel it. This is because it is difficult to select "Gaselong notice" when the notice effect of Gase is executed, but it is easy to select "Long notice" when the lottery result corresponds to the fall. Since the player's expectation can be changed according to the type of advance notice production, it is possible to perform a more tasteful production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76A, the values that can be set for the advance notice start flag 223p and the advance notice types of the advance notice effects corresponding to the respective values will be described. As shown in FIG. 76A, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that six kinds of values of "00H" to "05H" are set for the notice start flag 223p.

If the value of the notice start flag 223p is "00H", it means that "no setting", that is, the notice effect is not set. Further, if it is "01H", it indicates that "long notice" is selected as the notice effect. When the start timing of the next variable effect is reached in this state, a notice effect is set for all the reserved balls, and the character 801 wins the monster 802. That is, an effect of notifying (suggesting) that the mode has shifted to the "preparation mode" (falling) is displayed.

If the value of the notice start flag 223p is "02H", it indicates that "short notice" has been selected as the notice effect. When the start timing of the next variation effect is reached in this state, a notice effect is set in which the character 801 wins the monster 802 in the variation effect. Further, if it is "03H", it means that "special notice effect A" is set as the advance notice effect. The details will be described later, but in this "special notice effect A", the reserved balls corresponding to the fall and the reserved balls corresponding to the jackpot are arranged in this order (that is, first). It is a notice effect that is executed when the ball is on hold (in the order in which the fluctuation corresponding to the fall is performed and then the fluctuation corresponding to the jackpot is performed).

As described above, when a big hit occurs after shifting to the "preparation mode" (falling), the mode shifts to the "ream villa mode" which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, if the reserved ball that is the result of the lottery corresponding to the fall and the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot are reserved, all the reserved balls that are reserved are digested (all the reserved fluctuations are executed). By then, it will shift to the "ream villa mode" which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in this case, by executing the special effect "special notice effect A", it is configured so that it is more impressive that the state has shifted to an advantageous state. This makes it possible to amplify the joy of the player's transition to the "renso mode".

If the value of the notice start flag 223p is "04H", it indicates that "Gaselong notice" has been selected as the notice effect. In this state, when the start timing of the next variable effect is reached, a notice effect is set for all the reserved balls, and the character 801 is defeated by the monster 802. That is, an effect of notifying (suggesting) that the mode has not shifted to the "preparation mode" is displayed.

If the value of the notice start flag 223p is "05H", it indicates that "Gase short notice" has been selected as the notice effect. When the start timing of the next variation effect is reached in this state, a notice effect is set in which the character 801 is defeated by the monster 802.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the type of the advance notice effect to be set at the next fluctuation start timing can be easily determined according to the value of the advance notice start flag 223p. Further, in the present embodiment, every time the winning information command is notified from the main control device 110, all of the notified winning information is memorized, and based on the memorized winning information, whether or not the advance notice effect can be executed at the start of fluctuation is determined. Instead of making a judgment, each time a winning information command is received, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect can be executed, and the determination result is set as the value of the advance notice start flag 223p. That is, since it is only necessary to store only the value of the notice start flag 223p until the start of fluctuation, the storage capacity is reduced as compared with the case where all the winning information is stored one by one on the voice lamp control device 113 side. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76 (b), a value that can be set for the notice type flag 223q and a notice type of the notice effect corresponding to each value will be described. As described above, the advance notice type flag 223q is a flag used to identify the effect type (notice type) of the advance notice effect being executed. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the present embodiment, 15 kinds of values of "00H" to "0EH" may be set for the notice type flag 223q.

If the value of the notice start flag 223p is "00H", it means "no notice", that is, the notice effect is not being executed. Further, if it is "01H" to "04H", it indicates that the preparation mode advance notice effect for notifying the fall (transition to the "preparation mode") is being executed.

More specifically, "01H" indicates that the character 801 is executing the effect of winning the monster 802 in one variable effect. The value of the notice type flag 223q is set to "01H" when the value of the notice start flag 223p is "02H" corresponding to the short notice at the start of the fluctuation, or when the value of the notice start flag 223p is set at the start of the fluctuation. This is the case where the value is "01H" corresponding to the long notice and the number of reserved balls is only one.

Further, "02H" indicates that the effect in which the character 801 wins the monster 802 is being executed in the advance notice effect over the two variable effects. "02H" is set in the value of the notice type flag 223q when the value of the notice start flag 223p is "01H" corresponding to the long notice at the start of fluctuation and there are two reserved balls. Similarly, "03H" indicates that the character 801 is executing the effect of winning the monster 802 in the advance notice effect over the three variable effects, and when three reserved balls are held at the start of the long notice. Is set to. Further, "04H" indicates that the character 801 is executing the effect of winning the monster 802 in the advance notice effect over the four variable effects, and when four reserved balls are held at the start of the long notice. Is set to.

If the value of the notice type flag 223q is "05H" to "08H", it indicates that the Gase preparation mode notice effect, which is the display effect of Gase, is being executed. More specifically, "05H" indicates that the character 801 is in the process of being defeated by the monster 802 in one variable effect. The value of the notice type flag 223q is set to "05H" when the value of the notice start flag 223p is "05H" corresponding to the Gase short notice at the start of the fluctuation, or the value of the notice start flag 223p at the start of the fluctuation. Is "04H" corresponding to the Gaselong notice, and there is only one reserved ball.

Further, "06H" indicates that the effect that the character 801 is defeated by the monster 802 is being executed in the advance notice effect over the two variable effects. The value of the notice type flag 223q is set to "06H" when the value of the notice start flag 223p at the start of fluctuation is "04H" corresponding to the Gaselong notice and there are two reserved balls. Similarly, "07H" indicates that the character 801 is in the process of being defeated by the monster 802 in the notice effect over the three variable effects, and when three reserved balls are held at the start of the Gaselong notice. Is set to. In addition, "08H" indicates that the character 801 is in the process of being defeated by the monster 802 in the advance notice effect over the four variable effects, and when four reserved balls are held at the start of the Gaselong notice. Is set to.

Further, "09H" indicates that the reversal effect is being executed. Here, the reversal effect is an effect in which the character 801 is once defeated by the monster 802, and in the next variable effect, the character 801 is revived to win the monster 802 (see FIG. 85 (b)). Although the details will be described later, this reversal effect is an effect that is executed when the Gase preparation mode notice effect is once set and the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is held during the Gase effect. By providing the reverse effect, even if the effect that the character 801 is defeated is displayed, the game can be continued in the expectation that the reverse effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

When the value of the advance notice type flag 223q is "0AH" to "0DH", it indicates that the special advance notice effect A, which is executed in a special mode different from the normal preparation mode advance notice effect, is being executed. In this special notice effect A, as described above, the reserved ball that is the result of the lottery corresponding to the fall (transition to the "preparation mode") in the reserved ball and the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot are arranged in this order (that is,). , It is a notice effect that is executed when the ball is put on hold (in the order in which the change corresponding to the fall is made first and then the change corresponding to the jackpot is made).

Among the set values corresponding to the above-mentioned "special notice effect A", "0AH" indicates that the special notification effect A is set for one fluctuation and the special notification effect A is being executed. "0AH" is set in the value of the advance notice type flag 223q because the value of the advance notice start flag 223p corresponds to the special notification effect A at the start of fluctuation, and there is only one reserved ball. If this is the case. Here, in the present embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, it is first determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to the fall, and then the probability according to the determination result. It is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not it will be a big hit of a special symbol (see FIG. 88). Therefore, in one lottery, the lottery result (1/60) corresponding to the fall may be obtained, and the jackpot probability after the fall (1 / 37.5) may be the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, after the end of the variable effect, the player is in the "continuous villa mode" (continuous villa state), which is very advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the mode shifts from the "normal mode" to the "renso mode" at once (with one change), the special notice effect A is set to shift to the "renso mode". The player's joy for what he has done can be increased. In addition, by confirming the special effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

“0BH” indicates that the special notice effect A over the two variable effects is being executed. "0BH" is set in the value of the notice type flag 223q when the value of the notice start flag 223p at the start of fluctuation is "03H" corresponding to the special notice effect A and there are two reserved balls. be. Similarly, "0CH" indicates that the special notification effect over three variable effects is being executed, and is set when three reserved balls are held at the start of the special notice effect A. Further, "0DH" indicates that the special notification effect A is being executed in the advance notice effect over the four variable effect effects, and is set when four reserved balls are held at the start of the special notice effect A. NS.

If the value of the advance notice type flag 223q is "0EH", it indicates that the special advance notice effect B is being executed. This special notice effect B will be described in detail later, but is a special form of effect that is executed only when the start prize detected during the execution of the preparation mode notice effect described above is the prize information corresponding to the jackpot. Yes, it is a production that suggests to the player that the player has shifted to the "renso mode". The above-mentioned special notification effect A is actually prepared after the execution of the preparation mode advance notice effect (long notice or short notice) is decided (that is, after the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is reserved). It was an effect set when a new prize corresponding to a big hit was detected (that is, the transition to the "renso mode") before the mode notice effect was set. On the other hand, the special advance notice effect B is different in that it is executed when a new prize corresponding to the jackpot is detected while the preparation mode advance notice effect has already been executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the type of the advance notice effect being executed can be easily grasped by the value of the notice type flag 223q. Further, since the advance notice type flag 223q includes information indicating how many times the variation effect is set, the continuous advance notice counter is executed every time each variation effect in which the advance notice effect is set is executed. By updating the value of 223i, the progress of the advance notice effect can be easily grasped. Therefore, it is possible to set the effect of the display mode according to the progress of the advance notice effect each time at the fluctuation start timing during the execution of the advance notice effect. Specifically, for example, even though the preparation mode advance notice effect over three variable effects is set, the character 801 selects the effect to win the monster 802 in the second variable effect. The set number of variable effects is left over once, or conversely, in the third variable effect, the character 801 and the monster 802 are set to produce an aspect in the middle of the battle, and the effect is set three times. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the result of the advance notice effect from being lost even after the variable effect of is completed.

In the present embodiment, the type of the advance notice effect is set by using two types of flags, the advance notice start flag 223p and the advance notice type flag 223q, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time the winning information command is notified from the main control device 110, the winning information included in the winning information command may be stored. That is, the RAM 223 may be provided with a storage area capable of storing the same data as the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203j in the main control device 110. Then, each winning information stored at the start of the fluctuation is confirmed (determined), and whether or not to execute the advance notice effect according to whether or not the information corresponding to the fall is included in the winning information, and the advance notice. It may be configured to set the advance notice type of the advance notice effect when executing the effect. Further, in the storage area, information indicating the type of the advance notice effect and information indicating the number of winning information corresponding to the change effect of the change effect for which the advance notice effect is set are stored in each winning prize. It may be configured so that it can be set in association with information. As a result, when the winning information command is received, it is only necessary to store the winning information notified by the winning information command, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 when the winning information command is received can be reduced. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 85, details of the advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. The advance notice effect of the present embodiment follows the mode of the advance notice effect of the first embodiment. Specifically, the character 801 battles with the monster 802 that protects the entrance of the cave 803. (See FIG. 24 (b)). Further, when the character 801 wins the monster 802, it is set to the cave stage (rear surface H) indicating the "preparation mode" (the character 801 advances to the cave 803).

First, FIG. 77A is a time chart showing an example of the correspondence between the variable effect to be executed and the advance notice effect to be set when the long advance notice is selected as the advance notice type of the advance notice effect.

In FIG. 77 (a), while the lottery result of the special symbol is out of alignment and the variable effect is being executed, the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is detected once, and then the winning information corresponding to the omission is detected. It is a figure exemplifying the case where it is detected twice. As described above, when the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall (shift to the "preparation mode") is notified, the real notice determination table 222d2 is referred to and the notice type of the notice effect is selected. In the example of FIG. 77 (a), a long notice is selected as the notice type, and “01H” indicating a long notice is set for the notice start flag 223p.

As shown in FIG. 77 (a), when the long notice is selected, the character 801 finally wins the monster 802 over the fluctuation time of the three reserved balls held at the start of the next fluctuation. A battle effect (preparation mode notice effect) is executed. That is, among the variable effects in which the advance notice effect is actually executed, the first variable effect (variable effect corresponding to hold 1) has already shifted to the "preparation mode", but in the advance notice effect, the "preparation mode" (Character 801 wins) is the third variation effect (variation effect corresponding to hold 3).

Regardless of the holding area where the holding ball that is the result of the lottery corresponding to the fall is held, it is possible to set the advance notice effect over the three holding balls of the fall (transition to "preparation mode"). This is because the operations of the electric accessory 640a, the first specific winning opening 65a, and the second specific winning opening 650a do not change at all before and after. On the other hand, for example, in the case of a big hit, if the continuous notice effect is set for all the reserved balls, the big hit may be started in the middle of the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect may be started. There is a risk that the player will grasp the result of the production without confirming to the end. Therefore, it may not be possible to fully enjoy the continuous advance notice production.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 that shifts to a state advantageous for the player when the short-time period of the normal symbol ends, as in the first embodiment, the holding ball corresponding to the short-term end of the normal symbol In the case of being held, the same problem as described above occurs even when the continuous notice effect over all the reserved balls is executed regardless of the end timing of the normal symbol for a short period of time. That is, since the operation control of the electric accessory 640a is changed before and after the end of the normal symbol for a short period of time, the player can grasp the result of the continuous advance notice effect only by observing the operation of the electric accessory 640a. That is, it may not be possible to fully enjoy the continuous advance notice production.

In addition, in the first embodiment, if a big hit is obtained by lottery of the special symbol 1 after a lapse of a short period of time, there is a high possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. For this reason, the longer the timing of notifying the player that the normal symbol has shifted to the normal state, which is advantageous to the player, the longer the period during which the player continues to launch the ball into the first entry port 64, and thus the special symbol There is a high possibility that a lottery of 1 will result in a big hit. Therefore, it may be disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the player falls (shifts) from the "normal mode" to the "preparation mode", the probability that the special symbol will be a big hit (1/30 → 1) will change before and after the transition of the state. / 37.5) only. That is, it is not possible to determine whether the electric accessory 640a is in the "normal mode" or the "preparation mode" from the appearance of the operation. In addition, in the present embodiment, a game method of launching a ball aiming at the first entry port 64 is assumed in both the "normal mode" and the "preparation mode". Therefore, even if the timing of notifying the shift to the "preparation mode" (fall) is delayed, the player does not suffer any disadvantage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a continuous advance notice effect is set for all the reserved balls regardless of the reserved area in which the reserved balls that are the lottery results corresponding to the transition (fall) to the "preparation mode" are stored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a continuous advance notice effect over more variable effects. As a result, the degree of freedom of the continuous advance notice production can be improved, so that it is difficult to predict the result of the production, and it is possible to realize a more interesting display production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77 (b), an example will be described in which the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall (transition to the “preparation mode”) is notified and the short notice is selected as the notice type. do.

FIG. 77 (b) shows the lottery result corresponding to the fall after detecting the winning information corresponding to the loss three times while the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the variable effect in the “normal mode”. It is a figure exemplifying the case where the winning information is detected once. As shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is notified and the short notice is selected, the first of the reserved balls held at the start of the next fluctuation is executed. In the variable effect to be performed, a battle effect (preparation mode notice effect) in which the character 801 finally wins the monster 802 is executed. That is, among the variable effects in which the advance notice effect is actually executed, the first variable effect (variable effect corresponding to hold 1) remains in the "normal mode", and then three variable effects are executed. If this is not done, it is notified that the mode has been changed to the "preparation mode" in the first variation effect (variation effect corresponding to hold 1) even though the mode is not changed to the "preparation mode". This means that even if the notification timing is advanced, the winning information (various counter values acquired at the time of starting winning) that is held before and after the notification does not change, and the variable effect corresponding to all holdings is produced. This is because the mode always shifts to the "preparation mode" by the end. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the "normal mode" and the "preparation mode" are configured so as to be impossible (difficult) to be distinguished from the operation of the electric accessory 640a or the like. This is because even if the timing of shifting to the "mode" and the timing of notifying the "preparation mode" are different, the player cannot recognize the difference. In this way, by advancing the timing of notifying the transition to the "preparation mode" (the effect that the character 801 wins is executed), the transition to the "preparation mode" which is advantageous to the player can be performed earlier. You can inform the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the period of the "preparation mode" is longer than the original period, and thus it is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game.

Next, the reversal effect will be described with reference to FIG. 78. As described above, the reversal effect is an effect in which the character 801 is defeated by the monster 802 once, and in the next variable effect, the character 801 is revived to win the monster 802 (see FIG. 85 (b)). .. This reversal effect is an effect that is executed when the Gase preparation mode notice effect is once set and the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is held during the Gase effect. FIG. 78 shows a case where the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is notified during the execution of the Gase preparation mode notice effect (the effect that the character 801 is finally defeated by the monster 802) over two fluctuations. It is an illustrated figure.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the "normal mode", when the winning information corresponding to the deviation is notified twice during the execution of the variation effect corresponding to the deviation, and the Gaselong notice is selected in one of the winning information, the next Preparation for the character 801 to finally be defeated by the monster 802 over all the reserved balls (hold 1, hold 2) held at the start of the fluctuation effect (variation corresponding to hold 1) executed in A mode notice effect (see FIG. 85 (a)) is set.

If the winning information that will be the lottery result corresponding to the fall (transition to the "preparation mode") is notified during the execution of the Gase preparation mode notice production, it corresponds to the hold 2 in FIG. 78 after the battle production is completed. After the end of the variable effect to be performed), in the first variable effect to be executed, the reverse effect in which the character 801 is revived and wins the monster 802 is executed. As a result, the player can be made aware that the mode has shifted to the "preparation mode", which is relatively advantageous for the player. By providing the reverse effect, even if the effect that the character 801 is defeated is displayed, the game can be continued in the expectation that the reverse effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Note that FIG. 78 illustrates a case where only the winning information that is the result of the lottery corresponding to the fall is notified during the Gase preparation mode notice production, but a plurality of winning information is notified during the Gase preparation mode notice production. Even if one of the winning information is the winning information that is the result of the lottery corresponding to the fall, the reversal effect is similarly executed in the variable effect that is first executed after the Gase preparation mode notice effect is completed. .. That is, the timing at which the reverse effect is executed does not always coincide with the timing at which the variable effect that is the lottery result corresponding to the actual fall is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the "normal mode" and the "preparation mode" are configured so as to be impossible (difficult) to be distinguished from the operation of the electric accessory 640a or the like, so that the "preparation mode" is used. This is because even if the timing of shifting to is different from the timing of notifying the "preparation mode", the player cannot recognize the difference. Therefore, by executing a series of effects until the character 801 is revived and wins the monster 802 with one variable effect, it is possible to display a sharp effect.

That is, in the present embodiment, the reversal effect (the effect that the character 801 once defeated by the monster 802 is revived) is executed when the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is notified, and the monster is always executed. The effect of winning 802 is displayed. Nevertheless, if the production from the resurrection of the character 801 to the victory over the monster 802 is executed over multiple variable productions, the production can be shown for a long time even though the result is known. Therefore, there is a risk that the player will get tired of checking the production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reversal effect is completed by the variable effect that is executed first after the end of the Gase preparation mode notice effect, regardless of the acquisition timing of the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall. is doing. As a result, it is possible to perform a sharp production that the player does not get tired of.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned special notice effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (a). As described above, in this special notice effect A, during the fluctuation, the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall and the winning information corresponding to the jackpot are arranged in this order (that is, the fluctuation corresponding to the fall occurs first). It is a special mode of advance notice that is executed when notified (in the order in which the fluctuations corresponding to the jackpot are made).

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the "normal mode", the winning information (hold 1) that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall and the winning information corresponding to the jackpot (holding 1) during the execution of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fall. When the hold 2) is notified, the special notice effect A is set over all the reserved balls at the start of the next variable effect. When this special notice effect A is set, the character 801 battles with the monster 802 that protects the entrance of the temple, and finally the character 801 wins the monster 802 and proceeds to the temple ( (See FIG. 83). This temple suggests a "renso mode". After that, the rear image (rear I) showing the inside of the temple is set as the rear image until the "renso mode" is completed. In this embodiment, when the mode shifts to the "renso mode", the effect of searching for treasure in the temple is executed (see FIG. 81). Therefore, the image of the temple is displayed in the notice effect, so that the "preparation mode" is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that not only the transition to the "renso mode" but also the transition to the "renso mode" has been made. Therefore, by executing the special notice effect A, the player can be given great joy and satisfaction.

Next, the special notice effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (b). This special notice effect B is a special aspect that is executed only when the start prize detected during the execution of the preparation mode notice effect (the effect in which the character 801 wins the monster 802) is the prize information corresponding to the jackpot. It is a production that suggests to the player that the player has shifted to the "renso mode".

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is notified (when the jackpot is suspended) during the preparation mode advance notice effect in which the character 801 wins the monster 802, the effect is rewritten. Is done. That is, the pre-determined preparation mode advance notice effect is not executed to the end, and the effect is replaced with a different content from the middle of the advance notice effect.

Specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 79 (b), when the variation effect that was being executed at the time when the prize information corresponding to the jackpot was notified, the preparation mode notification effect (character 801 and monster 802) was completed. The production of the battle) will be discontinued. Then, at the start timing of the next variable effect, the special notice effect B that extends to the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is set to start. When the start of this special notice effect B is set, a display effect (notice effect) in which the temple 811 appears is executed (see FIG. 85). That is, an effect that is not closely related to the battle effect by the character 801 and the monster 802 that have been displayed up to that point is suddenly executed. As a result, it is possible to give a great impact to the player, so that the player can be more surely recognized that the mode has been changed to the "renso mode".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85, a specific example of the rear image actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a specific example of the display image during the advance notice effect will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 80A, the rear surface H (cave stage), which is the rear surface type set in the “preparation mode”, will be described. As shown in FIG. 80A, when the back surface H is set, a back image in which the character 801 searches in the cave is displayed as in the back surface D in the first embodiment. Further, in the display area 806 provided at the lower part of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "cave search mode" are displayed. By displaying the back surface (rear surface H) corresponding to the cave stage, it is possible to inform the player that the player is in the "preparation mode" in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, in spite of the "preparation mode" which is more advantageous than the "normal mode", it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing it and causing a disadvantage to the player.

Further, FIG. 80B is a diagram showing an example of a display effect when a big hit occurs in a state where the rear surface H (cave stage) is set (that is, “preparation mode”). As shown in FIG. 80 (b), when the variation effect corresponding to the jackpot is executed with the back surface H set, the variation effect in which three different main symbols different from each other are stopped is executed in the small area Ds2. At the same time, the character 801 discovers the entrance to the temple. Further, a display area 807 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape and having the characters "Temple found !!" is displayed in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be easily recognized to move to the temple stage (that is, to move to the "renso mode").

In spite of the big hit, the reason why the same main symbols are not aligned is that even if the special symbol 1 makes a big hit in the "preparation mode", the prize ball can hardly be obtained. Nevertheless, if a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, there is a risk that the player will be disappointed by not being able to obtain the prize ball. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is made in the "preparation mode", the player is configured to execute a variable effect in which the same main symbols are not aligned (stops at so-called breaks). It prevents (suppresses) excessive expectations. The production for notifying the jackpot in the "preparation mode" is not limited to the production for discovering the entrance of the temple. Any mode can be determined as long as it suggests that the player will be in an advantageous state (that is, "ream villa mode").

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the rear surface I (temple stage), which is the rear surface type set in the “renso mode”, will be described. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), when the back surface I is set, a back image in which the character 801 searches inside the temple is displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, a display area 818 in which the characters "60 times" are written is displayed on the right side of the front view with respect to the character 801. The character "60 times" indicates the remaining time saving period (the remaining period of the "renso mode"). By displaying the remaining time saving period on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible for the player to accurately grasp the number of fluctuations until the end of the "renso mode". In other words, compared to the case where the number of times is hidden, it is possible to easily recognize when the "renso mode" ends, so that the player feels dissatisfied when the "renso mode" ends. Can be reduced.

In the display area 806 provided at the lower part of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "temple search mode" are displayed. In addition, the characters "right-handed" are displayed on the left and right of the character. Here, as described above, in the "renso mode", by launching the ball toward the right side of the game board 13 (execution of right-handed strike), the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. Further, in the "renso mode", if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, and a big hit in which the "renso mode" is given again after the big hit is given. That is, any of a normal jackpot D, a probability variation jackpot G, and a probability variation jackpot H is given (see FIG. 68 (b)). On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained by a lottery of special symbol 1 in the "renso mode", a big hit that hardly wins a prize ball is given. That is, any of a normal jackpot C, a probability variation jackpot E, and a probability variation jackpot F is given (see FIG. 68 (a)). Therefore, in the "renso mode", in order to draw a lottery for the special symbol 2 that tends to be an advantageous jackpot, the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the display area 806, and the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. Is urging the player to launch. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from being accidentally launched at the first entrance 64 in the "renso mode", so that the "renso mode" can be further enjoyed.

FIG. 81B is a diagram showing an example of a display effect when a big hit is obtained by a lottery of the special symbol 2 in a state where the back surface I is set (that is, “ream villa mode”). As shown in FIG. 81 (b), when the variation effect corresponding to the jackpot is executed with the back surface I set, the variation effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is executed in the small area Ds2, and the character A production is performed in which 801 discovers the treasure chest 807. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol has become a big hit. In this example, a big hit is shown in a situation where the remaining time saving period remains 30 times. Therefore, the remaining time saving period is displayed in the display area 818 displayed on the right side of the front view with respect to the character 801. The characters "30 times" indicating the period are displayed.

Here, the effect in the case of performing the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is not limited to the effect of discovering the treasure chest 807. Any mode can be determined as long as it suggests that the player will be in an advantageous state (a state in which a prize ball can be obtained). Also, it is not necessary to perform the same effect for all jackpot types. For example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot H with a large number of rounds (8 rounds), the number of prize balls that can be obtained is larger than other jackpots, so a treasure box containing many treasures will be displayed. In the case of a normal jackpot D (4 rounds) with a small number of rounds or a probability variation jackpot G, a treasure box containing a relatively small amount of treasure may be displayed. This makes it possible for the player to predict the jackpot type based on the amount of treasure contained in the treasure box.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85, a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the advance notice effect in the present embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 82 (a), the preparation mode advance notice effect executed when notifying the fall will be described. When the preparation mode notice effect is executed, the character 801 and the monster 802 are displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 82 (a)). In addition, behind the monster 802, the cave 803 is displayed, and a display area 812 with the characters "Win the battle and the cave stage" is displayed above the front view of the third symbol display device 81. .. This makes it easy to understand that the character 801 advances to the cave 803 by defeating the monster 802. If you proceed to the cave and set it to the back H indicating the inside of the cave, it means that you are in the "preparation mode" which is more advantageous for the player than the "normal mode", so the result of the battle against the player Can be watched with interest. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game.

Next, an example of the display mode when the special notice effect A is executed will be described. In the special advance notice effect A, the effect in which the character 801 and the monster 802 battle is executed as in the case of the other advance notice effects (preparation mode advance notice effect and Gase preparation mode advance notice effect). This special advance notice effect A differs from the preparation mode advance notice effect (see FIG. 82 (a)) in that the temple 811 is displayed behind the monster 802 as shown in FIG. 82 (b).

As described above, the advance notice effect is basically an effect of notifying whether or not to move to the cave stage (rear surface H), that is, whether or not to enter the "preparation mode", and in other advance notice effects, behind the monster 802. Is configured to display a cave 803 (see FIG. 82 (a)). On the other hand, in the special advance notice production A, the battle between the character 801 and the monster 802 is performed because it is a production that notifies the player that the player will shift to the most advantageous "renso mode" (shift to the temple stage) at once. In, the temple 811 is displayed behind the monster 802. As a result, the player can easily understand that the character 801 can advance to the temple 811 behind the monster 802 by defeating the monster 802. By performing an effect that suggests a sudden transition from the "normal mode" to the "renso mode", it is possible to give the player a great sense of joy and satisfaction.

In the present embodiment, the special notice effect A is executed only when the mode shifts to the "renso mode", but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, Gase's (final) In the production (character 801 is defeated), the temple 811 may be displayed behind the monster 802 at a constant rate. As a result, if the character 801 wins, the mode shifts to the "renso mode" that is most advantageous for the player, but if the character 801 is defeated, the "normal mode" that is the most disadvantageous for the player remains. You can watch the notice production with a stronger hope that you will win. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the advance notice effect. Further, for example, the effect of displaying the temple 811 behind the monster 802 is configured to be selected only in a part of the case of shifting to the "renso mode" and the case of shifting to the "preparation mode". In the case of shifting to the "renso mode", the effect of winning the character 801 may be executed, and in the case of shifting to the "preparation mode", the effect of defeating the character 801 may be executed. .. That is, it may be used as an effect for determining that the state shifts to a more advantageous state than the "normal mode" when it occurs. As a result, when the production occurs, the player can be made to recognize at least the transition to the "preparation mode", so that the player who has confirmed the image of the temple 811 can feel joy and security. can. In addition, depending on the victory or defeat of the character 801 whether or not to shift to the most advantageous "renso mode" changes, so that the transition of the production can be watched more interestingly. Therefore, the notice production can be more enjoyed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84, a display mode when the special notice effect B is executed will be described. First, FIG. 83A shows an example of a display screen when the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is detected during the execution of the preparation mode advance notice effect (when the execution condition of the special advance notice effect B is satisfied). Is. In this example, as in FIG. 79B, when the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is detected during the first variation effect among the preparation mode advance notice effects executed over the two variation effects. Is assumed.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a), when the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is detected during the execution of the preparation mode advance notice effect, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 is simply added by one. It is only displayed (1 piece → 2 pieces in the example of FIG. 83), and at the stage when the winning information is detected, a notice effect that is no different from other advance notice effects is displayed. That is, the scene where the battle between the character 801 and the monster 802 is started is displayed (see FIG. 83 (a)).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 (b) and 84, a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the special notice effect B is executed will be described. As described above, the special notice effect B is an effect for notifying the transition to the "ream villa mode", and is a special display different from the preparation mode advance notice effect for notifying the transition to the "preparation mode". The notice effect of the mode is executed.

First, FIG. 83B is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the variation effect in which the special notification effect B is set. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the execution of the special notice effect B is determined in the variation effect in which the preparation mode advance notice effect is set and the next variation effect is started, the holding ball displayed in the small area Ds1 is displayed. The number is subtracted by 1 and displayed (2 → 1), the variation effect is started in the small area Ds2, and the effect of blacking out the third symbol display device 81 is executed (see FIG. 83 (b)). ). Since the screen is blacked out without displaying the result of the advance notice effect that has been executed, it is possible to give a great impact to the player. That is, it is possible to easily make the player understand that a special effect that is clearly different from the normal advance notice effect has been started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a display mode of the display effect displayed during the execution of the special notice effect B will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, after the special notice effect B is started and the third symbol display device 81 is blacked out (see FIG. 83 (b)), the temple 811 appears in the darkness (blacked out screen). The production is performed. In addition, with the appearance of the temple 811, the character "God" 812 is displayed on the upper left of the front view of the image of the temple 811, and the character "Den" is displayed on the upper right of the front view of the image of the temple 811. 813 is displayed. Further, the character "fall" 814 is displayed at the lower left of the front view with respect to the image of the temple 811, and the character "Rin" 815 is displayed at the lower right of the front view with respect to the image of the temple 811. That is, the characters "temple advent" are displayed so as to surround the image of the temple 811. This makes it easy for the player to understand the transition to the temple stage. In addition, by performing an effect in which the temple 811 emerges in the darkness, the impact on the player can be further increased. Furthermore, by notifying the transition to the most advantageous "renso mode" by a special mode of production different from other productions, the player who plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 in which the special notice production B is generated is notified. , Can give a sense of superiority to other players.

The special notification effect B is not limited to this mode, and may be a mode in which the player can be notified that the player has shifted to the "renso mode", that is, the state has suddenly changed to the most advantageous state. If so, it can be determined arbitrarily. For example, instead of the blackout effect, the temple 811 may suddenly fall from the sky during the battle between the character 801 and the monster 802, and the effect that the monster 802 is crushed by the temple 811 may be displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the monster 802 is incapacitated and that the character 801 can proceed inside the temple 811, which is the most advantageous temple stage (ie, "ream villa"). It is possible to give great joy and satisfaction to the player who recognizes the transition to "mode").

Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is detected during the preparation mode advance notice effect, the special advance notice effect B is always executed, but the special advance notice effect B is executed. Whether or not to do so may be decided by lottery. That is, it may be configured so that the probability that the special notice effect B is executed is low. As a result, the rarity of the special advance notice effect B can be increased, so that the player who plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 in which the special advance notice effect B is generated has greater joy and satisfaction, and other players. It gives a sense of superiority and a sense of accomplishment for being able to display a rare production.

Next, the reversal effect will be described with reference to FIG. 85. As described above, the reversal effect is an effect that is executed when the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is detected during the execution of the Gase preparation mode notice effect.

FIG. 85A shows a display mode of the effect displayed in the final variable effect in which the Gase preparation mode notice effect is set. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the Gase preparation mode notice effect, an effect is displayed in which the character 801 who is in battle with the monster 802 collapses. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the advance notice production this time was a mess (the game did not shift to the "preparation mode"). If it is decided to execute the reverse effect (when the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is detected during the advance notice effect of the Gase preparation mode), the following variation is shown in FIG. 85 (b). If the reverse effect is executed and the execution of the reverse effect is not decided, the advance notice effect ends as it is.

Next, the display contents in the reversal effect will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). When the Gase preparation mode notice effect is finished and it is decided to execute the reverse effect, the reverse effect shown in FIG. 85 (b) is executed in the next variable effect after the Gase preparation mode notice effect is finished. .. Since this reversal effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 is displayed one less than the end of the Gase preparation mode notice effect (in the example of FIG. 82, 2 → 1). Along with this, a new variation effect is started in the small area Ds2.

When a new fluctuation is started, the effect of being defeated by the monster 802 and the character 801 full of scratches standing up is displayed in the central part of the third symbol display device 81, and the right side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81. The characters 808 saying "I can still go !!" are displayed. With these display effects, the player can easily understand that the character 801 has been revived and developed into a reverse effect. Further, in the present embodiment, when this reversal effect is executed, the effect of winning the monster 802 is always executed. Therefore, when the effect that the character 801 is revived is displayed (see FIG. 85 (b)), " The player can be made aware of the transition to the "preparation mode". Therefore, once the character 801 is defeated, the disappointed player can be pleased. In addition, by providing the reverse effect, even if the effect that the character 801 is defeated (see FIG. 85 (a)) is displayed, the next variable effect is interestingly confirmed in the hope that it will develop into the reverse effect. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, the victory of the character 801 is confirmed when the reverse effect is developed (the reverse effect is not selected unless the mode shifts to the "preparation mode"), but the present embodiment is limited to this. It's not a thing. Even when the character 801 is finally defeated by the monster 802, the reversal effect may be selected. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode" after the development of the reversal effect until the result of the battle is displayed. be able to. Therefore, the display effect can be more enjoyed.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 92. First, FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the second embodiment, which is executed instead of the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment.

Of the timer interrupt processes, the processes S101, S102, and S104 to S109 are the same as the processes S101, S102, and S104 to S109 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment, when the processing of S102 is completed, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are added. Then, the fall lottery counter C5 is updated (S111). In the process of S111, the fall lottery counter C5 is updated, which is different from the first embodiment. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, a lottery (falling) is performed to determine whether or not the special symbol will shift to the low probability state (fall). Lottery) is being executed. The fall lottery counter C5 is used for drawing (determining) whether or not to fall in this fall lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process (S104) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86), and is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32). Similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the above, this process is for setting the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

In each of the special symbol variation processes (S104), S201 to S207 and S209 to S216, S201 to S207 and S209 to S216 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. Further, in the process of S202 of the special symbol variation process (S104) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the number of balls reserved for the special symbol 2 is held. The value (N2) of the counter 203k is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203k is larger than 0 (S222).

If it is determined in the process of S222 that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203k is 0 (S222: No), the process proceeds to the process of S203. On the other hand, in the processing of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203k is larger than 0 (S222: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203k is set. 1 is subtracted (S223), and a special figure 2 reserved ball number command for notifying the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203k after the subtraction is set (S224). The special figure 2 reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as an external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 92) described later. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203k from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223b.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S224, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203j is shifted (S225). Since the method of shifting is the same as the data shifting method of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (see S207 of FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the process of S225 is completed, the special symbol variation start process (S226) is executed, and this process is terminated. This special symbol variation start process (S226) is a process for starting a variation effect (variation display) based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and is a process for starting the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. Is executed instead of. This special symbol variation start processing (S226) will be described with reference to FIG. 88.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned special symbol change start processing (S226). In each of the special symbol variation start processes (S226), S302 to S311, the same processes as those of S302 to S311 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment are executed. Will be done. Further, in the special symbol change start processing (S226) in the second embodiment, when the processing is started, first, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S321).

Further, in the special symbol change start processing (S226) in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S302 that the probability change flag 203f is ON (S302: Yes), the value of the fall lottery counter C5 and the fall lottery table 202m A comparison is made with the determination value (random value) specified in (S322). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the fall lottery counter C5 matches any determination value (random value) defined in the fall lottery table 202m (that is, a value corresponding to the fall) (S323). ), If it is determined that the value does not correspond to the fall (S323: No), the process proceeds to S303.

On the other hand, in the process of S323, when it is determined that the value of the fall lottery counter C5 matches any of the determination values (random value) specified in the fall lottery table 202m (value corresponding to the fall) ( S323: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203f to off, the transition (fall) from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (S324). Then, a fall command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the special symbol has transitioned (falled) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (S325), and the process proceeds to S304. Transition.

By executing the special symbol change start processing (S225), a lottery for whether or not to shift (fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol and a lottery for whether or not the special symbol is a big hit can be easily executed. Can be done. In this embodiment, as the order of processing in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, a lottery (falling lottery) is first executed to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol, and then the special symbol jackpot. It was configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not it would be, but the processing order is not limited to this. The big hit lottery may be executed first, and then the fall lottery may be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. This start winning process (S105) is a process executed in place of the start winning process (S105) in the first embodiment in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86).

In each of the start winning processes (S105), S401 to S404, the same processes as those of S401 to S404 of the start winning process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment are executed. Further, in the start winning process (S105) in the second embodiment, the special figure 1 hold series command is set in the process of S421 (S421). Next, in addition to the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, each value of the fall lottery counter C5 is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S422). In the process of S422, the value of the fall lottery counter C5 is also referred to, which is different from the process of S406 of the start winning process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment.

When the processing of S422 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the ball has entered (winned) the second entrance 640 (S423). Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered (winned) in the second entry port 640 (S423: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203k is acquired (S424), and the acquisition is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203k is less than 4 (S425).

In the process of S425, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203k is less than 4 (S425: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203k is added by 1 (S426). ), A special figure 2 hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203k after addition is set (S427). Then, similarly to the processing of S422, the values (C1 to C5) of various counters are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S428), and the processing shifts to S429.

Further, in the processing of S423, whether or not the ball has been detected (winning) in the second entry port 640 (S423: No), or the ball has entered the second entry port 640 (winning). Even if there is, if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203k is not less than 4 (S425: No), each process of S426 to S428 is skipped and the process shifts to S429. In the process of S429, the look-ahead process is executed (S429), and the present process is terminated. This look-ahead process (S429) is based on various counter values acquired in the start winning process (see FIG. 89), and whether or not it is a big hit or a fall (shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol). This is a process for determining in advance whether or not the fluctuation starts before the timing of the start of fluctuation. The details of this look-ahead process (S429) will be described with reference to FIG. 90.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S429). In this look-ahead process (S429), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entry (starting prize) is detected in either the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640 (S4101). Then, when it is determined that no new ball entry (starting winning) has been detected in any of the first entry slot 64 and the second entry opening 640 (S4101: No), this process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, if it is determined that a new ball (starting prize) has been detected in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the probabilistic state of the special symbol. (S4102). That is, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead probability changing flag 203h is on. Then, in the processing of S4102, on the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4102 that the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the low probability state of the special symbol (the look-ahead probability changing flag 203h is off) (S4102), it will be described later. The processing of S4103 to S4104 is skipped, and the processing is transferred to S4106.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4102, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the probabilistic state of the special symbol (the look-ahead probabilistic change flag 203h is on) (S4102: Yes), a new ball is entered (starting prize). ) And the judgment value (random value) specified in the fall lottery table 202m (see FIG. 71 (a)), the lottery result of the fall lottery is acquired ( Pre-reading) (S4103), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery (S4104).

In the process of S4104, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the fall (S4104: Yes), the look-ahead probability change in order to execute the look-ahead as the normal state of the special symbol when executing the look-ahead for the subsequent start winning prize. The middle flag 203h is set to off (S4105), and the process shifts to S4106. In the processing of S4106, which is executed after the processing of S4105 or when it is determined in the processing of S4102 that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S4102: No), the first random number table for the low probability of the special symbol is used. Based on 202a (see FIG. 7B), it is pre-read whether or not it will be a big hit (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4108.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4104 that the lottery result does not correspond to the fall in the fall lottery (S4104: No), the special symbol is in a high probability state at the time when the fluctuation based on the start winning prize is started. Since it means that there is, the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is pre-read (S4108) based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B) for high probability, and the process is shifted to S4108. ..

In the processing of S4108 executed after the processing of S4106 or S4107, the judgment result of whether or not it is a pre-reading jackpot in the processing of S4106 or S4107, the judgment result of whether or not it is a pre-reading fall in the processing of S4103, the first hit. A winning information command including the value of the type counter C2 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is set (S4108). The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 92) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the mode of the display effect based on the winning information command.

When the processing of S4108 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the pre-reading jackpot in the processing of S4106 or S4107 is a probabilistic jackpot (S4109), and if it is a probabilistic jackpot (S4109: Yes). , The look-ahead probability changing flag 203h is set to ON (S4112), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4109, when it is determined that it is not a probabilistic jackpot (S4109: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a normal jackpot (S4111). Then, when it is determined that it is a normal jackpot (S4111: Yes), the look-ahead probability changing flag 203h is set to off (S4112), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit is not a normal jackpot (S4111: No), the process of S4112 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86), and is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment.

Of the normal symbol variation processing (S106), in each of the processes S601 to S613, S615 to S618 and S622 to S625, S601 to S613 and S615 to S618 of the ordinary symbol variation processing (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S622-S625 is executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation processing (S106) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S613 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is larger than 0 (S631). Then, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is larger than 0 (S631: Yes), the process proceeds to S615, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is not larger than 0 (that is, 0). If it is determined (S631: No), the process proceeds to S617.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 91) in the present embodiment, when any of the processes S616 to S618 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is larger than 0 (S632). If it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S632: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S633), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S632: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 30 seconds (S634), and this process is terminated.

In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the electric accessory in the case of hitting the normal symbol are determined depending on whether or not the state is the probabilistic non-time saving state (the "continuous villa state" of the first embodiment). It was configured to change the opening time and the number of times of opening of 640a. That is, in the probable variation non-time reduction state and the non-probability variation non-time reduction state, "30 seconds" is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol so that the ball does not easily enter the second entry port 640, and when the normal symbol hits. "0.2 seconds x 1 time" was set as the opening period of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, in the probabilistic non-time saving state, "3 seconds" is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol so that the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640, and "1 second" is set as the opening period when the normal symbol hits. "× 3 times" was set. Therefore, it is necessary to set the fluctuation time, the opening period, and the like according to the state of the consecutive villa flag 203i instead of the time saving / medium counter 203 g. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the time saving period of the normal symbol and the "consecutive villa mode" (consecutive villa state) coincide with each other. That is, since the period during which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640 coincides with the period during the "renso mode", the opening period of the electric accessory 640a can be set by the value of the time saving counter 203g. .. Therefore, since the consecutive villa flag 203i can be abolished, the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 92, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. In this main process, as in the first embodiment, the main process in the game is executed.

Of these main processes, the processes S1001, S1003 to S1010, and S1012-S1015 are the same as the processes S1001, S1003 to S1010, and S1012-S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the main process of the second embodiment, when the process of S1001 is completed, the first variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1021), and the process proceeds to the process of S1003.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S1022 executed after the process of S1010, when the process of S1010 is completed, the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1022), and the process proceeds to the process of S1008.

In the present embodiment, the second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation time of the normal symbol in the first embodiment is abolished. Therefore, in the main process of the present embodiment, it is not necessary to update the second variation type counter CS2. Therefore, in the process of S1021 and the process of S1022, only the first variation type counter CS1 is updated. There is.

In addition, even in the main process (see FIG. 92) in the present embodiment, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state as in the main process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the jackpot effect is executed and the variable winning device 65. The jackpot control process (S1004) for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is executed. The jackpot control process (S1004) in the second embodiment replaces the processes of S1112 and S1113 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment, and the jackpot type (FIG. 68) provided in the present embodiment. The difference is that the process of setting the number of time reductions (value of the time reduction state counter 203g) corresponding to (see (a) and (b)) is executed, but the other processes are the same as those of the first embodiment. Is. Therefore, the illustration and its detailed description will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 102. First, the state command process 2 (S1221) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. This state command process 2 (S1221) is a process executed in place of the state command process (S1211) in the first embodiment in the start-up process (see FIG. 42).

Of the state command processing 2 (S1221), the processing of S1301 is the same as the processing of S1301 of the state command processing (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. Further, in the state command process 2 (S1221) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1301 that the state notified by the state command is the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S1301: Yes), the probabilistic state flag 223k is set to on (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the state notified by the state command is not the probability change state of the special symbol (the low probability state of the special symbol) (S1301: No), the probability change state flag 223k is turned off. Set and move to the process of S1313.

In the process of S1313 executed after the process of S1311 or S1312, the number of time reductions of the normal symbol notified by the status command is specified (S1313), and the specified number of time reductions is set as the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m. (S1314), this process is terminated.

By this state command processing 2 (see FIG. 93), even if a momentary power failure occurs during the game and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the game state is accurately displayed to the voice lamp control device 113 after the power is restored. It can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that the actual game state and the game state suggested by the display effect and the like deviate from each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the hit-back back setting process 2 (S1431) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. The hit-back back setting process 2 (S1431) is a process executed in place of the hit-back back setting process (S1411) in the first embodiment in the main process.

Of the hit-back back setting process 2 (S1431), the process of S1501 is the same as the process of S1501 of the hit-back back setting process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. Further, in the rear / back setting process 2 (S1431) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1501 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the probability variation jackpot F (S1501: Yes). S1521), if it is not the probability variation jackpot F (S1521: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is larger than 0 (S1522).

When it is determined that the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is 0 in the process of S1522 (S15222: No), it is determined whether or not the probability change state flag 223k is ON (S1523). Then, when it is determined that the probability change state flag 223k is not on (off) (S1523: No), it means that it is not in the "ream villa mode" and is in the low probability state of the special symbol, that is, Since it means that it was a big hit in the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state), the process shifts to S1524 in order to set the back surface (temple stage) for the "renso mode".

Further, even when it is determined in the processing of S1521 that it is a probabilistic jackpot F (S1521: Yes), a time saving period of a normal symbol is given after the jackpot ends (that is, the mode shifts to the "renso mode"). Similarly, the process shifts to S1524. Further, when it is determined in the processing of S1522 that the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is larger than 0 (S1522: Yes), it means that the big hit has occurred in the "continuous villa mode", and the "continuous villa" is again after the big hit. Since the mode shifts to the "mode", the process also shifts to S1524 in this case as well.

In the process of S1524, a display rear image change command corresponding to the rear surface I (temple stage) is set (S1524). Then, the value (02H) corresponding to the back surface I (temple stage) is set to the back surface flag 223 g (S1525), and the value according to the jackpot type (60 or 100, FIG. 68) with respect to the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223 m. (See (a) and (b)) are set (S1526), and the process proceeds to S1532.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1523 that the probability change state flag 223k is on (S1523: Yes), it is not in the "consecutive villa mode" and in the probability change state of the special symbol (that is, "normal mode"). Since it means that the jackpot is in the middle), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot this time is one of the normal jackpots (normal jackpot C or normal jackpot D) (S1527). Then, when it is determined that it is one of the normal jackpots (S1527: Yes), it shifts to the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state) after the jackpot ends, so it corresponds to the back surface H (cave stage). A display rear image change command is set (S1528), and a value (01H) corresponding to the rear surface H is set to the rear surface flag 223 g (S1529). After the processing of S1529, the process proceeds to the processing of S1532.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1527, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a normal jackpot (that is, one of the probability variation jackpots E, G, and H) (S1527: No), the "normal mode" (probability variation non-probability) is performed again after the jackpot ends. (Time saving state) is set, so set the display rear image change command corresponding to the rear C (forest stage) indicating "normal mode" (S1530), and set the value (00H) corresponding to the rear C to the rear flag 223g. Set to (S1531), and the process shifts to S1532.

In the process of S1532 executed after the process of any of S152, S1529, and S1531 is completed, the probability change state flag 223k is updated according to the jackpot type. That is, if the jackpot this time is either a normal jackpot C or D, the probability variation state flag 223k is set to off, and if it is any of the probability variation jackpots E to F, the probability variation state flag 223k is set to on. When the process of S1532 is completed, the back-to-back setting process 2 (S1431) is completed.

By this process, it is possible to set the back type according to the state ("normal mode", "preparation mode", or "ream villa mode") set after the jackpot ends, so that the player can easily set the current mode. You can grasp the state.

Next, the command determination process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. This command determination process (S1412) is a process for determining a command received from the main control device 110, similar to the command determination process (S1412) in the first embodiment.

In each of the command determination processes (S1412), S1601, S1602, S1604 to S1609, and S1613 to S1617, S1601, S1602, S1604 to S1609 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S1613 to S1617 is executed. Further, in the command determination process (S1412) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1602 is completed, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1621) is executed instead of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 47) in the first embodiment. Will be done. The variation pattern selection process 2 (S1621) is a process for extracting the variation pattern type from the received variation pattern command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the process of S1609 is completed, the continuous advance notice execution determination process (S1622), which is a process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, is executed. Details of this continuous advance notice execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the prize information command has not been received by the process of S1609, it is determined whether or not the fall command has been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S1623 to be executed (the process of S1609 determines whether or not the fall command has been received. S1623). Then, when it is determined that the fall command has been received (S1623: Yes), it means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has shifted (falled) to the low probability state of the special symbol, so the probability change state flag 223k is turned off. Set to (S1624) to end this process.

In the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, the determination process (S1611) (see FIG. 46) of whether or not the opening command has been received, and when the opening command is received (S1611: Yes). ), The process of setting the opening command for display (S1612) was configured to be executed, but in the present embodiment, these processes are configured to be executed in the stop command process (see FIG. 102). ing. Even if the processing order is changed, the jackpot opening can be set without delay as in the first embodiment.

Further, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S1616 (S1616: No), the stop command process (S1625) is executed. In this stop command processing (S1625), control is performed based on the stop command output from the main control device 110. Details of the stop command processing (S1625) will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1621) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. As described above, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1621) is a process for extracting the variation pattern type from the received variation pattern command. Of the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1621), the process of S1701 is the same as the process of S1701 of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 47) in the first embodiment. Further, in the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1621) of the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is not the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot (S1701: No). ), The backside setting process 2 at the time of disconnection, which will be described later, is executed (S1721), and the process proceeds to the process of S1731. In the detached back setting process 2 (S1721), as in the detached back setting process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment, whether or not to change the rear image when the lottery of the special symbol is missed. This is a process for determining. The details of the back setting process (S1721) at the time of disconnection will be described later with reference to FIG. 97.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1701, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot (S1701: Yes), then whether or not the notification is the probability variation jackpot. Determine (S1722). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is (S1722: Yes), the probability variation state flag 223k is set to ON (S1723), and the process proceeds to S1725.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the notification is not the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (that is, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot) (S1722: No), the probability variation state flag 223k is set to off (that is, the probability variation state flag 223k is set to off). S1724), the process proceeds to S1725. In the subsequent processing of S1725, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is 0 (S1725). That is, it is determined whether or not the current state is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (in the "ream villa mode").

In the processing of S1725, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is 0 (that is, it is not in the "continuous villa mode") (S1725: Yes), the time saving period of the normal symbol is 100 times after the end of the jackpot. Since it is given (see FIG. 68 (a)), the voice lamp control device 113 also sets 100 to the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223 m in order to accurately grasp the time saving period of the normal symbol (S1727). .. Then, the process shifts to S1731.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1726, if it is determined that it is not the probabilistic jackpot F (S1726: No), the time saving period of the normal symbol is not given after the jackpot (there is no shift to the "renso mode"). Therefore, the process proceeds to S1731 as it is.

Further, in the processing of S1725, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is not 0 (S1725: No), then either the probabilistic jackpot F or the probabilistic jackpot H is notified this time. Whether or not it is determined (S1728). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot F or the probability variation jackpot H is (S1728: Yes), the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the jackpot (see FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b)). ), The value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is set to 100 (S1729), and the process shifts to S1731.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1728, when it is determined that neither the probability variation jackpot F nor the probability variation jackpot H is (S1728: No), it means that it is a jackpot type in which the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 60 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, 60 is set to the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m (S1730), and the process shifts to S1731. In the process of S1731, the effect mode setting process (S1731) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98, but this effect mode setting process (S1731) varies depending on the advance notice type of the advance notice effect set in the continuous advance notice execution determination process (see FIG. 99) described later. This is a process for setting a display effect to be executed during the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the backside setting process 2 (S1721) at the time of disconnection, which is executed in the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 96) described above, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the back surface setting process 2 (S1721) at the time of disconnection.

In the back setting process 2 (S1721) at the time of disconnection, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is larger than 0 (S1821), and it is determined that the value is not larger than 0 (that is, 0). (S1821: No) means that the state is other than the "ream villa mode" ("normal mode" or "preparation mode"), so the present process is terminated as it is. It should be noted that the fall lottery results in a lottery corresponding to the fall, and when the state changes, the back image is changed in the fall setting process (see FIG. 102) described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1821, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is larger than 0 (that is, in the "continuous villa mode") (S1821: Yes), the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is set. 1 is subtracted (S1822), and it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m after the subtraction becomes 0 (S1823).

In the process of S1823, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m after subtraction is not 0 (S1823: No), it means that the "continuous villa mode" continues, and there is no need to change the back type. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1823, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is not 0 (S1823: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the probability change state flag 223k is ON (S1824), and the probability change is made. If the state flag 223k is on (S1824: Yes), it means that the "consecutive villa mode" (probability change time saving state) has ended and the mode has shifted to the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state). Set the display rear image change command corresponding to (S1825). As a result, the back surface C (forest stage) corresponding to the "normal mode" can be set, so that the player can easily recognize that the "renso mode" has ended. When the processing of S1825 is completed, the value (00H) corresponding to the back surface C is set to the back surface flag 223g (S1826), and this processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1824, when it is determined that the probability change state flag 223k is off (S1824: No), the "consecutive villa mode" (non-probability change time reduction state) ends and the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time reduction state) ends. Since it means that the state has been changed to (state), in this case, the display rear image change command corresponding to the rear surface H is set (S1827). As a result, it is possible to set the rear surface H (cave stage) corresponding to the "preparation mode", so that it is easy for the player to end the "ream villa mode" and shift to the "preparation mode". Can be recognized by. As described above, in the "preparation mode", when a big hit is made, the mode always shifts to the "renso mode", so that the player can be made to think that he / she will continue to play until the big hit again. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. After the processing of S1828, the value (01H) corresponding to the back surface H is set to the back surface flag 223g (S1828), and this processing is terminated.

Since the back surface setting process 2 (S1721) at the time of detachment can set the back surface according to the state, it is possible to make the player predict the state based on the back surface type. Therefore, even though it is in an advantageous state (that is, "ream villa mode" or "preparation mode"), it may quit the game without noticing it, or conversely, in a disadvantageous state (that is, "normal mode"). In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the player from being chased deeply by mistakenly thinking that it is in an advantageous state, so that it can be prevented from being disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, when the "ream villa mode" is completed, the back type is uniquely determined according to the state after the end (whether it is the "normal mode" or the "preparation mode"). It was configured, but not limited to this. For example, in a part of the case where the "preparation mode" is set, the back surface C corresponding to the "normal mode" may be set. As a result, even if the back type is changed from the back I (temple stage) to the back C (forest stage), there is a possibility that it has shifted to the "preparation mode", so expect it to be in the "preparation mode". You can play the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. In addition, for example, a special mode that is commonly selected in the "normal mode" and the "preparation mode" for a certain period of time (for example, until the variable effect is executed 10 times) after the "renso mode" ends. It may be set to a different back type. By setting the same back type, it can be difficult for the player to determine the state after the end of the "renso mode", so the game is played with the expectation that the player has shifted to the "preparation mode". be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the effect mode setting process (S1731) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. This effect mode setting process (S1731) is executed in the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1621), and as described above, the display executed during the variation effect in a mode corresponding to the set advance notice type of the advance notice effect. This is a process for setting the effect.

In this effect mode setting process (S1731), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the advance notice start flag 223p is 00H indicating that the advance notice effect is not set (S4201). Then, when it is determined that the advance notice start flag 223p is not 00H (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not the advance notice start flag 223p is either 01H or 04H (S4202). That is, it is determined whether or not a long notice for setting a notice effect or a Gaselong notice for setting a notice effect for all the reserved balls at the start of fluctuation is set.

In the process of S4202, when it is determined that the notice start flag 223p is either 01H or 04H (S4202: Yes), it means that the notice effect is set for all the reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set as the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i (S4203), and the process proceeds to S4205.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the advance notice start flag 223p is neither 01H nor 04H (S4202: No), the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i is set to 1 (S4204), and the process proceeds to S4205. In the process of S4205, the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern table 222a based on the advance notice start flag 223p and the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i (S4205). After that, based on the value of the advance notice start flag 223p and the continuous advance notice counter 223i, the corresponding value is set to the advance notice type flag 223q (S4206), and the value of the advance notice start flag 223p is set to 00H (S4207). End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the advance notice start flag 223p is 00H (S4201: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i is 0 (S4208). If it is determined that the continuous advance notice counter 223i is not 0 (S4208: No), it means that the advance notice effect is being executed. Therefore, the value of the advance notice type flag 223q is read out (S4209), and the advance notice type flag 223q A variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern table 222a based on the value and the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i (S4210), and this process ends.

More specifically, the variation pattern table of the present embodiment defines aspects of the variation pattern including the aspect of the advance notice effect. Examples of the variation pattern selected when the advance notice effect is set include "various variation effects executed for the second time in the long advance notice effect executed over three times of the variation effect" and "4 times". Depending on the type of advance notice effect and the progress of the advance notice effect (how many times of the change effect) Different modes of variable effect are specified accordingly. In the process of S4210 described above, the type of the advance notice effect is specified by the advance notice type flag 223q, and the progress of the advance notice effect is specified by the continuous advance notice counter 223i, so that an appropriate display effect to be displayed next in the advance notice effect can be obtained. You have selected.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4208, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice counter 223i is 0 (S4208: Yes), it indicates that the advance notice effect is not set, so that it is based on the variation time notified by the variation pattern command. , The variation pattern to be executed this time is extracted from the variation patterns in which the advance notice effect is not displayed from the variation pattern table 222a (S4211), and this process is terminated.

By executing this process, a wide variety of advance notice effects can be set, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the continuous advance notice execution determination process (S1622) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. As described above, this continuous advance notice execution determination process (S1622) is a process for determining whether or not to execute various advance notice effects (see FIGS. 82 to 85).

In this continuous notice execution determination process (S1622), first, the prize information notified by the prize information command is stored in the prize information storage area 223a (S4301), and then it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is being executed. (S4302). When it is determined that the continuous notice effect is not being executed (S4302: No), a value indicating a real fall notice (that is, 01H or 02H indicating a long notice or a short notice) is set in the value of the notice start flag 223p. It is determined whether or not it is done (S4303).

In the processing of S4303, if it is determined that the notice start flag 223p is a value (01H or 02H) indicating a genuine fall notice (S4303: Yes), then the notification by the winning information command corresponds to the big hit. When it is determined whether or not the information is the winning information (S4304) and when it is determined that the information is the winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S4304: Yes), the special notification effect A (FIG. 82 (b)) is given to the notice start flag 223p. 03H indicating (see) is set (S4305), and the process shifts to S4313. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the winning information does not correspond to the jackpot (S4304: No), the processing of S4305 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4313.

On the other hand, in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the notice start flag 223p is not a value indicating a genuine fall notice (that is, 01H or 02H) (S4303: Yes), the notice start flag setting process is executed (S4303: Yes). S4306), the process proceeds to S4313. The advance notice start flag setting process (S4306) is a value corresponding to the determined advance notice type according to the determination result of the advance notice type using the advance notice type determination table 222d (see FIG. 75) (see FIG. 76 (a)). Is a process for setting the advance notice start flag 223p. Details of this notice start flag setting process (S4306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the advance notice effect is being executed (S4302: Yes), then the winning information command is used to deal with the fall (transition from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol). If it is determined whether or not the winning information has been notified (S4307) and it is determined that the winning information corresponds to the fall (S4307: Yes), a reversal effect is produced for the notice type flag 223q (see FIG. 85 (b)). ) Is set (S4308). The fact that the newly notified prize information during the execution of the notice effect is the prize information corresponding to the fall means that the currently executing notice effect is the Gase preparation mode notice effect, so the preparation is made by the reverse effect. This is because it is necessary to notify the player of the transition to the mode.

When the processing of S4308 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i (S4309), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4313. By adding 1 to the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i, it is possible to increase the variable effect for executing the advance notice effect by one time. That is, in addition to the number of variable effects for executing the Gase preparation mode notice effect, which was set before the prize information corresponding to the fall was notified, one variable effect for executing the reverse effect should be secured. Can be done. Assuming that the reverse effect is executed without changing the number of fluctuations determined as the Gase preparation mode notice effect, the effect content once set as the Gase preparation mode notice effect can be rewritten, or the Gase preparation mode notice effect can be set. In the final variable effect being performed, it may be necessary to collectively execute the effect of losing to the monster 802 and the reverse effect, so there is a risk that the reverse effect cannot be suitably performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the reverse effect is executed in the variable effect that is first executed after the number of fluctuations determined as the Gase preparation mode notice effect is completed, the time for performing the reverse effect is sufficient. Can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more clearly recognize that the reversal effect has been executed.

In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the notification is not the winning information corresponding to the fall (S4307: No), then the running advance notice effect finally shifts (falls) to the "preparation mode". Is being executed (S4310). In the process of S4310, when it is determined that the real fall notice effect is being executed (S4310: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the notification content by the winning information command is a big hit (S4311). Then, when it is determined that the notification content is a big hit (S4311: Yes), 0EH indicating the special notification effect B (FIGS. 83 and 84) is set in the notice type flag 223q (S4312), and the process proceeds to S4313. do.

In addition, when it is determined that the real fall notice effect is not being executed in the processing of S4310 (S4310: No), or when it is determined that the notification content notified by the winning information command in the processing of S4311 is not a big hit (S4310: No). S4311: No), the process of S4312 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4313.

In the process of S4313, the game state look-ahead process described later is executed (S4313), and this process is terminated. This game state pre-reading process (S4313) is a process for pre-reading the game state at the time when the lottery of the special symbol based on the winning information is executed based on the winning information notified by the winning information command. Details of this game state look-ahead process (S4313) will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

By executing this continuous advance notice execution determination process (S1622), the lottery result of the special symbol and the lottery result of the fall lottery can be pre-read in advance based on the winning information, and an appropriate advance notice effect can be set in advance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the notice start flag setting process (S4306) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. This notice start flag setting process (S4306) is executed in the continuous notice execution determination process (S1622), and as described above, according to the determination result of the advance notice type using the advance notice type determination table 222d (see FIG. 75). This is a process for setting a value (see FIG. 76A) corresponding to the determined advance notice type for the advance notice start flag 223p.

In the notice start flag setting process (S4306), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s is larger than 0 (S4401). That is, at the time when the special symbol lottery or the fall lottery is executed based on the prize information notified by the prize information command, is it in the "consecutive villa mode" (consecutive villa state) (that is, in the time saving state of the normal symbol)? Whether or not there is).

In the process of S4401, if it is determined that the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4401: No), it is in the "continuous villa mode" at the time of lottery based on the winning information. This means that it is not necessary to set the effect of whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state) (there is no need to set the notice start flag 223p), so this process is performed as it is. finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s is 0 in the processing of S4401 (S4401: No), the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state) or the "normal mode" at the time of lottery based on the winning information, or It means that it is in "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state). Therefore, in this case, in order to determine whether or not the "normal mode" is set at the time of the lottery based on the winning information, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is on (S4402). The notice type of the preparation mode notice effect is set (the notice start flag 223p is set) only in the "normal mode" where there is a possibility of falling into the "preparation mode".

If it is determined in the process of S4402 that the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is off (S4402: No), it means that the player is in the "preparation mode" at the time of the lottery based on the winning information, and the mode shifts to the "preparation mode". Since it is not necessary to set the effect of whether or not to perform (it is not necessary to set the notice start flag 223p), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is on (S4402: Yes), it means that it is in the "normal mode" at the time of the lottery based on the winning information (there is a possibility of setting the advance notice effect). Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the notice type flag 223q is "00H" indicating "no notice" (S4403). That is, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is already being executed.

In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the value of the notice type flag 223q is not "00H" (S4403: No), it means that one of the notice effects (see FIGS. 82 to 85) has already been set. Therefore, this process ends without setting the notice start flag 223p. If the start of a new advance notice effect is set during the execution of the advance notice effect, a different advance notice effect may be started in the middle of the previously executed advance notice effect. There is a risk of feeling uncomfortable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the notice start flag 223p is not set during the execution of the notice effect. As a result, it is possible to set a suitable effect content.

In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the value of the notice type flag 223q is 00H (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether or not the prize information corresponding to the fall is notified by the prize information command (S4404). When it is determined in the processing of S4404 that the winning information corresponds to the fall (S4404: Yes), the genuine notice determination table 222d2 (see FIG. 75 (c)) is read as a table for determining the notice type of the notice effect. (S4405), the process proceeds to S4407. On the other hand, if it is determined that the notification is not the winning information corresponding to the fall (S4404: No), the Gase notice judgment table 222d1 (see FIG. 75 (b)) is used as a table for determining the notice type of the notice effect. ) Is read (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4407.

In the processing of S4407 executed after the processing of S4405 or S4406, the read table (Gase notice judgment table 222d1 or genuine notice judgment table 222d2) is compared with the value of the notice type lottery counter 223n (S4407), and the notice type is used. A value corresponding to the value of the lottery counter 223n (see FIG. 76A) is set in the advance notice start flag 223p (S4408), and this process ends.

Specifically, when the flag notice determination table 222d1 (see FIG. 75 (b)) is read, if the value of the notice type counter 223n is in the range of "0 to 94", the notice effect is not executed. If "00H" indicating "00H" is set to the value of the notice start flag 223p and the value of the notice type counter 223n is "95", "04H" corresponding to "Gaselong notice" is set to the value of the notice start flag 223p. If the value of the notice type counter 223n is "96 to 99", "05H" corresponding to the "Gase short notice" is set to the value of the notice start flag 223p. Further, when the genuine notice determination table 222d2 (see FIG. 75 (c)) is read, if the value of the notice type counter 223n is in the range of "0 to 89", "01H" corresponding to "long notice" Is set to the value of the notice start flag 223p, and if the value of the notice type counter 223n is "90 to 99", "02H" corresponding to the "short notice" is set to the value of the notice start flag 223p.

By executing this notice start flag setting process (S4306), it is possible to set a notice effect for expecting the transition to the "preparation mode" in the "normal mode". Therefore, in the "normal mode", which is the most disadvantageous for the player, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation for the "preparation mode".

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the game state look-ahead process (S4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. This game state look-ahead process (S4314) is a process executed in the continuous advance notice execution determination process (S1622), and is a special symbol based on the winning information based on the winning information notified by the winning information command as described above. This is a process for pre-reading the game state at the time when the lottery is executed.

In the game state look-ahead process (S4314), first, it is determined whether or not the prize information corresponding to the fall is notified by the prize information command (S4501), and when it is determined that the prize information corresponds to the fall (S4501: Yes), in order to indicate that the transition from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the normal state of the special symbol is performed, the look-ahead probability variation state flag 223r is set to off (S4502), and the process proceeds to S4503. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information does not correspond to the fall (S4501: No), it means that there is no change in the game state due to the fall (transition from the probability change state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol). , The process of S4502 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4503.

In the processing of S4503, it is determined whether or not the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s is larger than 0 (S4503), and if the counter value is larger than 0 (S4503: Yes), then the winning information command corresponds to the jackpot. It is determined whether or not the winning information has been notified (S4504). In the processing of S4504, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the jackpot has been notified by the winning information command (S4504: Yes), the value corresponding to the notified jackpot type (the time saving period given after the jackpot ends) is pre-read. It is set to the consecutive villa state counter 223s (S4505). More specifically, if the jackpot type is any of the normal jackpot C and D and the probability variation jackpot E and G, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 60 times after the jackpot ends (Fig. 68 (a), (Refer to (b)), 60 is set to the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is either probabilistic jackpot F or H, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the jackpot ends (see FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b)). Set the value of the counter 223s to 100.

When the processing of S4505 is completed, the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is updated according to the jackpot type (S4506), and this processing is completed. Specifically, if it is any of the probability variation jackpots E to H, the probability variation state of the special symbol will be reached after the jackpot ends, so the look-ahead probability variation state flag 223r is set to ON. On the other hand, if it is either the normal jackpot C or D, the special symbol will be in a low probability state after the jackpot ends, so the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is set to off.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4504, when it is determined that the notification content is not a big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order) (S4504: No), the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s is subtracted by 1 (S4507). , End this process.

In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s is 0 (S4503: No), then it is determined whether or not the notification content is the probability variation jackpot F (S4508). As described above, the probabilistic jackpot F is a special jackpot that shifts to the "renso mode" (a time saving period is given 100 times after the jackpot ends) regardless of the game state at the time of winning.

In the process of S4508, when it is determined that the notification content is not the probability variation jackpot F (S4508: No), it is determined whether or not the look-ahead probability variation state flag 223r is on (S4509). If it is determined that the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is off (that is, it is in the "preparation mode" when the lottery of the special symbol based on the winning information is executed) (S4509: No), then the winning information command It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the jackpot has been notified (S4510), and if it is the winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S4510: Yes), the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s according to the notified jackpot type, The look-ahead probability change flag 223r is updated (S4511), and this process ends.

More specifically, when the normal jackpot C or D is set in the "preparation mode", the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 60 times after the end of the jackpot, and the special symbol becomes a low probability state. Since the transition is performed (see FIGS. 68A and 68B), in the process of S4511, the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s is set to 60, and the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is set to off. In addition, when the probability change jackpot is E or G, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 60 times after the end of the jackpot, and the special symbol shifts to the probability variation state (Fig. 68 (a),). (See (b)), in the process of S4511, 60 is set to the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s, and the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is set to ON.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot H, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the jackpot, and the special symbol shifts to the probability variation state (see FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b)). ), Set the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s to 100, and set the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r to ON.

Further, in the processing of S4509, when it is determined that the look-ahead probability change state flag 223r is on (S4509: Yes), it means that it is in the "normal mode" at the time of executing the lottery of the special symbol, and the probability change jackpot F Since there is no transition to the "renso mode" (normal symbol time saving period is given) regardless of whether it is a big hit or a miss, this process is performed as it is without executing the process of S4511. To finish. Similarly, in the process of S4510, even if it is determined that the prize information corresponding to the loss is notified by the prize information command (S4510: No), the time saving period is not given, so this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S4508, if it is determined that the notification content is the probability variation jackpot F (S4508: Yes), the normal symbol time reduction period is given 100 times after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning, and the time reduction period is given 100 times. Since the transition to the probabilistic state of the special symbol is performed, 100 is set to the value of the pre-reading consecutive villa state counter 223s (S4512), the pre-reading probable change state flag 223r is set to ON (S4513), and this process is terminated. By executing this game state pre-reading process, the lottery result of the special symbol and the game state can be pre-read from the winning information command, so that the advance notice effect can be executed at an appropriate timing.

Next, the details of the stop command processing (S1625) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 102. This stop command process (S1625) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 95), and is a process for performing control based on the stop command output from the main control device 110 as described above.

In this stop command processing (S1625), first, it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4701), and if it is determined that a stop command has been received (S4701: Yes), the variation of the variation effect is changed. Set the stop (S4702). Next, when it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice counter 223i is larger than 0 (S4703), and when it is determined that the continuous advance notice counter 223i is 0 (notice effect is not set) (S4703: No), thereafter. The process of updating the setting of the advance notice effect (S4704 to S4706) is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice counter 223i is larger than 0 (S4603: Yes), the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i is first subtracted by 1 (S4704). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i after subtraction is 0 (S4705), and if it is determined to be 0 (S4705: Yes), among the variable effects set for the advance notice effect. Since it means that the variation effect to be executed last is completed, 00H is set to the value of the notice type flag 223q (S4706). That is, it indicates that the advance notice effect has ended and the advance notice effect has not been set. In addition, although the illustration is omitted, when it is notified that the state shifts to a state other than the "normal mode" by the advance notice effect (when the character 801 wins the monster 802 or when the temple descends), Set to change the back image according to the state after migration. That is, the display rear image change command is set, and the value corresponding to the changed back is set to the back flag 223 g.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4705: No), the advance notice effect is continuously executed even in the next variable effect. (There is no need to set the end of the advance notice effect), so the process of S4706 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the process of S4601 (S4601: No), the process corresponding to other commands such as the process corresponding to the opening command is executed (S4607), and this process is terminated. ..

By this stop command processing, the continuous advance notice counter 223i can be accurately updated according to the situation of the advance notice effect, and the corresponding setting can be executed at the end of the advance notice effect. Therefore, the advance notice effect can be preferably executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the probabilistic non-time saving state is defined as "normal mode", the non-probable non-time saving state is defined as "preparation mode", and the time saving state is defined as "ream villa mode". In the "mode" and "preparation mode", even if it becomes a big hit, it is easy to get a big hit (a big hit by lottery of special symbol 1), and in the "renso mode", a large amount of prize balls are obtained. It is structured so that it can easily become a jackpot that can be obtained (a jackpot by lottery of special symbol 2). That is, it is configured to be most advantageous for the player by being in the "ream villa mode".

Further, in the present embodiment, the "preparation mode" is configured to be easier to shift to the "ream villa mode" which is advantageous for the player than the "normal mode". That is, it is configured so that a big hit in the "preparation mode" is more likely to be given a time saving period of a normal symbol after the end of the big hit than a big hit in the "normal mode", and "preparation" is made more than in the "normal mode". The "mode" is configured to be more advantageous to the player. In a general gaming machine, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is more advantageous than the low probability state of the special symbol, but in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is more advantageous in the normal state of the normal symbol. Since it is more disadvantageous than the low-probability state of the special symbol, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which the game is played while wishing to end the probabilistic state of the special symbol as soon as possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the transition from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is performed by a fall lottery executed together with the lottery of whether or not the special symbol is a hit. That is, regardless of the number of fluctuations from the end of the jackpot, the fall lottery is configured to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol whenever the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained. That is, since the ease of transition from the "normal mode" to the "preparation mode" is constant for each fluctuation, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the transition to the "preparation mode" will be performed in each fluctuation production. can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "normal mode" and the "preparation mode" are configured so as to be indistinguishable (difficult) from the operation of the electric accessory 640a or the like, so that the "preparation mode" is adopted. The timing of the transition and the timing of notifying the "preparation mode" are intentionally staggered. That is, when it is determined by pre-reading that the winning information corresponding to the fall is held, the effect of notifying the transition to the "preparation mode" even before the variable effect corresponding to the winning information is executed. Is configured to be executable. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the player has entered the "preparation mode", which is relatively advantageous to the player, earlier than it should be, so that the player feels as if he / she has been in the "preparation mode" for a long time. Can be done. Therefore, by making the advantageous state feel long, it is possible to easily have a good impression on the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the variation effect corresponding to the fall is executed, if a plurality of variation effects to be executed after the change are reserved, the notification during the variation effect corresponding to the fall is not performed. , The "preparation mode" can be notified by a continuous effect over the variable effect executed after the variable effect. As a result, the advance notice effect for notifying the fall can be executed over more variable effects, so that the degree of freedom of the advance notice effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs when the player shifts to the "preparation mode", a time saving period is always given (that is, the player shifts to the "ream villa mode"). It is not limited to. For example, a part of the jackpot may be configured so that a short time period is not given. That is, a jackpot that loops in the "preparation mode" (non-probability / non-time saving state) or a jackpot type that returns to the "normal mode" (probability / non-time saving state) may be provided. As a result, the joy of shifting from the "preparation mode" to the "renso mode" can be increased, and the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced when the transition to the "renso mode" is made. Can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, when it is pre-read that the lottery result corresponding to the fall will be obtained, the advance notice effect is executed, but when the fall (shifts to the "preparation mode"), the notice is given. A pattern that does not produce an effect may be provided. This makes it possible for the player to think that the player may have shifted to the "preparation mode" even if the advance notice effect has not been executed. Therefore, even if the player is in the "normal mode", the current state is " The game can be played with the expectation that it is in the "preparation mode". Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, even if the advance notice effect is not performed at the time of the fall, it may be configured to notify that the mode has been changed to the "preparation mode" based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied after the end of the variable effect corresponding to the fall. good. Here, as a predetermined condition for notifying the transition to the "preparation mode", for example, the number of fluctuations may be used. That is, the transition to the preparation mode may be notified based on the fact that the variation effect corresponding to the fall is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Further, for example, after the end of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fall, a lottery is performed for whether or not to execute the notification effect for each change, and when the lottery is won, it is configured to notify that the mode has been changed to the preparation mode. You may.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given depends on the state, but it is uniformly configured regardless of the state. A short period of time for ordinary symbols may be given. As a result, the amount of data in the type selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 can be reduced. In addition, in order to win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery in the normal state of the normal symbol ("normal mode" or "preparation mode"), first, the lottery of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol wins. (1/240), during the opening period (0.2 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a which is opened based on the hit of the normal symbol, the ball is made to enter the second entrance 640, and further. It is necessary to win a big hit (1/30 or 1 / 37.5) of the special symbol by the lottery of the special symbol based on the entry into the second entrance 640. That is, in the "normal mode" and the "preparation mode", the possibility of winning a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 is extremely low (more balls are held than when aiming for a consecutive villa state by continuing the lottery of the special symbol 1). Is more likely to be consumed). Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the irregular game method of aiming for a big hit that makes it easy to obtain a prize ball in the "normal mode" or the "preparation mode" by always hitting the right side is not worth it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the unexpected prize balls from being paid out due to the irregular game method.

In the present embodiment, the fall lottery for determining whether or not to shift (fall) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is executed before the lottery of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit. However, it is not limited to this. The fall lottery may be executed after determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit.

In the present embodiment, when shifting (falling) from the "normal mode" to the "preparation mode", the "preparation" is performed by the variable effect corresponding to the fall and the advance notice effect set in the variable effect executed before and after the fall. It was configured to notify the player of the transition to "mode", but is not limited to this. For example, the fall may be notified in the demonstration production. As a result, it is notified that the player has stopped launching and has entered the "preparation mode" after the variable stop state, so that the player can be surprised. In addition, since most of the cases in which the variable stop state is reached are cases where the player quits the game, the player who is about to quit the game is notified of the "preparation mode" to continue the game. I can remind you. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, for example, it may be configured to notify the first winning jackpot after falling. As a result, the player can know at the same time that he / she has shifted to the “preparation mode” and that he / she has shifted to the “renso mode” which is the most advantageous for the player. be able to. Furthermore, the advance notice effect is configured to continue executing the advance notice effect from the time when the winning information corresponding to the fall is detected (after it is determined that the advance notice effect of Gase is executed) until the next big hit. May be good. Further, if a big hit is made during the "preparation mode", the character 801 may be given a winning effect in the advance notice effect, and if a big hit is made during the notice effect of Gase, the character 801 may be defeated. With this configuration, the player can be made aware that the advance mode may have been entered by starting the advance notice effect, and if the character 801 wins in the advance notice effect. , Since it is possible to make the player recognize the transition to the "renso mode", it is possible to keep the player expecting the "renso mode" for a longer period of time.

In the present embodiment, the character 801 and the monster 802 perform a battle as a "preparation mode" notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any mode may be produced as long as the result suggesting that it is advantageous to the player and the result suggesting that it is disadvantageous to the player can be notified.

<Modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, a modified example of the advance notice effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment described above, when it is decided to execute the preparation mode notice effect or the Gase preparation mode notice effect based on the prize information notified by the prize information command, the execution of the notice effect is determined. It was possible to set an effect in which the character 801 and the monster 802 battle over all the reserved balls held at the start of the change of the variation effect that is executed first. That is, regardless of the holding area where the holding ball, which is the result of the lottery corresponding to the fall, is held, the notice effect can be set over all the holding balls held.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect that continues until the next big hit. That is, even if there is only one reserved ball at the start of the fluctuation, the advance notice effect can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations. As a result, the advance notice effect can be executed without being restricted by the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, so that the advance notice effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

Further, in this modification, when the advance notice effect is executed, the advance notice effect is continued until the next big hit. That is, the advance notice effect in this modification does not notify whether or not the mode has shifted to the "preparation mode" as in the second embodiment, but has shifted to the "renso mode" or remains in the "normal mode". It is configured to be executed to inform you of what is happening. In other words, it informs whether the player has transitioned to the "renso mode" by hitting a jackpot after falling to the "preparation mode", or has looped the "normal mode" as a result of hitting the jackpot without falling from the "normal mode". Is executed to.

With reference to FIG. 119, the mode of the advance notice effect in this modification will be described more specifically. First, FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect set when the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is notified by the winning information command in the “normal mode”. More specifically, in the lottery of the special symbol, the holding ball (hold 1) corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol during the execution of the variable effect corresponding to the deviation, and the holding ball corresponding to the fall and the deviation of the special symbol (hold ball 1). This is an example of the case where the hold 2) is put on hold.

As shown in FIG. 119 (a), when the reserved ball that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is held (hold 2), the first variable effect executed after the hold (variable effect corresponding to hold 1). From, the advance notice production (battle production in which the character 801 and the monster 802 battle) is started. This battle effect is executed over a variable effect corresponding to the disengagement (variable effect corresponding to the hold 1) and a variable effect corresponding to the fall, which is a lottery result (variable effect corresponding to the hold 2). Further, if the reserved ball does not exist at the end of the variable effect corresponding to the fall, the result of the advance notice effect is interrupted. That is, the production is interrupted without clarifying the result of the battle between the character 801 and the monster 802.

After the notice production is interrupted, when the start prize is detected, the battle production is resumed. In the example of FIG. 119 (a), since the case where the start winning prize corresponding to the deviation is detected is shown, the effect in which the battle cannot be settled is executed even in this variable effect. Further, in the example of FIG. 119 (a), a hold ball (hold 1'), which is a lottery result corresponding to a big hit, is held during the fluctuation effect corresponding to the deviation. In this case, in the variation effect corresponding to the jackpot hold ball (hold 1'), which is executed in the next variation of the out-of-change variation, the character 801 wins the monster 802 that guarded the entrance of the temple 811. Is executed, and the transition to the "renso mode" is notified. Then, after the transition to the "renso mode" is notified, the back type is set to the back type (back H) corresponding to the temple stage. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the mode has been changed to the "renso mode".

In this way, the hold ball is configured to continue the advance notice effect from the result of the lottery corresponding to the fall in the "normal mode" until the big hit (that is, until the transition to the "renso mode"). It is possible to perform a more flexible production without any restrictions. In the example of FIG. 119 (a), an example in which the advance notice effect is interrupted only once has been described, but the advance notice effect is interrupted every time the variable effect is completed with 0 reserved balls until a big hit. Will be done. That is, the execution period of the variable effect and the execution period of the advance notice effect are configured to match.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119 (b), when the advance notice effect of Gase (the advance notice effect of the mode in which the character 801 is finally defeated by the monster 802 guarding the temple 811) is executed in the "normal mode". An example will be described. More specifically, in the example of FIG. 119 (b), during the execution of the variable effect corresponding to the deviation, the winning information that is not a fall and is the lottery result corresponding to the deviation is notified, and the notice effect of the ghost is produced. This is an example when it is decided to execute.

As shown in FIG. 119 (b), when the variation effect corresponding to the deviation is completed and the variation effect for which the execution of the advance notice effect is determined is started, the advance notice effect is started. That is, the character 801 and the monster 802 start a battle. In this advance notice effect as well, as in the case of notifying the "renso mode" (see FIG. 119 (a)), when the fluctuation is stopped due to the number of reserved balls becoming 0, the advance notice effect (battle effect) is performed. Suspend. Then, when there is a new start prize, the advance notice production (battle production) is restarted again. This battle effect continues until the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is executed, and in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, the effect that the character 801 is defeated by the monster 802 is executed. Then, after that, the forest stage (rear surface C) corresponding to the normal mode is set as before the advance notice production starts.

Although not shown, if the winning information that is the result of the lottery corresponding to the fall is notified before the jackpot during the notice production of Gase, the character 801 wins the battle in the subsequent jackpot. The production is executed. This is because, regardless of whether the advance notice effect is being executed or not, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the "commuting mode", the mode shifts to the "preparation mode".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the second embodiment is configured so that when the execution of the advance notice effect is decided, the advance notice effect that continues until the next big hit is set. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the restriction on the number of reserved balls for the advance notice effect, so that it is possible to execute an effect with a higher degree of freedom. Further, in this modification, it is possible to notify whether the player is in the "renso mode" or the "normal mode", so that if the character 801 wins the battle by the advance notice effect, it is more advantageous for the player. It will be in a state. Therefore, the player's expectation for the advance notice can be further increased, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this modified example, the advance notice effect is configured to continue until a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, the advance notice effect may be executed with a fixed number of fluctuations (for example, 10 times). That is, it may be configured to execute an effect in which the battle is settled in the variable effect that is executed last among the fixed number of times. Then, in the advance notice effect executed based on the transition to the "preparation mode", if a big hit is made within a fixed number of times, the effect that the character 801 wins is executed and the "ream villa mode" is entered. If a fixed number of times does not result in a big hit, an effect of notifying the transition to the "preparation mode" may be performed. In addition, in the notice effect of Gase, the effect that the character 801 is defeated in the battle may be executed. In this way, even if the effect of winning the battle is performed, the player may be in the "preparation mode" or the "ream villa mode" depending on the result of the advance notice effect. Can be intriguing. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player during the advance notice production.

In this modification, the character 801 and the monster 802 are configured to perform a battle effect, but the battle opponent is not limited to the monster 802. It may be configured to change the opponent of the battle according to the degree of expectation. Specifically, if the advance notice is executed based on the notification of the winning information that will be the lottery result corresponding to the fall (shifted to the "preparation mode"), it seems to be weaker than the monster 802. The proportion of the appearance monster 816 (see FIG. 109 (b)) selected as the battle opponent of the character 801 may be increased. On the other hand, when executing the notice effect of Gase, the ratio of the monster 802 selected as the battle opponent of the character 801 may be increased. As a result, when the battle with the weak-looking monster 816 is started, the player can be more strongly expected to shift to the "preparation mode". Therefore, not only the result of the advance notice effect (the result of the battle) but also the opponent of the battle can be paid more attention, so that the player's interest can be further improved in the advance notice effect. When the degree of expectation is suggested by the opponent, the degree of expectation is not limited to the two types of opponents, and more diverse variations may be provided. For example, in addition to the monster 802 and the monster 816, a monster having a small palm size or a monster that looks larger and stronger than the monster 802 may be selectably configured. In addition, an opponent may be provided in which the victory of the character 802 is confirmed only by appearing (selected only when the mode shifts to the "preparation mode"). Specifically, for example, the effect in which a monster with a small palm size appears may be configured to be selected only when the mode shifts to the "preparation mode". As a result, the player can be made to pay more attention to the opponent of the battle and confirm it, so that the interest during the advance notice can be further improved.

In addition, the clothes of the character 801 may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation of the advance notice effect. For example, as a mode of the character 801, a mode of possessing an iron sword and a mode of possessing a golden sword may be provided. Then, when the mode shifts to the "preparation mode" (the winning information that is the result of the lottery corresponding to the fall is notified), the proportion in which the mode possessing the golden sword is selected is increased, and in the case of Gase. May increase the rate at which the mode of possessing an iron sword is selected. As a result, it is possible to draw more attention to the clothes of the character 801 and to improve the interest during the advance notice production. In addition, for example, the attack method of the character 801 and the monster 802 during the battle, and the reaction after the character 801 and the monster 802 are attacked have shifted to the "preparation mode" (and the jackpot has resulted in the "renso". It may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation for (shifting to "mode"). As a result, it is possible to pay more attention to the actions of the character 801 and the monster 802 during the advance notice production, so that the player's interest during the advance notice effect can be improved. Further, even if the period from the transition to the "preparation mode" to the big hit becomes long, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

In this modification, if the lottery result corresponds to the fall in the "normal mode", and if it is decided to execute the notice effect of Gase, the character 801 and the monster 802 will battle until the next big hit. Although it was configured to execute the effect, the mode of the advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the character 801 may be trained for the battle with the monster 802. Then, the battle between the character 801 and the monster 802 may be started after the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is detected. As a result, even if the jackpot is not easily won after the start of the advance notice production, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous due to the endless repetition of the battle. In addition, a plurality of variations may be provided as an effect of training. For example, it may be configured to perform a training to be struck by a waterfall, a training to form zazen in a dojo, or a production to perform training by kumite with friends. In addition, the expectation of the "preparation mode" is different for each production, for example, it is configured so that the expectation of training hit by the waterfall is the highest, and the expectation of training by the kumite is the lowest. You may. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation of the "preparation mode" depending on which training is executed. In addition, it may be configured to switch to a different type of training during training. For example, it may be configured to switch from training by kumite to training to form zazen, or from training to form zazen to training to be struck by a waterfall. In addition, when switching training, it is configured so that it can be switched only to training with higher expectations, and switching of training is performed at the time of production executed based on the transition to "preparation mode" rather than at the time of production of Gase. It may be configured to be easily selected. As a result, even if the advance notice production of the mode with low expectation is started first, the game during the advance notice can be performed with the expectation that the training will be switched to the training with high expectation after that. Therefore, regardless of the type of training, it is possible to play the game in anticipation of the "preparation mode" (and the subsequent shift to the "renso mode" due to the big hit).

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 118. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 10 shifts from the "normal mode" to the "preparation mode" by a fall lottery (or a partial jackpot), which is advantageous for the player. It was configured to facilitate the transition to. On the other hand, in the "renso mode", even if the special symbol falls (shifts) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability changes slightly (1/30 → 1 / 37.5). However, there was no significant difference between the two types of states defined as the "consecutive villa mode" (probability variation time reduction state and non-probability variation time reduction state).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, of the two types of states defined as the "consecutive villa mode", the non-probability variation time reduction state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the probability variation time reduction state. There is. Specifically, it is configured so that a longer time saving period is more likely to be given to a big hit in the non-probability non-time saving state than in the case of a big hit in the probabilistic time saving state. The longer the time reduction period, the more likely it is that the jackpot will be regained during the time reduction period (that is, during the "ream villa mode"). As a result, even in the "renso mode", the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery, so that it is advantageous for the player even if the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is reduced. It is configured. In the following description of the present embodiment, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, the probable variation time saving state is referred to as "renso mode 1", and the non-probability variation time saving state more advantageous than the "renso mode 1" is referred to as "renso mode". It is called differently from "2".

In addition, in the present embodiment, a jackpot type for returning from the "preparation mode" to the "normal mode" is provided. That is, even if a big hit occurs in the "preparation mode", it does not necessarily shift to the "renso mode", and there are cases where the game returns to the "normal mode". As a result, if the player can shift to the "renso mode" without returning to the "normal mode", the player can be given greater joy and satisfaction.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed. The point, the configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The point is that the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, the first type selection table 202g in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. The first hit type selection table 202 g in the present embodiment is the same as in the second embodiment (see FIG. 67 (b)). It is configured. In addition, the specified contents of each table have been changed from the second embodiment.

First, with reference to FIG. 103, the type selection table 202g1 for the special figure 1 in the third embodiment will be described. The hit type selection table 202g1 for the special figure 1 is a data table referred to for determining the big hit type when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1, as in the second embodiment. In the hit type selection table 202g1 for the special figure 1 in the present embodiment, "normal jackpot E" and "probability variation jackpot I" to "probability variation jackpot K" are shown in association with each possible value of the first hit type counter C2. The four jackpot types are specified.

More specifically, as the first hit type counter C2, "normal jackpot E" is associated with the range of "0 to 9". As described above, the first type counter C2 is a counter capable of taking 200 counters of "0 to 199". Of these, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot C" is 10 from "0 to 9", so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, the probability of becoming "normal jackpot E" is 5% (10). / 200).

"Normal jackpot E" has two rounds, and the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapse or until five balls win) in each round. It's a big hit. Since it is difficult for the player to win the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 0.2 seconds, even if the player wins the "normal jackpot E", the player does not get the prize ball and is a special game. In most cases the state is terminated. In addition, after the end of "normal jackpot E", it shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol. Whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given after the end of the "normal jackpot E" depends on the game state (probability variation non-time saving state, probability variation time saving state, non-probability variation state) at the time of "normal jackpot E". It is configured to differ depending on which case it became "normal jackpot E").

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 103, when the "normal jackpot E" is obtained in the probabilistic non-time saving state (that is, "normal mode"), the time saving period of the normal symbol is not given. That is, the mode shifts from the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state) to the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state). As described above, the "preparation mode" is easier to shift to the "renso mode" ("renso mode 1" or "renso mode 2") than the "normal mode". It makes you feel as if you are approaching the "renso mode".

In addition, when the "normal jackpot E" is obtained in the probability variation time saving state (that is, "ream villa mode 1"), the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 30 times. In other words, from the end of "normal jackpot E" until the lottery of special symbols is held 30 times, it is advantageous for the player (a long time saving period is often set when the jackpot is hit) "Renso mode" 2 ”(non-probability change time reduction state). This is to provide relief in the case of accidentally hitting the left side in the "renso mode 1" (the ball is hit toward the first entry port 64). In particular, there may be a time lag between the detection of the start prize corresponding to the transition to the "renso mode 1" and the actual notification of the transition to the "renso mode 1". There is a risk that the player will continue to hit left until the transition to "Renso Mode 1" is notified. In such a situation, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 by hitting the left side and becomes a big hit, if the configuration is such that the time saving period is not given as in the "normal mode", the big hit is obtained. In addition to getting almost no prize balls, the "Renso Mode 1" ends, which is terrible for the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "normal jackpot E" is obtained in the "renso mode 1", the special symbol 2 is drawn to become the "normal jackpot F" or the "probability variable jackpot L" in the "normal mode 1". It is configured so that the same (that is, 30 times) time saving period (see FIG. 104) is given. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming too disadvantageous.

On the other hand, when the "normal jackpot E" is reached in the non-probable state (that is, "preparation mode" or "renso mode 2") regardless of whether or not the normal symbol is in the time-saving state, the "normal jackpot E" is reached. After the end of, the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 100 times. In other words, the period from the end of "normal jackpot E" to the 100th lottery of special symbols is advantageous for the player (a long time saving period is often set when a jackpot is achieved). It becomes "Renso mode 2".

In "Renso Mode 2", when "Normal jackpot E" is given, 100 times of time saving period is given. In "Renso mode 1", when "Normal jackpot E" is reached, 30 times of time saving period is given. Is the same as the reason for granting. That is, it is terrible for the player to shift to the "normal mode" when the "normal jackpot E" is set in the "renso mode 2" (make the configuration not to give a time saving period). Therefore, in this case as well, a time saving period (see FIG. 104) equivalent to the case where the special symbol 2 is drawn to "normal jackpot F" or "probability variation jackpot L" in "renso mode 2" is given. Although it is difficult to get a prize ball, the "renso mode" itself is configured to continue. As a result, it is possible to relieve the mistake that the player accidentally hits the left side in the "renso mode 2".

In addition, when the "normal jackpot E" is set in the "preparation mode", the time saving period of 100 times is given to the "renso mode" ("renso mode 1" or "renso mode 2"). This is to prevent the "renso mode" from ending without becoming a big hit despite the transition. If a short period of time elapses without a big hit in the "renso mode", it was difficult to shift to the "renso mode" due to circumstances such as looping the "normal mode" multiple times. There is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "normal jackpot E" is obtained in the "preparation mode", a relatively long time saving period (100 times) is given, and the jackpot is won even once in the "renso mode". It is configured so that the situation where the "renso mode" ends without doing so is unlikely to occur. As a result, when the "preparation mode" is first shifted to the "ream villa mode", the player can be made to play the game with more peace of mind.

As the first hit type counter C2, "probability variation jackpot I" is associated with the range of "10 to 179". Of the 200 possible values of the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot I" is 170, which is "10 to 179". The probability of becoming a "probability change jackpot I" is 85% (170/200).

Like the "normal jackpot E", the "probability change jackpot I" has two rounds, and in each round, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapse, or the ball is hit). Since it is opened (until 5 prizes are won), it becomes difficult for the player to obtain the prize ball. In addition, after the end of "Probability change jackpot I", the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol. As with the "normal jackpot E", whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given after the end of the "probability jackpot I" depends on the game state at the time when the "probability jackpot I" is reached. There is.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 103, when the probability variation non-time reduction state (that is, "normal mode") becomes "probability variation jackpot I", the time reduction period of the normal symbol is not given. That is, it loops in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state). In addition, when the probability variation time reduction state (that is, "ream villa mode 1") becomes "probability variation jackpot I", the time reduction period of the normal symbol is given 30 times. That is, the "consecutive villa state 1" (probability change time saving state) which is advantageous for the player is given. This is to provide relief in the case of accidentally hitting the left side in the "renso mode 1" (the ball is hit toward the first entry port 64). In other words, if you accidentally hit the left side in "Renso Mode 1" (probability change time reduction state) and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and becomes a big hit, it is the same as in "Normal mode". If the time saving period is not given to the player, the prize ball due to the big hit will be hardly obtained, and the "renso mode 1" will end, and the mode will shift to the most disadvantageous "normal mode". This is because it is terrible for the player. Therefore, when a big hit is made in "Renso mode 1", it is equivalent to "normal big hit F" or "probability change big hit L" by lottery of special symbol 2 in "normal mode 1" (that is,). It is configured so that a short period (30 times) (see FIG. 104) is granted. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming too disadvantageous.

On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot I is reached in the non-probability variation state (that is, "preparation mode" or "ream villa mode 2"), the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the "probability variation jackpot I". That is, the period from the end of the "probability change jackpot I" to the 100th lottery of the special symbol is the "ream villa mode 1" which is advantageous for the player. By continuing the time saving period of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is performed 100 times, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be won again during the "ream villa mode 1". Therefore, by becoming the "probability change jackpot I" in the non-probability change state, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation that the jackpot will be hit again during the "ream villa mode 1".

In the case of "Probability change jackpot I" in "Renso mode 2", 100 times of time saving period is given. In "Renso mode 1", when it becomes "Probability change jackpot I", 30 times of time saving period Is the same as the reason for granting. That is, it is terrible for the player to shift to the "normal mode" when the "probability change jackpot I" is set in the "renso mode 2" (the configuration does not give a time saving period). Therefore, in this case as well, a time saving period (see FIG. 104) equivalent to that in the case of "normal jackpot F" or "probability variation jackpot L" by the lottery of the special symbol 2 in the "renso mode 2" is given. Although it is difficult to get a prize ball, the "renso mode" itself is configured to continue. As a result, it is possible to relieve the mistake that the player accidentally hits the left side in the "renso mode 2".

In addition, when the "probability change jackpot I" is set in the "preparation mode", the time saving period of 100 times is given to the "renso mode" ("renso mode 1" or "renso mode 2"). This is to prevent the "renso mode" from ending without becoming a big hit despite the shift to. If a short period of time elapses without a big hit in the "renso mode", it was difficult to shift to the "renso mode" due to circumstances such as looping the "normal mode" multiple times. There is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "probability change jackpot I" is obtained in the "preparation mode", a relatively long time saving period (100 times) is given, and the jackpot is won even once in the "renso mode". It is configured so that the situation where the "renso mode" ends without doing so is unlikely to occur. As a result, when the "preparation mode" is first shifted to the "ream villa mode", the player can be made to play the game with more peace of mind.

As the first hit type counter C2, "probability variation jackpot J" is associated with the range of "180 to 189". Of the 200 possible values of the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot J" is 10 from "180 to 189", so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery. The probability of becoming a "probability change jackpot J" is 5% (10/200).

Like the "normal jackpot E" and the "probability jackpot I", the "probability change jackpot J" has two rounds, and the first specific winning opening 65a passes a predetermined time (0.2 seconds elapses) in each round. (Or until 5 balls are won), it becomes difficult for the player to get the prize ball. Further, after the end of the "probability change jackpot J", the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the probability change state of the special symbol ends is set. It should be noted that the probabilistic state of the special symbol ends when it becomes a big hit or when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery. Therefore, when the "probability change jackpot J" is reached, the "consecutive villa mode 1" is set until the next jackpot is reached after the jackpot ends or the lottery result corresponding to the fall is reached.

As described above, the "renso mode 1" is in the probabilistic variation time saving state, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is 1/30. On the other hand, in the fall lottery, the probability of a lottery result corresponding to a fall is 1/60. In other words, it is configured so that there is a high possibility of winning a big hit before falling. If the jackpot hits before the fall, it will be a jackpot that can win a lot of prize balls, and after the jackpot ends, one of the "renso mode" ("renso mode 1" or "renso mode 1" or "renso" Mode 2 ") is more likely to be set. In addition, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained after the end of "Probability change jackpot J" and before the jackpot, "Renso mode 1" will end, but the mode will shift to "Preparation mode". Therefore, there is a high possibility that one of the "renso mode" ("renso mode 1" or "renso mode 2") will be set again by becoming a big hit.

In this way, when it becomes "Probability change jackpot J", it is possible to shift to "Renso mode 1" regardless of the game state at the time of winning, and it corresponds to the fall before it becomes a jackpot in that "Renso mode 1". Even if the lottery result is obtained, it will be a chance to shift to the "preparation mode" and then to the "renso mode" again, so in the "normal mode", the "normal jackpot E" that stops at the "preparation mode" Or, it is more advantageous than the "probability change jackpot I" that loops the "normal mode". In addition, in "Renso Mode 1", even if "normal jackpot E" or "probability change jackpot I" is reached, the time saving period is given only 30 times, so when "probability variation jackpot J" is reached, the time saving period is long. The probability of continuing is high (the probability of losing 30 times in a row in the 1/60 fall lottery is about 60%). Therefore, in the "renso mode 1", it is more advantageous to have a "probability change jackpot M" than a "normal jackpot F" or a "probability change jackpot L". On the other hand, it is unlikely that the 1/60 fall lottery will be missed 100 times in a row (about 19%). "Normal jackpot E" and "probability change jackpot I" are more advantageous than "probability variation jackpot J".

In this embodiment, the rate at which "probability change jackpot J" is selected is low (5%), and if a jackpot is obtained by lottery for special symbol 1, there is a possibility that "probability variation jackpot J" will be won consecutively. Is configured to be low. This is to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to hit left in the hope that the player will become the "probability jackpot J" even after the "probability change jackpot J" and the "renso mode 1". .. That is, for example, when the ratio of "probability change jackpot J" and the ratio of "probability change jackpot I" are opposite (when the ratio of "probability change jackpot J" becomes "probability change jackpot J" at a rate of 85%), "probability change jackpot J" should be continued. So, for the purpose of enjoying the loop between "Probability change jackpot J" and the time saving state of the normal symbol endlessly, an irregular game method of hitting left even in "Renso mode 1" (time saving state of the normal symbol) May be done. When an irregular game is played, the payout rate of the pachinko machine 10 tends to deviate from the design value, which causes a problem when the hall predicts sales.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the distribution of the "probability change jackpot J" is set to 5% so that the possibility that the "probability change jackpot J" is continuous is sufficiently low. Therefore, for the purpose of enjoying the loop between "Probability change jackpot J" and the time saving state of the normal symbol endlessly, an irregular game method of hitting left even in "Renso mode 1" (time saving state of the normal symbol) is used. It can be suppressed.

A "probability variation jackpot K" is associated with the range of "190 to 199" as the first hit type counter C2. Of the 200 possible values of the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot K" is 10 from "190 to 199", so when a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery. The probability of becoming a "probability change jackpot K" is 5% (10/200).

Like other jackpots, the "probability change jackpot K" has two rounds, and in each round, the first specific winning opening 65a has a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds have passed, or five balls). Since it is open (until it wins a prize), it becomes difficult for the player to get the prize ball. In addition, after the end of "Probability change jackpot K", the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol, but the time saving period of the normal symbol is not given regardless of the game state at the time of winning. That is, if the "probability change jackpot K" is set regardless of whether it is the "preparation mode" or the "renso mode", the game state is set to the "normal mode". Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player if the "probability change jackpot K" is set in the "preparation mode" or the "renso mode" ("renso mode 1" or "renso mode 2"). In the case of other jackpot types that can be selected when a jackpot is won by the special symbol 1 lottery, even though the game state after the jackpot is set to one of the "renso mode", "probability change" When it comes to "big hit K". This is because a "normal mode" that is disadvantageous to the player is set. On the other hand, in the "normal mode", the same setting as the "probability variation jackpot I" is made, so that the probability that the "normal mode" loops can be increased.

In this way, by providing the "probability variation jackpot K", the probability that the "normal mode" will be set again after the jackpot in the "normal mode" and the probability that the jackpot will be set again in the "renso mode" will be "" again. It is possible to make the probability that the "renso mode" is set different. Therefore, without lowering the probability of looping in the "normal mode", the rate of transition from the "preparation mode" to the "renso mode" and the jackpot in the "renso mode" set the "renso mode" again. Since the ratio can be lowered, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming too advantageous for the player.

In this way, by using the type selection table 202g1 for the special figure 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to changing whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given depending on whether or not it is in the "normal mode". , The number of time reductions given after the big hit can be changed depending on whether or not the special symbol is in the low probability state (non-probability change state). Therefore, it is possible to have variations in a short period of time.

Note that FIG. 103 is merely an example, and the ratio of each jackpot type and the distribution of the given time and short term are not limited to the above forms. For example, instead of increasing the proportion of "probability jackpot K" to 15%, the proportion of "probability variation jackpot I" may be decreased to 75%. That is, the ratio of "probability change jackpot K" to the entire jackpot type may be increased without changing the total ratio of "probability variation jackpot I" and "probability variation jackpot K". As a result, if a big hit is made in the special symbol 1 lottery in the "normal mode", the probability that the "normal mode" is set again is not changed, and if the big hit is made in the "preparation mode", the "renso" It is possible to reduce the ratio of shifting to the "mode" or the ratio of setting the "ream villa mode" again when a big hit is made in the "ream villa mode". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming too high. On the contrary, by reducing the ratio of "probability change jackpot K", it is possible to make the transition from "preparation mode" to "renso mode" easier, and at the jackpot in "renso mode". Since the "renso mode" can be easily set again, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming too low. In addition, by changing the ratio of "normal jackpot E", the ratio of transition from "normal mode" to "preparation mode" and the jackpot in "preparation mode" or one of the "ream villa modes" In some cases, the rate of transition to "renso mode 2" can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the hit type selection table 202g2 for the special figure 2 in the third embodiment will be described. The hit type selection table 202g2 for special figure 2 is a data table referred to for determining the big hit type when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and is the same as the hit type selection table 202g1 for special figure 1. The jackpot type is defined in association with each possible value of the first hit type counter C2.

More specifically, as the first hit type counter C2, "normal jackpot F" is associated with the range of "0 to 9". Of the 200 possible values of the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot F" is 10 of "0-9", so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 2 lottery. The probability of becoming a "normal jackpot F" is 5% (10/200).

The "normal jackpot F" has four rounds, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until five balls win) in each round. In many cases, the player can obtain a large amount of prize balls (5 pieces x 10 prize balls x 200 pieces in 4 rounds) as compared with the case where a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1. In addition, after the end of the normal jackpot F, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. Whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given after the end of the "normal jackpot E" depends on the gaming state (probability variation non-time saving state, probability variation time saving state, non-probability variation state) at the time of "normal jackpot F". It is configured to differ depending on which case it became "normal jackpot F").

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, when the "normal jackpot F" is obtained in the probabilistic non-time saving state (that is, "normal mode"), the time saving period of the normal symbol is not given. That is, the mode shifts from the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state) to the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state). In the "normal mode", even if the lottery of the special symbol 2 results in "normal jackpot F", the time saving period is not given, so that the second is always the second regardless of whether or not it is in the "renso mode". It is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game is performed aiming at the entrance 640. In the "normal mode", the ball hardly enters the second entrance 640, and the ball can be tentatively entered into the second entrance 640, and the ball becomes a "normal jackpot F". Even so, it does not shift to the "renso mode", so the disadvantages for the player can be increased. When hitting right in the "normal mode", the average number of balls consumed before a big hit is the number of prize balls (that is, 200) obtained in the big hit game of 4 rounds or 8 rounds. It is configured to far exceed the number of prize balls (that is, 400) obtained in the jackpot game.

More specifically, among the game balls launched (right-struck) on the right side of the game board 13, about 1 in 3 balls is configured to enter the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Has been done. Then, in the non-time saving state (normal state of the normal symbol), a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds is selected every time the lottery of the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is executed, so that the ball goes to the normal entry port. Even if you continue to enter the ball, the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed only once every 300 seconds (5 minutes). Further, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the non-time saving state is 1/240 as described above. Since the business hours of a general hall are about 13 to 14 hours, even if you can continue to draw lots of ordinary symbols once every 5 minutes, you can only draw lots of ordinary symbols about 160 times a day. I can't let you do it. That is, even if the game is played in the hall for one day, the probability of whether or not it will be once per normal symbol and the fluctuation time are set. Further, even when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for an extremely short period of time as compared with the time saving state of the normal symbol (0.2). Seconds x 1 time). Therefore, there is a high possibility that the ball cannot be inserted during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a. Further, even if the ball can be inserted during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a, the probability of hitting the special symbol is 1/30 or 1 / 37.5. Therefore, even if the player keeps hitting right all day long, it is more likely that he will not win a big hit by the special symbol 2 lottery, so he always aims at the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the irregular game method of launching a ball.

In this embodiment as well, the detour accessory 700 arranged on the game board 13 in the first embodiment may be provided. As a result, as in the first embodiment, when the normal symbol hits, it is possible to make it difficult to launch the game ball aiming at the opening period of the second entry port 640. Therefore, the "normal mode" ], It is possible to further enhance the deterrent effect on an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is performed in the hope that the prize ball will be a big hit that can be obtained in large quantities (200 or 400).

In addition, when the "normal jackpot F" is obtained in the probability variation time saving state (that is, "ream villa mode 1"), the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 30 times. That is, from the end of the "normal jackpot F" until the lottery of the special symbol is performed 30 times, the player will be in the "consecutive villa state 2" (non-probability change time saving state).

On the other hand, when the "normal jackpot F" is reached in the non-probability state (that is, "preparation mode" or "renso mode 2"), the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the "normal jackpot F". .. That is, the period from the end of the "normal jackpot F" to the 100th lottery of the special symbol is the "ream villa mode 2" which is advantageous for the player.

As the first hit type counter C2, "probability variation jackpot L" is associated with the range of "10 to 179". Of the 200 possible values of the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot L" is 170, which is "10 to 179". The probability of becoming a "probability change jackpot L" is 85% (170/200).

Like the "normal jackpot F", the "probability change jackpot L" has four rounds, and in each round, the second specific winning opening 650a has a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed, or five balls). Since it is open (until a prize is won), the player can obtain a large number of prize balls (5 pieces x 10 prize balls x 200 pieces in 4 rounds) as compared with the case where a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1. In addition, after the end of the "probability change jackpot L", the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol. As with the "normal jackpot F", whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given after the end of the "probability variation jackpot L" differs depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, when the probability variation non-time reduction state (that is, "normal mode") becomes "probability variation jackpot L", the time reduction period of the normal symbol is not given. That is, it loops in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state). In addition, when the probability variation time reduction state (that is, "ream villa mode 1") becomes "probability variation jackpot L", the time reduction period of the normal symbol is given 30 times. That is, the "consecutive villa state 1" (probability change time saving state) which is advantageous for the player is given.

On the other hand, when the "probability change jackpot L" is reached in the non-probability change state (that is, "preparation mode" or "renso mode 2"), the time saving period of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the "probability change jackpot L". .. That is, the period from the end of the "probability change jackpot L" to the 100th lottery of special symbols is the "renso mode 1" which is advantageous for the player. By continuing the time saving period of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is performed 100 times, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be won again during the "ream villa mode 1". Therefore, by becoming the "probability change jackpot L" in the non-probability change state, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation that the jackpot will be hit again during the "ream villa mode 1".

In addition, in the "preparation mode", since the lottery of the special symbol 2 is hardly performed in the normal game method, most of the cases where the "probability change jackpot L" is obtained in the non-probability change state is the jackpot in the "ream villa mode 2". It is the case that becomes. Then, in many cases, the transition to the "renso mode 2" is made when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery in the "renso mode 1". Therefore, when the mode shifts to the "renso mode 1", the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the lottery result corresponding to the fall will be obtained.

As the first hit type counter C2, "probability variation jackpot M" is associated with the range of "180 to 189". Of the 200 possible values of the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot M" is 10 from "180 to 189", so when a jackpot is won in the special symbol 2 lottery. The probability of becoming a "probability change jackpot M" is 5% (10/200).

"Probability change jackpot M" has the largest number of rounds in the jackpot with 8 rounds, and in each round, the second specific winning opening 650a wins a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or 5 balls win). Since it is open, the player can get the most prize balls (5 pieces x 10 prize balls x 400 in 8 rounds). Further, after the end of the "probability change jackpot M", the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the probability change state of the special symbol ends is set. That is, when the "probability change jackpot M" is reached, the "consecutive villa mode 1" is set until the next jackpot is reached after the jackpot ends or the lottery result corresponding to the fall is reached.

As described above, the "renso mode 1" is in the probabilistic variation time saving state, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is 1/30. On the other hand, in the fall lottery, the probability of a lottery result corresponding to a fall is 1/60. In other words, it is configured so that there is a high possibility of winning a big hit before falling. If the jackpot hits before the fall, it will be a jackpot that can win a lot of prize balls, and after the jackpot ends, one of the "renso mode" ("renso mode 1" or "renso mode 1" or "renso" Mode 2 ") is more likely to be set. In addition, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained after the end of the "probability change jackpot M" and before the jackpot, the "ream villa mode 1" will end, but the mode will shift to the "preparation mode". Therefore, there is a high possibility that one of the "renso mode" ("renso mode 1" or "renso mode 2") will be set again by becoming a big hit.

In this way, when the "probability change jackpot M" is reached, the game shifts to the "renso mode 1" regardless of the game state at the time of winning, and the fall is dealt with before the jackpot is reached in the "renso mode 1". Even if the lottery result is obtained, it will be a chance to shift to the "preparation mode" and then to the "renso mode" again, so if it becomes a "probability change jackpot N" that will shift to the "normal mode" It is advantageous compared to. In addition, in "Renso Mode 1", even if "normal jackpot F" or "probability change jackpot L" is reached, the time saving period is given only 30 times, so when "probability variation jackpot M" is reached, the time saving period is long. The probability of continuing is high (the probability of losing 30 times in a row in the 1/60 fall lottery is about 60%). Therefore, in the "renso mode 1", it is more advantageous to have a "probability change jackpot M" than a "normal jackpot F" or a "probability change jackpot L". On the other hand, it is unlikely that the 1/60 fall lottery will be missed 100 times in a row (about 19%). The jackpot F and the probabilistic jackpot L are more advantageous than the probabilistic jackpot M.

As the first hit type counter C2, "probability variation jackpot N" is associated with the range of "190 to 199". Of the 200 possible values of the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot N" is 10 from "190 to 199", so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 2 lottery. The probability of becoming a "probability change jackpot N" is 5% (10/200).

Like the "normal jackpot F" and the "probability jackpot L", the "probability change jackpot N" has four rounds, and the second specific winning opening 650a is set for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse) in each round. Or, since it is opened (until 5 balls are won), the player has a large number of prize balls (5 pieces x 10 prize balls x 4 rounds, 200) compared to the case where a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1. Can be obtained. In addition, after the end of "Probability change jackpot N", the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol, but the time saving period of the normal symbol is not given regardless of the game state at the time of winning. That is, if the "probability change jackpot N" is set regardless of whether it is the "preparation mode" or the "renso mode", the game state is set to the "normal mode". Therefore, if "Probability change jackpot N" is set in "Preparation mode" or any "Renso mode" ("Renso mode 1" or "Renso mode 2"), it will be changed to another jackpot type. In comparison, it is disadvantageous for the player.

In this way, in addition to changing whether or not the time saving period of the normal symbol is given depending on whether or not it is in the "normal mode", it depends on whether or not it is in the low probability state (non-probability change state) of the special symbol. By changing the number of time reductions given after the big hit, it is possible to have variations in a short period of time. In addition, by configuring the "renso mode 2" (non-probability change time reduction state) to be given a longer time reduction period than the "renso mode 1" (probability change time reduction state), the "renso mode" is in progress. In the case of the fall lottery, the game is performed in the "renso mode" with the expectation that the lottery result corresponding to the fall will be obtained (that is, the transition from the "renso mode 1" to the "renso mode 2"). be able to. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the time is shortened, the game can be performed in the hope that the probabilistic state of the special symbol will end early, so that more innovative game playability can be provided.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 105, the RAM 203 in the present embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the time saving flag 203j is provided in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 71 (b)). is doing. Other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment.

The time saving flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. When the time saving flag 203j is on, it indicates that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and when it is off, it indicates that the normal symbol is in the normal state. In addition to the time saving medium counter 203g for counting the time saving period of the normal symbol, this time saving flag 203j is provided until the next lottery result corresponding to the big hit or the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained. This is because a new jackpot type (probability variation jackpot J, M) that keeps the state is provided. In other words, since the jackpot type is provided in which the end timing of the short-term period is variable (the time-saving period is not fixed) depending on the timing of the next big hit or fall, the time-saving period of the normal symbol is accurate only with the time-saving medium counter 203g. This is because it cannot be grasped. Therefore, when the probability variation jackpot J or the probability variation jackpot M is reached, the time saving flag 203j is set to be on (see S4806 in FIG. 114). Then, when the lottery result corresponding to the big hit or the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained, the time saving flag 203j is turned off (see S4803, S4810, S4814 in FIG. 114).

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the transition conditions in the case of transitioning from one gaming state to another gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the state transition in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state), which is the most disadvantageous for the player (that is, the most difficult to shift to the "renso mode"), will be described. This "normal mode" is shown on the upper side of FIG. 106. As shown in FIG. 106, when a big hit is obtained in the "normal mode" or a lottery result corresponding to a fall is obtained by a fall lottery, the game shifts to another game state. In the present embodiment, the same first random number table 202a as in the second embodiment is defined in the ROM 202, so that the probability of hitting the special symbol in the probabilistic state of the special symbol is the same as in the first embodiment. Is 1/30.

In the "normal mode (probability change non-time saving state)", when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit, the "probability change jackpot I" is won at 85%, or the "probability change jackpot K" is won at 5%. After the end, the mode shifts to the "normal mode" (see the upper center of FIG. 106). That is, it loops the "normal mode". Even if the player wins the "probability jackpot I" or the "probability jackpot K", it is difficult for the player to get the prize ball, so he continues to win the "probability jackpot I" or the "probability jackpot K" ("normal mode"). If you keep looping), you will continue to consume the balls you have without getting the prize balls. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, when the "normal jackpot E" is won by 5% of the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state) after the jackpot ends (FIG. 106). See above). That is, since the state shifts to a state in which it is relatively easy to shift to the "consecutive villa state", it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by a jackpot, but it is more advantageous to the player than the "probability change jackpot I" and the "probability change jackpot K". Then, if it becomes a "probability change jackpot J" that wins at 5% of the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery, it is defined as "ream villa mode" (consecutive villa state) after the jackpot ends. Among the types of states, the mode shifts to "ream villa mode 1" (probability change time saving state) (see the upper left side of FIG. 106). In this "renso mode 1", as described above, it becomes easy to win a jackpot (probability variation jackpot L to N, and normal jackpot F) in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, which is the most advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery before the big hit of the special symbol (see Fig. 71 (a)), the "preparation mode" (non-probability change) that is relatively easy to shift to the "consecutive villa mode". It shifts to the non-time saving state (see the upper right side of FIG. 106).

In this way, in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state), even if a big hit is made, the same state (normal mode) is looped with a 90% probability, while the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery. In that case, it is configured to surely shift to the "preparation mode" which is more advantageous than the "normal mode". Therefore, the game will be played in the hope that the lottery result will correspond to the fall. In a general gaming machine, the game is played in the hope that the jackpot will continue during the probabilistic state, but in this pachinko machine 10, the game can be played while hoping that the probabilistic state will end early. , It is possible to provide a novel playability that other gaming machines do not have.

Next, the state transition in the "preparation mode" (non-probability non-time saving state), which is more advantageous for the player than the above-mentioned "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state) (easy to shift to the "renso mode"), will be described. .. This "preparation mode" is shown in the central portion of FIG. 106. As shown in FIG. 106, in the "preparation mode", only when a big hit occurs, the game shifts to another gaming state. As in the second embodiment, the probability of hitting the special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 37.5.

Even when a special symbol is a big hit in the "preparation mode", the state of transition after the end of the big hit is different depending on the big hit type, as in the probabilistic non-time saving state. As shown in FIG. 106, in the "preparation mode", when the "normal jackpot E" is won by 5% of the jackpots obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1, the "consecutive villa mode" (consecutive villa state) is reached after the jackpot ends. ), Of the two types of states defined as (), the mode shifts to "ream villa mode 2" (non-probability change non-time saving state) (see the central portion of FIG. 106). As described above, in this "renso mode 2", it is easy to win a big hit that can win a large amount of prize balls, and a relatively long time period (100 times) is easily given after the big hit. .. Therefore, it is difficult to win the prize ball with the "normal jackpot C" itself, but the player can be expected to win the mode of the prize ball by the "renso mode 2" set after that. It is possible to improve the interest in the game of the person.

In addition, if it becomes a "probability change jackpot I" that wins at 85% when a big hit is won by the special symbol 1 lottery, or a "probability change jackpot J" that wins at 5%, it is a "renso mode" (renso mode). Of the two types of states defined as (states), the mode shifts to the “consecutive villa mode 1” (probability variation time reduction state) (see the left side of the central portion in FIG. 106). For this reason, it is difficult to win a prize ball with the "probability change jackpot E" or the "probability change jackpot F" itself, but the player is expected to win a large amount of prize balls by the "renso mode" set after that. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, since the jackpot probability (1/30) in the probabilistic time-saving state is higher than the jackpot probability (1 / 37.5) in the non-probability non-time-saving state, the time-saving period elapses without becoming a jackpot in the "renso mode". It is unlikely that it will end ("Renso mode" will end). Therefore, it becomes a big hit in the "renso mode", and the expectation for getting a large number of prize balls can be further increased.

In this way, the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state) is a state in which the player shifts to the "ream villa mode" by hitting any of the jackpots, which is a relatively advantageous state for the player.

Next, the "ream villa mode 1" shown on the lower left side of FIG. 106 will be described. As described above, the "renso mode 1" is one of the advantageous states for the player, and it is easy to become a big hit type that can win a large amount of prize balls by becoming a big hit, and 2 again after the big hit is completed. There is a high possibility that one of the types, "Renso mode", will be set. Further, as compared with the "renso mode 2", there is a high possibility that a short time saving period will be set in the case of a big hit.

As shown on the lower left side of FIG. 106, in "Renso Mode 1", when a special symbol is a big hit, when the time saving period of a normal symbol set at the end of the previous big hit has passed, or by a fall lottery. If the lottery result corresponds to the fall, it shifts to another state.

Specifically, in the probabilistic time saving state, if it becomes the "probability change jackpot L" that wins at 85% when the special symbol 2 lottery wins, or the "probability change jackpot M" that wins at 5%, 4 rounds or A special game state of 8 rounds is given, and the player is set to the "consecutive villa mode 1" (changed time reduction state) again (see the lower left side of FIG. 106). That is, since the "consecutive villa mode 1" (consecutive villa state), which is advantageous for the player, loops, the player can be pleased. In addition, in "Renso Mode 1", the time saving period given when a big hit is made is relatively short (30 times), so it makes you feel uneasy about whether or not you will get a big hit before the time saving period ends. Can be done. Therefore, if the jackpot is as expected by the player, it is possible to have greater joy and a sense of accomplishment.

In addition, if it becomes "probability change jackpot N" that wins at 5% when it becomes a jackpot by lottery of special symbol 2, 4 rounds of special game state will be given, but after the jackpot ends, it will shift to "normal mode". Resulting in. That is, the state that is advantageous to the player shifts to the state that is most disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, when a big hit is made in the "renso mode 1", the player can watch the progress of the big hit while hoping that it is not the "probability change big hit N". Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a sense of tension even during the big hit.

When it becomes "normal jackpot F", which wins at 5% of the jackpot by lottery of special symbol 2, after 4 rounds of special game state is given, it shifts to "renso mode 2" (non-probability change time saving state). (Refer to the lower central part of FIG. 106). In addition, in the "ream villa mode 1", when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery executed for each fluctuation, the state shifts to the non-probability change time saving state in the same manner. As mentioned above, "mode 2" is more advantageous than "renso mode 1" (that is, it is easy to set a long time saving period when a big hit occurs), so when shifting to "renso mode 1", It is possible to play a game with the expectation that it will shift (rank up) to "Renso Mode 2".

On the other hand, when the time saving period of the normal symbol has elapsed in the "renso mode 1", the mode shifts to the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state). As mentioned above, in the "normal mode", it is difficult to win a prize ball even if it becomes a big hit, and it is configured so that the same state can be easily looped, which is disadvantageous to the player. .. Therefore, it is possible to have a player who plays a game in the "renso mode" play a game in the hope that he will win the next big hit before the time saving period of the normal symbol ends. In other words, it is possible to play a game while feeling a sense of tension in the "renso mode". Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the “consecutive villa mode 2” (non-probability variation time saving state) shown on the lower right side of FIG. 106 will be described. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 106, in the non-probability variation time saving state, when a special symbol jackpot occurs or when the time saving period of the normal symbol set at the end of the previous jackpot elapses, the state changes to another state. Transition.

Specifically, in the probabilistic time saving state, if it becomes the "probability change jackpot L" that wins at 85% when the lottery of the special symbol 2 wins, or the "probability change jackpot M" that wins at 5%, 4 rounds or 8 A special game state of the round is given, and after the end of the jackpot, it is set to the probability variation time saving state (see the lower center of FIG. 106). That is, since the mode shifts to the "ream villa mode 1" which is advantageous for the player, the player can be expected to win the jackpot again at short intervals.

In addition, when it becomes "probability change jackpot N" which wins at 5% when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of special symbol 2, it shifts to "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state) after being given a special game state of 4 rounds. (See the lower right side of FIG. 106). That is, since the most advantageous "ream villa mode 2" for the player ends and shifts to the "normal mode" which is disadvantageous for the player, the player becomes a big hit in the "ream villa mode 2". , You can watch the progress of the jackpot while hoping that it is not "probability change jackpot N". Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a sense of tension even during the big hit.

In addition, if the "normal jackpot F" is won by 5% of the jackpots obtained by the special symbol 2 lottery, the special game state of 4 rounds is given, and then the "renso mode 2" (non-probability change time saving state) is reached again. ) (See the lower center right side of FIG. 106). That is, since the "renso mode 2" (non-probability change time saving state), which is the most advantageous for the player, loops, the player can be pleased.

On the other hand, when the time saving period of the normal symbol has passed, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state). As mentioned above, in the "preparation mode", it is difficult to win a prize ball even if it becomes a big hit, but by becoming a big hit, either "renso mode" ("renso mode 1" or "renso mode") There is a high possibility of shifting to 2 ”). Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the mode will be changed to the "renso mode" again (the "renso mode" will be pulled back in a short period of time).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the fall lottery executed in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state) is the lottery result corresponding to the fall, the "ream villa mode" (ream). It is configured to shift to the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state) that makes it easy to shift to the villa state). Then, in the "preparation mode", when a big hit is made, there is a high possibility that the mode will shift to the "renso mode" after the big hit is completed. There are two types of states in this "renso mode", "renso mode 1" and "renso mode 2", and when "renso mode 2" becomes a big hit, a longer time period Is configured to be easy to set, which is advantageous for the player. Since the transition from "Renso mode 1" to "Renso mode 2" is mainly based on the lottery result corresponding to the fall, in "Renso mode 1", it is a big hit and corresponds to the fall. The game can be played with the expectation that the result will be a lottery.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 107, in the RAM 223 in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, a continuous villa state flag 223t and a look-ahead continuous villa state flag 223u are added.

The consecutive villa state flag 223t is a flag that is given when the probability variation jackpot J or the probability variation jackpot M is reached, and indicates whether or not it is the "consecutive villa mode 1" that continues until the next jackpot or a fall. be. If this consecutive villa state flag 223t is on, it means that it is "consecutive villa mode 1" given by becoming a probabilistic jackpot J or a probabilistic jackpot M, and if it is off, it means that it is in any other state ( It means that it is "normal mode", "preparation mode", "ream villa mode 2", or "ream villa mode 1" given after the probabilistic jackpot I, L). The consecutive villa state flag 223t is updated every time a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a jackpot is notified (S1742 in FIG. 117).

The look-ahead consecutive villa state flag 223u is "consecutive villa mode 1" given by becoming a probabilistic jackpot J or a probabilistic jackpot M at the time when the lottery is executed based on the winning information notified by the winning information command. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is. This look-ahead consecutive villa state flag 223u is set to on when it is determined that the winning information notified by the winning information command is the probability variation jackpot J or the probability variation jackpot M. Further, when the look-ahead consecutive villa state flag 223u is on and the winning information indicating the lottery result corresponding to the fall or the winning information corresponding to the big hit is notified, it is set to off.

Next, various display performances in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. First, with reference to FIG. 108, the advance notice effect executed in the "ream villa mode 1" in the present embodiment will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of "ream villa modes" are provided. Then, the transition from the "renso mode 1" to the more advantageous "renso mode 2" is triggered by the fact that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only when the winning information which is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is detected in the "normal mode", but also the winning information which is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is detected in the "renso mode 1". Even if it does, it is configured to execute a notice effect for notifying the fall. At least a long notice and a short notice are provided in the notice effect executed in the "renso mode 1".

FIG. 108 (a) is a time chart showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the variable effect to be executed and the advance notice effect to be set when the long advance notice is selected as the advance notice type of the advance notice effect. In this example, while the lottery result of the special symbol is out of alignment and the variable effect is being executed, the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is detected once, and then the winning information corresponding to the omission is detected once. The case where it is done is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 108 (a), when the long notice is selected, the character 801 is in the temple search mode (temple stage) over the fluctuation time of the two reserved balls held at the start of the next fluctuation. In, the treasure chest 807 is found, the treasure chest 807 is opened, and the key 817 is found (see FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b)). That is, as in the case where the long notice is set in the second embodiment, among the variable effects in which the notice effect is actually executed, the first variable effect (variable effect corresponding to hold 1) is already "continuous". Even if the mode has changed to the "villa mode 2", it was suspended at the start of the notice effect to notify the user that the mode has changed to the "consecutive mode 2" (character 801 discovers the key 817). It is a variable effect corresponding to the last reserved ball (variable effect corresponding to hold 2). When the effect of discovering the key 817 is performed, the effect of moving the character 801 to a different room is performed, and the back type is set to the back type (back surface J) corresponding to the "ream villa mode 2". As a result, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the mode has changed (mode up) from the "renso mode 1" to the "renso mode 2".

Regardless of the holding area where the holding ball that is the result of the lottery corresponding to the fall is held, it is possible to set the advance notice effect over the two holding balls of the fall (transition to "preparation mode"). This is because the operations of the electric accessory 640a, the first specific winning opening 65a, and the second specific winning opening 650a do not change at all before and after. On the other hand, for example, in the case of a big hit, if the notice effect is set for all the reserved balls, the big hit may be started in the middle of the notice effect, and the notice effect is completed until the end. There is a risk that the result of the production will be grasped by the player without confirmation. Therefore, it may not be possible to fully enjoy the advance notice production.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 that shifts to a state advantageous for the player when the short-time period of the normal symbol ends, as in the first embodiment, the holding ball corresponding to the short-term end of the normal symbol In the case of being held, the same problem as described above occurs even when the advance notice effect over all the reserved balls is executed regardless of the end timing of the normal symbol for a short period of time. That is, since the operation control of the electric accessory 640a is changed before and after the end of the normal symbol for a short period of time, the player can grasp the result of the advance notice effect only by observing the operation of the electric accessory 640a. That is, it may not be possible to fully enjoy the advance notice production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the player falls (shifts) from the "renso mode 1" to the "renso mode 2", the probability that the special symbol will be a big hit will change before and after the state transition (1). / 30 → 1 / 37.5) only. That is, it is not possible to determine whether the electric accessory 640a is in the "normal mode" or the "preparation mode" from the appearance of the operation. In addition, in the present embodiment, a game method of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 is assumed in both the “renso mode 1” and the “renso mode 2”. Therefore, even if the timing of notifying the transition to the "renso mode 2" (fall) is delayed, the player will not suffer any disadvantage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a notice effect is set for all the reserved balls regardless of the reserved area in which the reserved balls that are the lottery results corresponding to the transition (fall) to the "renso mode 2" are stored. By configuring such as, it is possible to execute a notice effect over a larger number of variable effects. As a result, the degree of freedom of the advance notice production can be improved, so that it is difficult to predict the result of the production, and it is possible to realize a more interesting display production.

In this embodiment, the same effect as the long notice effect is executed, but the treasure box 807 is empty and the room cannot be moved. As in the case of staying in the "normal mode" in the second embodiment, this ghost effect is executed in a part when the winning information corresponding to the lottery result that does not fall is detected. As a result, if the result of the advance notice effect is not confirmed to the end, it is difficult to determine whether or not to shift to the "renso mode 2", so that the player can confirm the advance notice effect more interestingly. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108 (b), an example in which the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall (transition to the “renso mode 2”) is notified and the short notice is selected as the notice type. Will be described.

FIG. 108 (b) shows the lottery result corresponding to the fall after detecting the winning information corresponding to the loss three times while the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the variable effect in the “normal mode”. It is a figure exemplifying the case where the winning information is detected once. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is notified and the short notice is selected, the first of the reserved balls held at the start of the next fluctuation is executed. In the variable effect to be performed, a notice effect (mode-up effect) in which the character 801 finds the key 817 from the treasure box 807 is executed. That is, among the variable effects in which the advance notice effect is actually executed, the first variable effect (variable effect corresponding to hold 1) remains in "renso mode 2", and then two variable effects. If is not executed, it is notified that the mode has been changed to the "renso mode 2" in the first variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the hold 1) even though the transition to the "renso mode 2" is not performed. This means that even if the notification timing is advanced, the winning information (various counter values acquired at the time of starting winning) that is held before and after the notification does not change, and the variable effect corresponding to all holdings is produced. This is because the mode always shifts to the "ream villa mode 2" by the end. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the "renso mode 1" and the "renso mode 2" are configured so as to be impossible (difficult) to be distinguished from the operation of the electric accessory 640a or the like. Therefore, even if the timing of the transition to the "renso mode 1" and the timing of notifying the transition to the "renso mode 2" are different, the player cannot recognize the difference. In this way, by accelerating the timing of notifying the transition to the "renso mode 2", it is possible to notify the player earlier that the transition to the "renso mode 2" is more advantageous for the player. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the period of the "ream villa mode 2" is longer than the original period, and thus it is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game.

Next, the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111. First, referring to FIG. 109, when transitioning from the "preparation mode" to any of the "ream villa modes" in the present embodiment (that is, when the jackpot is a jackpot other than the probabilistic jackpots K and N in the "preparation mode"). ) Will be described.

As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of states (“renso mode 1” and “renso mode 2”) are provided as the “renso mode”, and the “renso mode 1” is more “successful” than the “renso mode 1”. The "Renso Mode 2" is configured to be more advantageous to the player. That is, in the "renso mode 2", when a big hit is made, a long time saving period is likely to be given, so that the expectation that the big hit will be made again in a short time after the big hit is increased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the "preparation mode", not only whether or not to shift to the "renso mode", but also whether there is a high possibility of shifting to the "renso mode 1", "renso mode 2". It is configured to suggest by directing whether there is a high possibility of shifting to. After that, the production to suggest that there is a high possibility of shifting to "Renso mode 1" is referred to as "Renso mode notice production A", and there is a high possibility of shifting to "Renso mode 2". The production to suggest is called "Renso mode notice production B".

FIG. 109 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the “renso mode notice effect A”. This "Renso mode notice production A" is a jackpot type (probability change jackpot I, probability change jackpot J, etc.) in which the winning information notified by the winning information command shifts to "Renso mode 1" in the "preparation mode". This is an effect that is executed when the player wins the lottery of the Gase effect, which is drawn with a certain probability (for example, 1/25) during the "preparation mode".

As shown in FIG. 109, when the "renso mode notice effect A" is executed, the character 801 and the monster 802 are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and behind the monster 802 (third symbol display device). The temple 811 is displayed on the right side of the front view at 81). In addition, a display area 812 on which the characters "Win the battle and enter the temple!" Is displayed is displayed above the front view of the third symbol display device 81. According to these display contents, when the character 801 wins the monster 802 against the player, the character 801 rushes into the temple 811 displayed behind the monster 802 and enters the temple search mode (that is, "ream villa mode"). It is possible to easily recognize the transition to.

Further, as in the other effects, in the third symbol display device 81, a small area Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls is displayed in the upper left of the front view, and a third symbol lottery result showing the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in the upper right of the front view. A small area Ds2 for displaying the variation display of the symbol is displayed.

Although not shown, in the present embodiment, instead of executing the effect of the character 801 and the monster 802 fighting as the "ream villa mode notice effect A", the "preparation" is performed from the "normal mode". The effect when shifting (falling) to the "mode" is a different form of effect. Specifically, for example, an effect of searching for the cave 803 in the forest is executed, and if the cave 803 can be found, an effect of notifying the transition to the "preparation mode" is executed. The same effect is used when transitioning from "normal mode" to "preparation mode" and from "renso mode 1" to "renso mode 2" (character 801 and monster 802 battle). This is because there is a risk that the player will be confused if the configuration is such that the above is executed. In other words, the player who played the game thinking that if he wins the battle, he / she will shift to the "renso mode", confirms the effect that he / she wins the battle and shifts from the "normal mode" to the "preparation mode". You may be confused by the fact that you did not switch to "mode". On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the effect of winning the battle is generated only when the player shifts to the "renso mode" which is advantageous for the player, the effect that is easy for the player to understand is provided. be able to. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109 (b), the “consecutive villa mode notice effect B” will be described. FIG. 109 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the “renso mode notice effect B”. This "Renso mode notice production B" is when the winning information notified by the winning information command is a jackpot type (normal jackpot E, etc.) that shifts to "Renso mode 2" in the "preparation mode". This is an effect that is executed when a lottery for a Gase effect that is drawn with a certain probability (for example, 1/100) is won in the "preparation mode".

As shown in FIG. 109, when the "renso mode notice effect B" is executed, the character 801 and the monster 816 are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and behind the monster 802 (third symbol display device). The temple 811 is displayed on the right side of the front view at 81). In addition, a display area 812 on which the characters "Win the battle and enter the temple!" Is displayed is displayed above the front view of the third symbol display device 81. According to these display contents, when the character 801 defeats the monster 816 against the player, the character 801 rushes into the temple 811 displayed behind the monster 816 and enters the temple search mode (that is, "ream villa mode"). It is possible to easily recognize the transition to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the monster 816 that battles with the character 801 in the "renso mode notice production B" looks weaker than the monster 802 in the "renso mode notice production A". Become. That is, it has no claws, fangs, or horns, and its physique is one size smaller than that of the monster 802. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that a special effect in which the character 801 is more likely to win is executed as compared with the “renso mode notice effect A”. In addition, Gase's (that is, character 801 is defeated) "Renso mode notice effect B" is configured so that the probability of being executed is lower than that of Gase's "Renso mode notice effect A". .. As a result, the degree of expectation for the "renso mode notice production B" can be increased. It is unlikely to occur in the ghost, and if you win the monster 816, you will shift to "Renso mode 2", which is the most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, you can have a greater sense of expectation. Therefore, since it is possible to pay attention to the result of the "renso mode notice effect B", it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111, the display contents in the "consecutive villa mode" in the present embodiment will be described. In the "ream villa mode 1" in the present embodiment, a screen in which the character 801 searches for the temple is displayed as in the "ream villa mode" (see FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b)) in the second embodiment. .. Further, as in the second embodiment, the effect of notifying whether or not the character is a big hit is executed depending on whether or not the character 801 finds the treasure in the treasure box 807. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, two states of "ream villa mode 1" and "ream villa mode 2" are provided, and the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained from the "ream villa mode 1". It differs from the second embodiment in that it shifts to the advantageous "renso mode 2". For this reason, there is an effect when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the "renso mode 1".

FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect executed when a lottery result corresponding to a fall is obtained in the "ream villa mode 1". As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the winning information that is the lottery result corresponding to the fall is detected in the "renso mode 1", the character 801 discovers the treasure box 812 in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed, and a display area 812 in which the characters "Treasure chest found !!" is written is displayed on the upper part of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as in the "ream villa mode" in the second embodiment, a display area 818 for displaying the remaining number of time reductions is displayed on the right side of the front view with respect to the character 801. In the example of FIG. 110A, the case where the effect of discovering the treasure box 812 is executed with the remaining number of time reductions being 25 times is illustrated, and the characters "25 times" are displayed in the display area 818. Has been done.

As in the case of other display effects (notice effects), in the third symbol display device 81, a small area Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls is displayed in the upper left of the front view, and a special symbol is displayed in the upper right of the front view. A small area Ds2 for displaying the variable display of the third symbol showing the lottery result is displayed.

After displaying the effect of finding the treasure box 807 shown in FIG. 110 (a), the effect of finding the key 817 is executed by opening the treasure box 807 found by the character 801 (see FIG. 110 (b)). Further, a display area 812 in which the characters "Key of the back room GET !!" is written is displayed above the front view of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that he / she moves to the back room (modes up to “renso mode 2”). Note that 110 (b) illustrates an effect executed in the next variable effect of the effect of discovering the treasure box 807 shown in FIG. 110 (a). That is, it is a figure exemplifying the state in which the time saving period is reduced once from the state shown in FIG. 110 (a). Therefore, in the display area 818 displayed on the right side of the front view with respect to the character 801, the character "24 times", which is subtracted once from the "25 times" displayed in FIG. 110 (a), is described. ing.

Here, as described above, when a big hit occurs in "Renso Mode 1", the effect of discovering the treasure from the treasure box 807 is executed, and when it is neither a big hit nor a fall, the contents of the treasure box 807 are empty. The production is executed. Therefore, at the stage when the effect of discovering the treasure box 807 is executed, it is an effect that suggests a big hit, an effect that suggests a transition (fall) to the "renso mode 2", or a mere ghost effect. Since it can be difficult to determine whether or not, the result of the production can be observed more interestingly. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

Further, depending on the number of remaining time reductions (the remaining period of the "renso mode 1"), it is possible to request that the treasure appear from the treasure box 807 or that the key 817 appears. In other words, if the lottery result corresponds to the fall, the remaining time saving period itself does not change, so even if you shift to "Renso Mode 2" in a situation where the remaining time saving period is short, it will not be a big hit. There is a high possibility that the time saving period will elapse. Therefore, in this case, when the treasure is found in the treasure box 807 (becomes a big hit), it can be expected that the prize ball will be obtained once and a new time saving period will be given. On the other hand, in the situation where the remaining time saving period is sufficient, even if you shift to "Renso mode 2" first, you can expect to be a big hit enough during the subsequent time saving period, so treasure chest 807 It can be expected that the key 817 will be discovered from. In this way, it is possible to make different things (treasure or key 817) that you want to appear from the treasure box 807 according to the remaining number of time reductions. That is, there can be a case where the player is happy to be notified of the fall rather than the big hit, and a case where the player is happy to be notified of the big hit rather than the fall. Therefore, when the result is as expected by the player, the player can have a greater sense of joy and accomplishment.

Next, the display contents in the “renso mode 2” will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (a). As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the rear image is changed in the "ream villa mode 2". Specifically, a torch is installed on the pillar of the temple, and the letters "CHANGE" are displayed on the pillar. Further, on the upper part of the third symbol display device 81, a display area 812 in which the characters "A great chance to find a treasure !?" is displayed is displayed. Further, in the display area 806 provided at the lower part of the third symbol display device 81, a substantially circular display area 818 in which the character "super" is written is displayed on the upper left of the character "temple search mode". .. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the person is staying in the "renso mode 2", which is more advantageous than the "renso mode 1". Further, similarly to the "renso mode 1", the remaining time saving period (the remaining period of the "renso mode 2") is displayed on the display area 818 displayed on the right side of the front view with respect to the character 801. In the example of FIG. 111, the characters "23 times" are displayed as the remaining time saving period.

The display content in the "ream villa mode 2" is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily determined as long as it can suggest that it is more advantageous than the "ream villa mode 1". For example, the pillars and floor may be gold, or the pillars and floor may be configured to display an image in which jewels are embedded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111 (b), in the "consecutive villa mode 1" which is given after the end of the "probability change jackpot J, M" and continues until the next jackpot or the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained. An example of the display effect to be executed will be described. In "Renso Mode 1", which is given after the end of "Probability change jackpot J, M", if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is reached before the jackpot, unlike other "Renso Mode 1", a special design Not only the probable change state of, but also the time saving period of the normal symbol is configured to end. Therefore, when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained, the state shifts to the non-probability change non-time saving state (that is, "preparation mode").

FIG. 111B is an example of a case where the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the “renso mode 1” given after the end of the “probability change jackpot J, M”. As shown in FIG. 111 (b), when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained before the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot, the display effect in which the character 801 falls into the pit 820 is displayed immediately after the start of the fluctuation. At the same time, a display area 812 in which the characters "Fall into the cave !!" is written is displayed on the upper part of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the player has shifted to the "preparation mode" due to the fall.

Further, the characters "left-handed" are displayed in the elliptical area displayed on the left side of the display area 806 provided in the lower part of the third symbol display device 81. Of these, the character "left" is displayed with more emphasis than the other characters. This elliptical area was displayed to suggest (navigate) the launch direction of the ball by displaying the characters "Right-handed" while staying in "Renso Mode 1". The player can easily recognize that the shift to the "preparation mode" requires the player to return to the left-handed strike.

Further, in the central portion of the display area 806, the characters "temple search" and the highlighted characters "interruption" are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the temple stage indicating the "renso mode 1" is interrupted. Further, in the elliptical area displayed on the right side of the display area 806, the characters "Fall into the cave !!" are displayed. That is, in "Renso Mode 1", the characters in the area where the characters "Right-handed" are displayed are replaced with "Fall into the cave !!". As a result, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize that the transition to the "preparation mode" has occurred.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process of the third embodiment, which is executed instead of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 91) in the second embodiment.

Of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 112), in each of the processes S601 to S607, S609 to S618, S622 to S625, S633, and S634, the ordinary symbol variation processing in the second embodiment (see FIG. 91). The same processes as those of S601 to S607, S609 to S618, S622 to S625, S633, and S634 are executed.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing in the third embodiment, when the processing of S607 is completed, it is then determined whether the time saving medium counter 203g is larger than 0 or the time saving flag 203j is on (S641). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time-saving state. Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, the time saving state of the normal symbol may continue from the end of the jackpot until the result of the lottery corresponding to the next jackpot or the fall. Specifically, it is the case where the probability variation jackpot J (see FIG. 103) or the probability variation jackpot M (see FIG. 104) is reached. In such a case, instead of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g, the time saving flag 203j is turned on to indicate that the normal symbol is in the time saving state. Therefore, in the process of S641, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state of the normal symbol by determining the state of the time saving flag 203j in addition to the value of the time saving medium counter 203g. ..

If the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 or more in the processing of S641 or the time saving flag 203j is on (S641: Yes), the processing is shifted to S609, the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0, and the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0. If the time saving flag 203j is off (S641: No), the process shifts to S611. As described above, in each of the processes S609 to S613, the same process as each process of S609 to S613 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 91) in the second embodiment is executed.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing in the present embodiment, when the processing of S613 is completed, the same processing as the processing of S641 is executed. That is, it is determined whether the time saving / medium counter 203g is larger than 0 or the time saving flag 203j is on (S642). If the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 or more in the processing of S642, or if the time saving flag 203j is on (S642: Yes), the processing is shifted to S615, the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0, and the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0. If the time saving flag 203j is off (S641: No), the process shifts to S617. As described above, in each of the processes S615 to S618, the same process as each process of S615 to S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 91) in the second embodiment is executed.

Further, in the normal symbol variation process in the present embodiment, when any of the processes S616 to S618 is completed, the same process as the process in S641 is executed. That is, it is determined whether the time saving / medium counter 203g is larger than 0 or the time saving flag 203j is on (S643). If it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 or more in the processing of S643, or the time saving flag 203j is turned on (S643: Yes), the processing is shifted to S633, and the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0. If there is and the time saving flag 203j is off (S643: No), the process shifts to S634. As described above, in each of the processes of S633 and S634, the same processes as those of S633 and S634 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 91) in the second embodiment are executed, respectively.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time saving medium counter 203g and the time saving flag 203j are discriminated, and it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state of the normal symbol. Accurate discrimination can be performed regardless of the type of jackpot that triggered the transition to the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the jackpot control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. 2 (S1031) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1031) in the third embodiment.

In each of the jackpot control processes 2 (see FIG. 113), S1101 to S1111, the same processes as those of S1101 to S1111 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment are executed. ..

Further, in the jackpot control process 2 (S1031) in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1111 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1111: No), it is a process for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. The setting process at the end is executed (S1121), and this process is terminated. The details of this end-time setting process (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned end-time setting process (S1121). In this end-time setting process (S1121), first, it is determined whether the current jackpot is one of "probability variation jackpot K, N" (S4801). Then, when it is determined that it is either "probability change jackpot K or N" (S4801), it is a jackpot type that shifts to the probability variation non-time saving state (that is, "normal mode") after the jackpot (FIG. 103, FIG. (See FIG. 104), the probability variation flag 203f is set to on (S4802), the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is reset to 0, and the time saving flag 203j is set to off (S4803), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, when it is determined that the current jackpot is neither "probability change jackpot K" nor "probability variation jackpot N" (S4801: No), then this jackpot is "probability variation jackpot J, M". It is determined whether or not it is either (S4804). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type (see FIGS. 103 and 104) is given the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot or the lottery result corresponding to the fall. In the processing of S4804, if it is determined to be either "probability change jackpot J, M" (S4804: Yes), the probability change flag 203f is set to on (S4805), and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is reset to 0. At the same time, the time saving flag 203j is set to ON (S4806) to end this process.

Further, in the processing of S4804, if it is determined that the current jackpot is neither "probability change jackpot J, M" (S4804: No), then this jackpot is either "probability variation jackpot I, L". It is determined whether or not there is (S4807). Then, when it is determined that it is either "probability change jackpot I or L" (S4807: Yes), the probability variation flag 203f is set to on in order to set the state after the jackpot to the probability variation state of the special symbol. (S4808), the process shifts to S4810. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot this time is neither "probability jackpot I" nor "probability variation jackpot L" (S4807: No), the jackpot type this time is either "normal jackpot E or F". Means. That is, since it is a big hit in which the special symbol becomes a low probability state after the big hit, the probability variation flag 203f is set to off (S4809), and the process shifts to S4810.

In the processing of S4810 executed after the processing of S4807 or S4809, the time saving flag 203f is set to off (S4810). The processing of S4810 is performed only in the case of "normal jackpot E, F" and "probability variable jackpot L, M", and a short period of time is set to continue until the next jackpot or the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained. Because it will not be done.

When the processing of S4810 is completed, the game state at the time of the big hit this time is read out (S4811). As a method of determining the game state, for example, a dedicated flag may be prepared and its value may be read out. More specifically, a flag is provided to indicate whether or not the state at the time of the big hit is the probabilistic state of the special symbol and whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (for example, the probabilistic non-time saving state). Is set as "00H", "01H" is set for the probable change time saving state, and "02H" is set as the flag value for the non-probable change state). It may be configured to hold until it is executed.

When the processing of S4811 is completed, it is determined whether or not the read game state at the time of winning is the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S4812), and if it is determined that the game state is not the probabilistic state (S4812: No), "Preparation". Since it means that the jackpot has been achieved in the "mode" or the "ream villa mode 2", 100 is set for the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203 g (S4813), and this process is terminated. A common value (that is, 100) can be set without discriminating the jackpot type, which may lead to the processing of S4813 ("normal jackpot E, F", and "probability variable jackpot I,". In any of L "), if a big hit is made in" preparation mode "or" consecutive villa mode 2 "(that is, non-probability change state), 100 times of time saving period will be given in common. This is because it is configured (see FIGS. 103 and 104). In "normal jackpot E, F" and "probability variable jackpot I, L", the processing can be simplified by sharing the time saving period given after the jackpot ends. That is, it is not necessary to further determine the jackpot type and specify the number of time reductions after specifying the game state at the time of the jackpot, so that the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4812, when it is determined that the state is in the probabilistic state (S4812: No), then it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of the big hit is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S4814). ). That is, it is determined whether it is in the probabilistic time saving state (that is, "ream villa mode 1") or in the probabilistic non-time saving state (that is, "normal mode"). In the processing of S4814, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (that is, "ream villa mode 1") (S4814: Yes), 30 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203g (S4815). , End this process.

In this way, in the processing of S4814, it is possible to set a common value (that is, 30) without discriminating the jackpot type, which is the jackpot type (“normal jackpot E,” which may lead to the processing of S4815. In either case of "F" and "Probability change jackpot I, L"), if a jackpot is achieved in "Renso mode 1" (probability change time reduction state), 30 time reduction periods will be given in common. (See FIGS. 103 and 104). In "normal jackpot E, F" and "probability variable jackpot I, L", the processing can be simplified by sharing the time saving period given after the jackpot ends. That is, it is not necessary to further determine the jackpot type and specify the number of time reductions after specifying the game state at the time of the jackpot, so that the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S4814, when it is determined that the time saving period of the normal symbol is not (S4814: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is reset to 0 (S4816), and this processing is terminated. A common value (that is, 0) can be set without discriminating the jackpot type, which may lead to the processing of S4815 (“normal jackpot E, F”, and “probability variable jackpot I,”. This is because, in any of the cases (L)), when a big hit occurs in the “normal mode” (that is, the probabilistic non-time saving state), the time saving period is not commonly given (FIG. 103, FIG. (See FIG. 104). In "normal jackpot E, F" and "probability variable jackpot I, L", the processing can be simplified by sharing the time saving period given after the jackpot ends. That is, it is not necessary to further determine the jackpot type and specify the number of time reductions after specifying the game state at the time of the jackpot, so that the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the time saving flag 203j is provided separately from the probability variation flag 203f and the time saving medium counter 203g, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, among the bits constituting the time-saving / medium-time counter 203g, an empty bit that is not used for the time-short-term counting may be used to realize the same function as the probability variation flag 203f. That is, by setting 1 to the free bit, it indicates that the time is shortened until the next big hit or the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained, and 0 is set to the free bit in the states other than the above. It may be configured as follows. As a result, the probability variation flag 203f can be omitted, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 118. First, the hit-back back setting process 3 (S1441) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 115. The hit-back back setting process 3 (S1441) is a process executed in place of the hit-back back setting process 2 (see FIG. 94) in the second embodiment in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113.

Of the hit-back back setting process 3 (S1441), the processes S1501 and S1527 to S1532 are the same as the hit-back back setting process 2 (see FIG. 94) S1501, S1527 to S1532 in the second embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed.

Further, in the hit-back back setting process 3 (S1441) in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1501 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1501: Yes), it is either the probability variation jackpot K or N. Whether or not it is determined (S1541). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot type that shifts to a probability variation non-time saving state (that is, "normal mode") after the end of the jackpot, and if it is a probability variation jackpot K, N (S1541: Yes), "normal mode". In order to set the forest stage (that is, set to the back surface C), the process shifts to S1530.

On the other hand, in the process of S1541 when it is determined that neither the probability variation jackpot K nor N is present (S1541: No), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot J or M is either (S1542). That is, after the end of the jackpot, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is the next jackpot or the jackpot to which the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the fall is given. In the processing of S1542, if it is determined that it is either the probability variation jackpot J or M (S1542: Yes), the processing is shifted to S1544, and when the jackpot ends, the back type The back setting process at the time of consecutive villas for setting is executed (S1544), and the process shifts to S1532. The details of the back setting process (S1544) at the time of consecutive villas will be described later with reference to FIG. 116.

In the processing of S1542, when it is determined that neither the probability variation jackpot J nor M is (S1542: No), it is determined whether the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is larger than 0 or the consecutive villa state flag 223t is on. Determine (S1543). That is, when it is determined whether or not it is a big hit during the time saving period of the normal symbol, and it is determined that the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is larger than 0 or the consecutive villa state flag 223t is on (S1543). : Yes), the process shifts to S1544.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1543, if the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is 0 and it is determined that the consecutive villa state flag 223t is off (S1543: No), is the probability change state flag 223k turned on? Whether or not it is determined (S1523). That is, it is determined whether it is a probabilistic non-time saving state (normal mode) or a non-probable non-time saving state (preparation mode), and if the probabilistic state flag 223k is off (S1523: No), the probabilistic change is made in the "preparation mode". It means that it has become either jackpot I, L, or normal jackpot E, F, and after the jackpot, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, shifts to the "renso mode"), so the process goes to S1544. And migrate.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a back setting process (S1544) for setting the back type when the end of the jackpot is in the “renso mode” will be described. In this back setting process (S1544) at the time of consecutive villas, first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of either the normal jackpot E or F (S4901), and if it is neither the normal jackpot E or F (S4901 :). No), a display rear image change command for setting the rear I (see FIG. 110), which is the rear type corresponding to the "renso mode 1", because it means that the mode shifts to the "renso mode 1". (S4902), set 02H, which is a value indicating that the back surface I has been set for the back surface flag 223 g (S4903), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4901, when it is determined that it is usually either jackpot E or F (S4901: Yes), it means that "ream villa mode 2" is set after the jackpot ends, so "ream". A display rear image change command for setting the rear J (see FIG. 111) corresponding to the "villa mode 2" is set (S4904), and the rear J is set for the rear flag 223g. The indicated value 03H is set (S4905), and this process ends.

By executing this back setting process (S1544) at the time of consecutive villas, depending on the type of "continuous villa mode" after the end of the big hit (whether it is "continuous villa mode 1" or "continuous villa mode 2"). Since an appropriate back type can be set, the player can easily know the state after the jackpot is completed.

Next, the variation pattern selection process 3 (S1631) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117. This variation pattern selection process 3 (S1631) is executed in place of the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 96) in the command determination process (see FIG. 95), and is the same as the variation pattern command process 2 (see FIG. 96). In addition, it is a process for extracting the fluctuation pattern type from the received fluctuation pattern command.

In each of the fluctuation pattern selection processes 3 (S1631), S1701, S1721 to S1724, and S1731, S1701, S1721 to S1724, and S1731 of the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 96) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of is executed.

Further, in the variation pattern selection process 3 (S1631) of the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot (S1701: Yes), then The probability change state flag 223k, the consecutive villa state flag 223t, and the consecutive villa state counter 223m are read out (S1741). Then, the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m and the consecutive villa state flag 223t are updated based on the game state specified from each read value and the jackpot type (S1742).

For example, if the game state specified from each value read in the process of S1741 is the probability variation time saving state and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot L, the time reduction period is given 30 times after the jackpot ends, so that the consecutive villa state counter The value of 223m is set to 30, and the consecutive villa state flag 223t is set to off. Further, for example, if the game state specified by each read value is a probabilistic non-time saving state and the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot J, the next jackpot will be the next jackpot after the jackpot ends, or a lottery corresponding to a fall will be made. Since the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the result is given, the consecutive villa state flag 223t is set to on, and the value of the consecutive villa state counter 223m is cleared to 0. When the processing of S142 is completed, the processing shifts to S1722.

Next, the advance notice start flag setting process 2 (S4321) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118. The advance notice start flag setting process 2 (S4321) is a process executed in place of the advance notice start flag setting process (see FIG. 100) in the second embodiment in the continuous advance notice execution determination process, and is a process to be executed according to the advance notice type. This is a process for setting the corresponding value for the advance notice start flag 223p. In this embodiment, the advance notice start flag 223p is configured to identify the advance notice type of the advance notice effect to be executed in the "renso mode 1". That is, it is used to identify the type of advance notice effect as to whether or not the mode is upgraded from "renso mode 1" to "renso mode 2".

In each of the notice start flag setting processes 2 (S4321), S4401 to S4408, the same processes as those of S4401 to S4408 of the notice start flag setting process (see FIG. 100) in the second embodiment are performed respectively. Will be executed.

Further, in the advance notice start flag setting process (S4321) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s is 0 in the process of S4401 (S4401: No), the look-ahead consecutive villa state flag 223u is set. It is determined whether or not it is on (S4411), and if it is on (S4411: Yes), one of the "consecutive villa modes" is executed at the time when the lottery based on the winning information notified by the winning information command is executed. This means that there is a possibility of executing a notice effect (see FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b)) that suggests that the mode is changed from "ream villa mode 1" to "ream villa mode 2". , The process shifts to S4402.

On the other hand, when the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state counter 223s is 0 (S4401: No) and the look-ahead consecutive villa state flag 223u is off (S4411), it means that the mode is "normal mode" or "preparation mode". This means that there is no possibility of executing a notice effect (see FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b)) that suggests the transition from "ream villa mode 1" to "ream villa mode 2", so the notice start flag This process ends as it is without setting 223p.

As described above, in the notice start flag setting process 2 in the present embodiment, the value of the look-ahead consecutive villa state flag 223u indicates whether or not it is in a short period of time that continues until the next big hit or the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained. Can be determined based on. Therefore, when the winning information indicating the result of the lottery house corresponding to the fall is notified, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the user is in the "consecutive villa mode 1" and determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the “renso mode” which is advantageous for the player is the “renso mode 1” and the “renso mode 1” which is more advantageous than the “renso mode 1”. "Mode 2" is provided. More specifically, when a big hit is made in "Renso Mode 2", a longer time saving period is set as the time saving period of the ordinary symbol given after the big hit as compared with the case where the big hit is made in "Renso Mode 1". It is configured to be easy to do. Therefore, if a big hit is made in "Renso Mode 2", there is a high possibility that the big hit will be won in a short period of time after the big hit. That is, since there is a high possibility that a large number of prize balls can be obtained in succession, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the "renso mode 1". As a result, not only in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state), but also in the "renso mode 1" (probability change time saving state), the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained, and the state shifts to a better state (rank). It is possible to provide a novel playability.

Further, in the present embodiment, a fall is suggested when the transition from the "renso mode 1" to the "renso mode 2" and when it is determined that the production of the ghost is executed in the "renso mode 1". It is configured to perform a notice effect to do so. By executing this advance notice effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player will shift to the "renso mode 2", which is a more advantageous state, and thus improve the player's interest in the game. can do. In addition, in this notice production, it is possible to shift the timing of notifying the transition (fall) to the "renso mode 2" and the timing of actually shifting (falling) to the "renso mode 2". is doing. That is, when it is determined by pre-reading that the winning information corresponding to the fall is held, the transition to the "renso mode 2" is notified even before the variable effect corresponding to the winning information is executed. It is configured so that the effect to be performed can be executed. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the player has become the most advantageous "renso mode 2" earlier than it should be, so that the player can feel that he / she has been in the "renso mode 2" for a long time. can. Therefore, by making the advantageous state feel long, it is possible to easily have a good impression on the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the variation effect corresponding to the fall is executed, if a plurality of variation effects to be executed after the change are reserved, the notification during the variation effect corresponding to the fall is not performed. , The transition to the "renso mode 2" can be notified by a continuous effect over the variable effect executed after the variable effect. As a result, the advance notice effect for notifying the fall can be executed over more variable effects, so that the degree of freedom of the advance notice effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a big hit is made in "Renso Mode 1", a treasure is found from the treasure box 807, and when a lottery result corresponding to a fall is obtained in "Renso Mode 1", a treasure box is used. Although it was configured to perform the effect of discovering the key 817 from 807, the notification modes of the jackpot and the fall are not limited to these, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, if the door is found on the temple stage, a jackpot will be given if the door is a treasure room, and a room with an interior that corresponds to "Renso Mode 2" (see Fig. 111) will be dropped. Each may be notified. In addition, the same effect (for example, the effect of finding a treasure from the treasure box 807) may be performed for the jackpot and the lottery result corresponding to the fall. That is, whether it is a big hit until it is confirmed whether the big hit is started after the notice production is finished or whether it is changed to the back type (back J) corresponding to the "ream villa mode 2" or "ream villa mode 2". It may be configured so that it cannot be determined (it becomes difficult). As a result, it is not possible to know whether or not the result will be as expected by the player until the notice production ends and the next fluctuation or jackpot starts, so that the player's expectation can be maintained for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, the effect of finding the treasure box 807 is displayed in common in the case of a big hit in "Renso Mode 1", the case of the lottery result corresponding to the fall, and the case of executing the Gase effect. It was configured so that the player could recognize the result of the production (whether it was a hit, a fall, or a crap) depending on what was finally found in the treasure chest 807. That is, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the result of the effect until the result of the effect is confirmed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the result of the effect may be predicted to some extent in the middle of the effect. Specifically, for example, in the case of a big hit, the treasure box 807 is configured so that a larger treasure box can be easily displayed than in the case of other productions, and in the case of a fall, a treasure box made of a different material (for example, made of gold) is easily displayed. May be configured so that is easily displayed, and in the case of a ghost, a normal size and wooden treasure box may be easily displayed. By facilitating the display of different display modes according to the result of the effect, the player can predict the result of the effect during the advance notice effect, so that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the result. In addition, by providing a mode (normal size and wooden treasure box) that is easily selected in the case of Gase, it is possible to prevent an excessive sense of expectation in the case of Gase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged even if the result of the advance notice effect is disappointing, and it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. In addition, if a mode that is easy to select in the case of Gase (normal size and wooden treasure box) is selected in the advance notice production that results in something other than Gase, it gives the player greater joy and surprise. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the "renso mode 1", only the transition to the "renso mode 2" is made, and the time saving period itself that has passed up to that point does not change. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the mode shifts to the "renso mode 2", the time saving period may be added a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). As a result, even if the transition from "renso mode 1" to "renso mode 2" is made just before the end of the short period (for example, the time reduction period is two times remaining), the "renso mode 2" can be set. It is possible to prevent the time saving period from ending without benefiting. Therefore, the joy of becoming the "renso mode 2" can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game in the "renso mode".

In the present embodiment, in both the "renso mode 1" and the "renso mode 2", the time saving period of the normal symbol (that is, the remaining period of the "renso mode") is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, it is not limited to this. It is not necessary to display the time saving period of the normal symbol, or it may be configured to display a period shorter than the original with a certain probability and execute the continuous effect when the displayed short period elapses. More specifically, for example, regardless of whether 30 times is set as the time saving period after the big hit or 100 times is set, 30 times is always displayed as the time saving period displayed after the big hit. You may. Then, if the time saving period remains even after the 30 times of variable effect is completed (that is, if the time saving period given after the big hit is 100 times), for example, the character 801 shouts "Still more !!" Is executed, and the number of time reductions displayed in the display area 818 may be rewritten from 0 to 70 times. As a result, at the timing when the 30 times of fluctuation production ends after the big hit in the "renso mode", there is anxiety about the end of the time saving period and a feeling of expectation that the time saving period will continue. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the "renso mode". In addition, when the "renso mode" continues as expected, the player can have greater joy as compared with the case where the time saving period of 100 times is displayed from the beginning after the big hit.

In the present embodiment, when shifting (falling) from the "renso mode 1" to the more advantageous "renso mode 2", this corresponds to the reserved ball held at the start of the next fluctuation. It was configured to notify by the time all the variation effects were executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variation effect is executed a predetermined number of times after the "ream villa mode 1" is started, it may be configured to notify whether or not the transition to the "ream villa mode 2" is performed. More specifically, for example, when the fluctuation effect is executed 20 times after shifting to the "renso mode 1" after the big hit, it is determined whether or not the current state is the "renso mode 2". do. That is, in the 1st to 20th lottery executed after the big hit, it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall was obtained. Then, in the case of shifting (falling) to the "renso mode 2", it may be configured to notify that the transition to the "renso mode 2" has been performed by the advance notice effect. In addition, if the "renso mode 1" remains, the advance notice effect of Gase may be executed. As a result, there is a sense of expectation that the player will shift to "Renso Mode 2" every time when the fluctuation effect is executed a predetermined number of times (20 times) after "Renso Mode 1" is started. Can be embraced. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, it is impossible (difficult) to distinguish "ream villa mode 1" and "ream villa mode 2" from the operation of the electric accessory 640a or the like. Therefore, even if the timing of shifting to the "renso mode 2" and the timing of notifying the "renso mode 2" are different, the player cannot recognize the difference. Therefore, even if the advance notice effect is executed only when the fluctuation of a predetermined number of times is executed, the player cannot recognize whether the advance notice effect is a mess or has really fallen, and the advance notice effect is produced. You can get more attention to the results. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the "renso mode 1". Further, if the mode has not been changed to the "ream villa mode 2" by the predetermined number of times (20 times), a pattern may be provided in which the advance notice effect of the ghost is not performed. As a result, when the advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to raise the expectation level of being notified that the transition (fall) has been made to the "renso mode 2".

In the present embodiment, when the transition (fall) from the "renso mode 1" to the "renso mode 2" is performed, the transition to the "renso mode 2" is notified by the advance notice effect. There may be a case where the advance notice effect is not executed even if the mode shifts to the "renso mode 2" due to the remaining time saving period. Specifically, when the remaining time reduction period is short (for example, less than 10 times), even if the mode shifts to "renso mode 2" (falls), the advance notice effect is not executed, and the "ream" is set. The display effect may be performed as if the "villa mode 1" remains. Even if the "ream villa mode 2" is notified when the remaining time reduction period is short, it is difficult to win a big hit by the time the remaining time reduction period elapses. And, if the big hit is not obtained by the time the short time period elapses, the benefit of "Renso Mode 2" (it is easy to become a big hit with a long short time period) cannot be received. Therefore, if it is not a big hit even though it is notified that the mode has changed to the "renso mode 2", there is a risk that the player will feel deeply disappointed. On the other hand, if the remaining time reduction period is short (for example, the remaining time reduction period is 10 times) and the transition to the "renso mode 2" is performed, the advance notice effect is not performed (the transition to the "renso mode 2" is performed. By adopting the configuration (not notified), it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when a short period of time has passed. In addition, if the game shifts to "Renso Mode 2" without executing the advance notice effect and the jackpot is reached within the remaining time saving period, for example, the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot opening, or the jackpot ending In the above, it may be configured to notify that it was a big hit in the "ream villa mode 2". As a result, in addition to the joy of winning the jackpot within the short time period, the player can be made aware that there is a high possibility that a long time saving period will be given after the big hit. Therefore, the joy of the player can be amplified.

In the present embodiment, the probability of a lottery result corresponding to a fall is fixed (1/60), but the probability of a lottery result corresponding to a fall may be changed according to the jackpot type of the probability variation jackpot. For example, the probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot I to K) given when a jackpot is obtained by the lottery of special symbol 1 is configured so that the probability of a lottery result corresponding to a fall is low (for example, 1/200). ), The probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot L to N) given when a jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2 is configured so that the probability of the lottery result corresponding to the fall is high (for example, 1/20). You may. As a result, while looping in the "normal mode" in which it is difficult to receive the lottery for the special symbol 2, the probability that the lottery result corresponding to the fall will be obtained is low, so that it is possible to make it difficult to shift to the "preparation mode". .. On the other hand, in the "consecutive villa mode 1" in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily received, the probability of the lottery result corresponding to the fall is high, so that the transition to the "ream villa mode 2" can be facilitated. Therefore, it is easy to loop the "normal mode", and when it shifts to the "renso mode 1", it is easy to shift to the "renso mode 2" (the "renso mode" is easy to continue for a long time). Since it can be set to 10, the disparity between an advantageous state (“renso mode”) and an unfavorable state (“commuting mode”) can be further increased. Therefore, the expectation for the "renso mode" can be further increased, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are not opened when the special symbol is drawn out. As a result, by visually recognizing the movements of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to determine whether or not the game state may be changed without checking the display effect. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in at least a part of the case of disconnection, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in the same manner as various jackpots. That is, a so-called small hit may be provided. More specifically, for example, in a part of the case where the special symbol 1 is lost due to the lottery, the first specific winning opening 65a is won for a predetermined period (until 0.2 seconds elapse, or 5 balls are won. It may be configured to be open (until it is done). As a result, even if the first specific winning opening 65a is opened as a result of the loss, it can be expected that it will be a big hit. As described above, it is possible to shift to another advantageous state in a part of the case where the big hit is made in the "normal mode". In other words, by becoming "normal jackpot E", "probability change jackpot J", etc., it is possible to shift to "preparation mode" or "renso mode 1", so it becomes a jackpot (first specific winning opening 65a). By confirming the opening operation of), it is possible to give a feeling of expectation to shift to another state. In addition to this, by providing a small hit and controlling to open the first specific winning opening 65a in the same manner as in the case of a big hit, there is actually a chance to shift from the "normal mode" to another state. It can make you feel more than. That is, it becomes a small hit or a big hit, and every time the opening operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is executed, it is possible to expect a transition to a good state, so that the most disadvantageous "normal mode" for the player is long. Even if it continues, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, for example, in a part of the case where the special symbol 2 is lost due to the lottery, the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 5 balls are won). It may be configured as follows. As described above, in a part of the case where a big hit is made in the "renso mode 1", it is possible to shift to the "renso mode 2" which is a more advantageous state. In other words, by becoming "normal jackpot F" in "renso mode 1", it is possible to shift to "renso mode 2", so that it becomes a jackpot and the opening operation of the specific winning opening 650a is executed. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation to shift to the "renso mode 2". In addition to this, by providing a small hit and controlling so as to open the second specific winning opening 650a in the same manner as in the case of a big hit, from "renso mode 1" to "renso mode 2". It can make you feel that you have more chances to make the transition. That is, it becomes a small hit or a big hit, and every time the opening operation of the second specific winning opening 650a is executed, it is possible to expect a transition to a good state, so that the game in the "renso mode 1" becomes monotonous. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, by providing a small hit, it is possible to enter the ball into the second entrance 650a and win a prize ball. Therefore, each "renso mode" ("renso mode 1") , And "Renso Mode 2") can be made even more advantageous.

Further, in the present embodiment, the “probability variation jackpot L” is obtained in the “renso mode 2”, and when the “renso mode 1” is given 100 times after the jackpot, the jackpot is performed with a small number of fluctuations (for example, 10 times). If it becomes, there is a high possibility that 30 times of time saving period will be given after the big hit (there is a high possibility that it will be "normal big hit F" or "probability change big hit L"), so it seems that the time saving period has decreased. There is a risk of making you feel. In other words, if a big hit is made with a small number of times, the player may be disappointed. On the other hand, if a small hit is provided, the remaining number of time reductions does not change even if the second specific winning opening 650a is opened by the small hit, so that the player can be pleased. Therefore, depending on whether the timing at which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is a small number of fluctuations or just before the end of a short period of time, it is possible to expect a small hit or a big hit. It is possible to prevent the game in the "renso mode" from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, the "renso mode 1" is set to the probabilistic time saving state, the "renso mode 2" is set to the non-probability change time saving state, and the lottery corresponding to the fall is performed from the "renso mode 1" to the "renso mode 2". It was configured to shift when the result was obtained or when the result was "normal jackpot E, F". In addition, it was configured to shift from the "renso mode 2" to the "renso mode 1" when the "probability change jackpot I, J" is reached. That is, it was configured to go back and forth between the "renso mode" by a big hit or a fall, but each mode ("normal mode", "preparation mode", "renso mode 1", "renso mode 2") The correspondence between the game state (probability change non-time reduction state, non-probability change non-time reduction state, probability change time reduction state, non-probability change time reduction state) may be arbitrarily determined. For example, "normal mode" (a state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball with a big hit and it is difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode) is changed to a non-time saving state, and "preparation mode" (a state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball with a big hit and it is difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode). The state where it is easy to shift to , A state more advantageous than the consecutive villa mode 1) may be set as a non-probable change time saving state, and may be configured to move back and forth between the "preparation mode" and the "renso mode 2" by a big hit or a fall. As a result, the player's expectation for the state transition due to the fall can be further increased. That is, in the third embodiment, there is not much merit for the player when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained just before the end of the "renso mode 1" (just before the end of the short period of time). If you don't get a big hit in the short time left, "Renso Mode 2" will end, so there is a high possibility that you will leave the time saving period without receiving any benefit from "Renso Mode 2". Is. On the other hand, if it is configured to shift from "preparation mode" to "ream villa mode 2" by falling, even if the short period of time is passed after that, "ream villa mode" is more advantageous than "preparation mode". Since the transition to "1" is made, the player can be pleased with the lottery result corresponding to the fall in the "preparation mode" regardless of the remaining time and short period. In order to make the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state) the most disadvantageous state and the "renso mode 2" (non-probability change non-time saving state) the most advantageous state, for example, a fall in the "normal mode". The probability may be configured to be lower than the fall probability in the "preparation mode" (eg, 1/60 → 1/200). Then, as the distribution of the jackpot type in the "normal mode", the ratio of selecting the jackpot type to which the probability variation time saving state is given after the jackpot is increased, and as the distribution of the jackpot type in the "preparation mode", one of the non-subjects after the jackpot The rate at which the jackpot to which the probabilistic state (non-probability change non-time saving state, non-probability change non-time saving state) is given may be increased.

In the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained, or the special symbol is not shifted to the low probability state unless it becomes "normal jackpot E, F". , Not limited to this. For example, if the probability variation jackpot continues a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) without shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability variation jackpot will be changed to the low probability state of the special symbol after the 15th probability variation jackpot is completed. It may be configured to migrate. Even when the "probability change jackpot I, K" is won consecutively in the "normal mode" (when the "normal mode" is looped), the remaining number of times for the predetermined number of times has decreased (the "preparation mode" is approaching). It is possible to reduce the disappointment of looping an unfavorable mode. Therefore, the motivation of the player for the game can be improved. Similarly, when "Probability change jackpot L, M" is won consecutively in "Renso mode 1" (when "Renso mode 1" is looped), the number of remaining times for the predetermined number of times is reduced ("" Since it is possible to make the player feel that the "ream villa mode 2" is approaching), it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the "ream villa mode 1".

In each of the above embodiments, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to 1/30, and when the special symbol lottery is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a jackpot was set to 1 / 37.5, but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability of winning a jackpot may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the probability of becoming a big hit in the low probability state of a special symbol may be set to 1/60. As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit in the "preparation mode" and the "renso mode 2", so that it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from becoming too high in ball ejection performance. In addition, after lowering the probability of becoming a big hit, the number of time reductions of the special symbol given in "Renso Mode 2" and the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the special symbol 2 is a big hit in the lottery (big hit) The number of rounds) may be increased. By increasing the benefits in "Renso mode" instead of lowering the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, "Renso mode" and other modes ("Normal mode" and "Preparation mode") You can add more sharpness. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more strongly expected to shift to the "renso mode", and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Fall from a disadvantageous probability change state to an advantageous normal state by a fall lottery)
A judgment means for executing a judgment based on the establishment of a judgment condition, a privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a specific judgment result, and a method for granting the privilege game. As a privilege game given by the privilege game granting means, it is possible to set at least a first privilege game in which a player has few benefits and a second privilege game in which more benefits can be acquired than the first privilege game. The privilege setting means, the first determination state in which the probability of the specific determination result being the predetermined probability based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the second determination in which the probability of the specific determination result is lower than the predetermined probability. It is possible to set at least a determination state setting means that can be set as a state, and a first state that is set to the second privilege game at a predetermined ratio by the privilege setting means when the first determination state is set. A setting means capable of setting a second state in which the ratio set for the second privilege game by the privilege setting means is higher than the predetermined ratio when the second determination state is set. A game machine A1 characterized by being provided.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are either a normal state in which the hit state is drawn with a normal probability or a probability fluctuation state in which the hit state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the normal state is set when the winning state ends, the disadvantageous state in which the winning state is drawn with a lottery probability lower than the probability fluctuation state is at least the next winning state. Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game when the normal state is reached.

In addition, such a conventional gaming machine is provided with a function (that is, a ceiling function) of shifting the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player when it is determined in the jackpot determination that the pachinko machine is out of alignment a predetermined number of times in a row. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-165628). In this type of gaming machine, when the number of times it is determined to be out of order reaches a predetermined number (when it reaches the ceiling), it is set to an advantageous state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than usual. It is configured. Therefore, the player's interest has been improved by the novel playability of approaching an advantageous state as the deviation continues.

However, in this conventional gaming machine, the disadvantageous state continues until the predetermined number of times is reached, so that the player's motivation to play may decrease when the remaining number of times until the predetermined number of times is reached is large. there were.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. It is granted by the privilege game granting means. As privilege games given by the privilege game granting means, at least the first privilege game in which the player can acquire few benefits and the second privilege game in which more benefits can be acquired than the first privilege game are set as benefits. It is set by means. At least by the judgment state setting means, there are a first judgment state in which the probability of a specific judgment result being a predetermined probability based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a second judgment state in which the probability of a specific judgment result is lower than the predetermined probability. Set. When the first determination state is set, the first state set in the second privilege game at a predetermined ratio by the privilege setting means is set in the setting means, and the second determination state is set. A second state in which the ratio set for the second privilege game by the privilege setting means is higher than a predetermined ratio is set by the setting means.

This is advantageous in that the first judgment state has a higher probability of producing a specific judgment result than the second judgment state, but the ratio of the first privilege game with few benefits is increased. It becomes disadvantageous. On the other hand, the second judgment state is disadvantageous in that the probability of a specific judgment result is lower than that of the first judgment state, but the ratio of the second privilege game that can acquire many benefits is given. It is advantageous in that it becomes high. That is, since the first judgment state and the second judgment state in which the advantageous side and the disadvantage side are different from each other are set by the judgment state setting means, it is expected that the state is set according to the player's taste. Can be played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

When the first determination state is set in the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A1 is provided with a determination state changing means capable of changing to the second determination state at a predetermined trigger different from the end of the privilege game. Pachinko machine A2.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, when the first determination state is set, the determination state is changed to the second determination state at a predetermined trigger different from the end of the privilege game by the determination state changing means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the state has been changed to the second determination state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while predicting whether the current state is the first judgment state or the second judgment state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. effective.

In the gaming machine A2, the display means for displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the determination condition in the first determination state. The present invention includes a predetermined determination means for executing a predetermined determination from the time when the determination is established until the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means executed based on the determination condition is started. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the determination state changing means sets the second determination state when the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes a predetermined determination result in the first determination state. ..

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. Then, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. In the second determination state, a predetermined determination is made by the predetermined determination means from the time when the determination condition is satisfied until the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means executed based on the determination condition is started. Is executed. In the first determination state, the second determination state is set by the determination state changing means when the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes a predetermined determination result.

As a result, it can be expected that each time the determination condition is satisfied, the player shifts to the second determination state in which the ratio of the second privilege game being granted is high. Therefore, every time the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the determination result by the determination means and the determination result by the predetermined determination means, so that the game is suppressed from becoming monotonous. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine A3, the determination state changing means sets the second determination state before the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the second determination state is set by the determination state changing means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, so that the determination by the predetermined determination means is performed. There is an effect that the identification information can be dynamically displayed in consideration of the result.

The gaming machine A3 or A4 includes information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, and the determination means executes a determination using the information acquired by the information acquisition means. The gaming machine A5, wherein the predetermined determination means executes the predetermined determination using the information acquired by the acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the determination is executed by the determination means using the information acquired by the information acquisition means. A predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination means using the information acquired by the acquisition means.

As a result, the determination by the determination means and the predetermined determination by the predetermined determination means can be executed using the same information, so that the processing load when the information is acquired by the information acquisition means can be reduced. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A5, when the predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means, the specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect for notifying that the second state is reached is provided. A6 game machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A5, a specific effect for notifying that a second state is reached when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means is a specific effect. Since it is executed by the executing means, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the second determination state has been reached.

In the gaming machine A6, the specific effect executing means is specified outside the execution period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination executed by the determination means using the information that is the predetermined determination result. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the production can be executed.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, a specific effect is performed outside the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination executed by the determination means using the information that becomes the predetermined determination result. Since the specific effect is executed by the execution means, when a predetermined determination result is obtained, the specific effect is executed regardless of the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information that is the predetermined determination result. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific production can be increased.

The gaming machine A7 is provided with a pre-determination means capable of executing the determination of the information before the predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination means based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the determination result by the prior determination means becoming the predetermined determination result.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means, the determination of the information is executed by the pre-determination means before the predetermined determination by the predetermined determination means is executed, and the determination result by the pre-determination means is predetermined. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the determination result.

As a result, even before the second determination state is actually reached, the specific effect can be executed if a predetermined determination result is obtained by the prior determination means, so that the second determination state can be reached earlier. It has the effect of making the player aware of it.

In any of the game machines A6 to A8, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination based on the information is executed, and a storage means thereof. It is determined that the predetermined determination means for determining whether or not the information that is the predetermined determination result is stored in the storage means and the information that is the specific determination result are stored by the predetermined determination means. Based on this, the specific effect executing means includes a selection means for selecting one or a plurality of the information used for executing the specific effect from the information stored in the storage means, and the specific effect executing means is the selection means. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means using the information selected by.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A6 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number until a predetermined determination based on the information is executed, and the information that becomes a predetermined determination result by the storage means is stored. Whether or not it is stored is determined by a predetermined determination means. Based on the determination by the predetermined determination means that the information resulting in the specific determination result is stored, one or a plurality of information used for executing the specific effect is selected from the information stored in the storage means by the selection means. Be selected. In the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means using the information selected by the selection means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means.

As a result, it is possible to execute a specific effect on the dynamic display of one identification information, or to execute a specific effect on a specific effect over the dynamic display of a plurality of identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific production can be further increased.

In the gaming machine A9, the predetermined determination means executes the predetermined determination based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means, and the selection means is the selection means. The gaming machine A10, characterized in that at least the information acquired later among the information stored in the storage means is selected.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination means based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means. Of the information stored in the storage means, the information acquired most recently is selected by the selection means at least.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed even for the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed later, so that the player's expectation for shifting to the second determination state can be maintained for a longer time. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine A9 or A10, the gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the selection means selects all the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9 or A10, all the information stored in the storage means is selected by the selection means, so that the dynamic identification information executed based on all the information is dynamically performed. A specific effect can be executed over the display. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a specific effect over the dynamic display of more identification information, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be increased.

In the gaming machine A11, the predetermined determination means executes the predetermined determination based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means, and the selection means is the selection means. The gaming machine A12, characterized in that the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means is selected.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination means based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means. The earliest acquired information among the information stored in the storage means is selected by the selection means.

As a result, even if the information that becomes the predetermined determination result is not the information acquired first among the storage means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information acquired first is obtained. It is possible to execute a specific effect. That is, since it is possible to notify the player that the second determination state has been reached by the specific effect in advance before the predetermined determination result is actually obtained, the player is likely to be in the second determination state for a longer period of time. Can make you feel. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, a specific entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first position in which the game ball can enter the specific entry means, and the specific position rather than the first position. Compared with the variable means that can be changed to the second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, the first variable state in which the variable means is difficult to change to the first position, and the first variable state. The second variable setting means that can be set at least in the second variable state that can be easily changed to the first position is provided, and the privilege setting means is provided with at least the variable setting means as a privilege in the second privilege game. A game machine A13 characterized in that it is controlled so that a variable state is set.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the specific ball entry means than the first position. .. At least the variable means is set by the variable setting means into a first variable state in which the variable means is difficult to be changed to the first position and a second variable state in which the variable means is easily changed to the first position as compared with the first variable state. The second variable state is controlled by the privilege setting means so that at least the second variable state is set by the variable setting means as the privilege in the second privilege game.

As a result, the second privilege game makes it easier for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means, so that the player can be in an advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second determination state, which is likely to be the second privilege game, will be obtained.

In the gaming machine A13, the privilege setting means has a third privilege that the player can obtain more privilege than the second privilege game based on the specific determination result in the second variable state. The gaming machine A14 is characterized in that a game can be set, and at least the second variable state is set as a privilege in the third privilege game.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third privilege game in which the player can obtain more benefits than the second privilege game is set by the privilege setting means based on the result of a specific determination in the second variable state. By becoming the third privilege game, at least the second variable state is set as a privilege.

As a result, if a specific determination result is obtained in the second variable state, the second variable state is likely to occur again. Therefore, once the second variable state is reached, the second privilege game and the second variable state may be continuous. Will be higher. That is, since the second variable state can be made a more advantageous state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine A14, a predetermined ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a predetermined ball entry detection means for detecting the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means, and a game ball into the specific ball entry means. A specific ball entry detecting means for detecting the ball entry is provided, and the determination means executes a determination based on the detection of the ball entry of the game ball by the predetermined ball entry detection means or the specific ball entry detection means. The third privilege is possible, and the privilege setting means is the third privilege when the determination result of the determination based on the detection of the entry of the game ball by the specific entry detection means becomes the specific determination result. A gaming machine A15, wherein a game can be set, and the third privilege game is characterized in that a player can obtain a large number of prize balls as compared with the second privilege game.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means is detected by the predetermined entry detection means, and the entry of the game ball into the specific entry means is detected by the specific entry detection means. Then, the determination is executed by the determination means based on the detection of the entry of the game ball by the predetermined entry detection means or the specific entry detection means. When the determination result of the determination based on the detection of the entry of the game ball by the specific entry ball detection means becomes a specific determination result, the third privilege game is set by the privilege setting means. When it comes to the third privilege game, more game balls can be acquired than in the second privilege game.

As a result, in the second variable state, the player can acquire more benefits. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second variable state will be obtained.

In the gaming machine A15, when the determination result of the determination based on the detection of the entry of the game ball by the specific entry detection means in the first variable state becomes the specific determination result, the variable setting means. The gaming machine A16 is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding the setting of the second variable state.

According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A15, the determination result of the determination based on the detection of the entry of the gaming ball by the specific entry detection means in the first variable state becomes the specific determination result. In this case, the avoidance means avoids setting the second variable state by the variable setting means, so that the second variable state can be made a more advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the second variable state can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A16, the determination state setting means has a combination of the first determination state and the second determination state based on the determination result by the determination means being the specific determination result. A game machine A17 characterized in that any one is set.

According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A16, the first determination state and the second determination state are based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes a specific determination result. Since any of them is set by the determination state setting means, there is an effect that it can be expected that the determination state is set according to the player's taste every time a specific determination result is obtained.

The gaming machine A1 includes a determination number determination means for determining whether or not a specific number of determinations have been executed by the determination means after the first determination state is set by the determination state setting means, and the determination state setting means. The gaming machine A18 is characterized in that the second determination state is set based on the determination that the determination of the specific number of times has been executed by the determination number determination means.

According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the determination number determination means whether or not the determination is executed a specific number of times by the determination means after the first determination state is set by the determination state setting means. The second determination state is set by the determination state setting means based on the determination that the determination of a specific number of times has been executed by the determination number determination means.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the game is performed by paying attention to the number of times of determination by the determination means after the first determination state is set.

<Characteristic B group> (Rank up of consecutive villa mode)
A determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a specific determination result, and a privilege game execution means thereof. A plurality of states including at least a first game state that is advantageous to the player and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, triggered by the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. When the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from the gaming state of the above and the gaming state setting means, the gaming state is not triggered by the end of the privileged gaming state. A game in which the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the change determining means capable of determining whether or not to change and the determination that the gaming state is changed by the change determining means. A gaming machine B1 provided with a state changing means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are either a normal state in which the hit state is drawn with a normal probability or a probability fluctuation state in which the hit state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in both the normal state and the probability fluctuation state, the state does not change unless the hit state is reached, so either the normal state or the probability fluctuation state is set. Even so, it was necessary to play the game in the same state until it became a hit state. Therefore, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

Further, in some of the conventional gaming machines, the number of lottery times in which the probability fluctuates is limited to a predetermined number. In this type of gaming machine, if the winning state is not reached within the predetermined number of lottery after the probability fluctuating state, the normal state is changed without going through the winning state, so that the game is executed within the predetermined number of times. I was able to draw more attention to the lottery results. However, once the predetermined number of times has passed, the player must play the game in a disadvantageous normal state endlessly until the next hit state is reached, so that the player's motivation for the game decreases after the predetermined number of times has passed. There was a risk that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes a specific determination result. It is executed by the privilege game execution means. A plurality of states including at least a first game state that is advantageous to the player and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, triggered by the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. From the game state, one game state is set by the game state setting means. When the first game state is set by the game state setting means, it is determined whether or not to change the game state by the change determination means without triggering the end of the privilege game, and the game state is determined by the change determination means. Is changed from the first game state to the second game state by the game state changing means based on the determination that the change is made.

As a result, even when the first game state is reached, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the second game state will be more advantageous, so that the game in the first game state becomes monotonous. It can be suppressed that it ends up. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1, the change determining means determines to change the gaming state based on a predetermined probability.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, it is determined that the gaming state is changed by the change determining means based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, every time the determination by the change determining means is executed, the second game There is an effect that the player can be expected to be changed to the state.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, when the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by the gaming state changing means, the gaming state can be changed to the first gaming state when the privileged gaming state ends. A gaming machine B3 provided with a state changing means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, when the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by the gaming state changing means, the first game is performed by the specific state changing means with the end of the privileged gaming state as a trigger. Since the state is changed, after the change to the first gaming state, the game can be performed with the expectation that the change determination means will change to the second gaming state again. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the gaming state setting means sets either the first gaming state or the second gaming state at a predetermined ratio according to the gaming state. A gaming machine B4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B3, either the first gaming state or the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a predetermined ratio according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the game state will be set to a high rate of being set to the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine B4, when neither the first gaming state nor the second gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means has a gaming state in which the predetermined ratio is the first ratio and the predetermined ratio. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the gaming state can be set to one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state having a second ratio lower than the first ratio.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4, when neither the first gaming state nor the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the predetermined ratio becomes the first ratio. Since the gaming state setting means sets one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a state and a gaming state in which a predetermined ratio is a second ratio lower than the first ratio, a predetermined ratio is set. The game can be played with the expectation that the game state will be set to the first rate. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the first gaming state has a higher probability that the determination result of the determination executed by the determination means becomes the specific determination result as compared with the second gaming state. A gaming machine B6 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state is configured to be higher than that in the second gaming state. Therefore, with respect to a specific determination result, the first gaming state can be more advantageous than the second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the first gaming state can be increased.

In the gaming machine B6, the change determining means determines whether or not to change from a gaming state having a high probability of obtaining the specific determination result to a gaming state having a low probability.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, whether or not to change from the gaming state having a high probability of producing a specific determination result to the gaming state having a low probability is determined by the change determination means, so that a specific determination is made. In order to shift to a state where the probability of the result is high, there is an effect that the game can be performed in the expectation that the game will be in the privileged game state.

<Characteristic C group> (Mode transition by hitting and falling during the consecutive villa mode)
A determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. Based on the establishment of the condition, one gaming state is set from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state advantageous to the player and a second gaming state advantageous to the player different from the first gaming state. A possible gaming state setting means, and at least the first changing means capable of changing the gaming state to the second gaming state when the privileged game ends when at least the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine C1 is provided with a second changing means capable of changing to the second gaming state at a predetermined trigger different from the end of the privileged game when the first gaming state is set.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are either a normal state in which the hit state is drawn with a normal probability or a probability fluctuation state in which the hit state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in both the normal state and the probability fluctuation state, the state does not change unless the hit state is reached, so either the normal state or the probability fluctuation state is set. Even so, it was necessary to play the game in the same state until it became a hit state. Therefore, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

Further, in some of the conventional gaming machines, the number of lottery times in which the probability fluctuates is limited to a predetermined number. In this type of gaming machine, if the winning state is not reached within the predetermined number of lottery after the probability fluctuating state, the normal state is changed without going through the winning state, so that the game is executed within the predetermined number of times. I was able to draw more attention to the lottery results. However, once the predetermined number of times has passed, the player must play the game in a disadvantageous normal state endlessly until the next hit state is reached, so that the player's motivation for the game decreases after the predetermined number of times has passed. There was a risk that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the player is given the privilege game execution means based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. An advantageous privilege game is executed. From a plurality of game states including at least a first game state advantageous to the player and a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, one game state is set by the game state setting means. Is set. When at least the first gaming state is set, it is changed to the second gaming state by the first changing means when the privilege game ends. Further, when at least the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is changed by the second changing means at a predetermined trigger different from the end of the privilege game.

As a result, the first gaming state is changed to the second gaming state at a plurality of different triggers, so that the chance of being changed to the second gaming state can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the first game state.

The gaming machine C1 includes a predetermined determining means for determining whether or not to change the gaming state based on a predetermined probability, and the second changing means is triggered by the determination that the gaming state is changed by the predetermined determining means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it is changed to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not to change the gaming state by the predetermined determining means based on a predetermined probability, and when it is determined that the gaming state is changed by the predetermined determining means, the second game is played by the second changing means. It is changed to the state.

This has the effect that the player can be expected to be changed to the second gaming state each time the determination by the predetermined determination means is executed.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the second changing means does not change the gaming state when the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the second gaming state is set, the gaming state is not changed by the second changing means, so that the second gaming state is changed to the second. There is an effect that it is possible to easily change from the first gaming state to the second gaming state as compared with the case of changing to the one gaming state.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the first changing means can change the second gaming state changed by the second changing means to the first gaming state when the privilege game ends. A gaming machine C4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the second gaming state changed by the second changing means is changed by the first changing means by the first changing means when the privilege game ends. Since the state is changed, the game can be performed in the second gaming state with the expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game in the second game state from becoming monotonous.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, after the end of the privilege game, a counting means for counting the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result, which is a determination result other than the specific determination result, and the counting in the first gaming state. When the predetermined number of times determination means for determining whether or not the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result counted by the means has reached the predetermined number of times and the predetermined number of times determination means determine that the predetermined number of times has been reached, the gaming state is determined. The gaming machine C5 is characterized by comprising a third changing means for changing from the first gaming state to a third gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the end of the privilege game, the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result, which is a determination result other than the specific determination result, is counted by the counting means. When the predetermined number of times determination means determines whether or not the number of consecutive deviation determination results counted by the counting means in the first game state has reached the predetermined number of times, and the predetermined number of times determination means determines that the predetermined number of times has been reached. , The gaming state is changed to the third gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, by the third changing means.

As a result, in the first gaming state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the disengagement determination result will be a specific determination result before the predetermined number of consecutive times, or the transition to the second gaming state will occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game in the first game state from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine C5, the specific number of times determining means for determining whether or not the continuous number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result counted by the counting means in the second gaming state has reached the specified number of times, and the specific number of times determining means for the specific number of times. When it is determined that the number of times has been reached, the fourth changing means for changing the gaming state from the second gaming state to the fourth gaming state which is more advantageous than the third gaming state and more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the specific number of times determination means whether or not the number of consecutive deviation determination results counted by the counting means in the second game state has reached the specific number of times, and it is determined by the specific number of times determination means that the number of consecutive times has reached the specific number of times. In this case, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the fourth gaming state by the fourth changing means.

As a result, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the deviation determination result will shift to the first game state before the result is continuously specified a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game in the second game state from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine C6, the gaming state setting means can set at least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state at a predetermined ratio according to the gaming state when the privilege game ends. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the predetermined ratio according to the third gaming state is lower than the predetermined ratio corresponding to the fourth gaming state.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one of the first game state and the second game state is set by the game state setting means at a predetermined ratio according to the game state when the privilege game ends. The predetermined ratio according to the third gaming state is lower than the predetermined ratio according to the fourth gaming state.

As a result, it becomes easier to set the first game state or the second game state which is advantageous to the player when the privilege game ends in the fourth game state, rather than the privilege game state ends in the third game state. Therefore, if the first game state or the second game state that is advantageous to the player is not set when the privilege game is completed, the game is to be performed with the expectation that it will be the fourth game state. Can be done.

<Characteristic D group> (Notify the result of the fall lottery with different fluctuations)
A display means for displaying identification information, an information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, and a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means. , The dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result based on the execution of the first determination by the first determination means, and the determination by the first determination means. As a privilege game granting means for granting a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the result of the above, and a privileged game given by the privileged game granting means, the privilege that the player can obtain. Based on the privilege setting means that can set at least the first privilege game in which there are few, and the second privilege game that can acquire more benefits than the first privilege game, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means. Based on the second determination means for executing the second determination and the result of the determination by the second determination means being a predetermined determination result, the privilege setting means is compared with the first privilege game. When the multi-privilege state setting means for setting the multi-privilege state in which the second privilege game is set to a high ratio and the predetermined determination result are obtained by the second determination means, the second determination result is obtained. The game is characterized by comprising an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect for notifying the multi-privilege state outside the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information used for determining the above. Machine D1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are either a normal state in which the hit state is drawn with a normal probability or a probability fluctuation state in which the hit state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in both the normal state and the probability fluctuation state, the state does not change unless the hit state is reached, so either the normal state or the probability fluctuation state is set. Even so, it was necessary to play the game in the same state until it became a hit state. Therefore, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

Further, in some of the conventional gaming machines, the number of lottery times in which the probability fluctuates is limited to a predetermined number. In this type of gaming machine, if the winning state is not reached within the predetermined number of lottery after the probability fluctuating state, the normal state is changed without going through the winning state, so that the game is executed within the predetermined number of times. I was able to draw more attention to the lottery results. However, once the predetermined number of times has passed, the player must play the game in a disadvantageous normal state endlessly until the next hit state is reached, so that the player's motivation for the game decreases after the predetermined number of times has passed. There was a risk that it would end up.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the identification information is displayed on the display means. Information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means. Based on the execution of the first determination by the first determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result. Based on the result of the determination by the first determination means being a specific determination result, a privilege game advantageous to the player is given by the privilege game granting means, and as a privilege game given by the privilege game granting means, the game A first privilege game in which a person can acquire a small number of benefits and a second privilege game in which a person can acquire more benefits than the first privilege game are set by at least the privilege setting means. Based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means, the second determination means executes the second determination, and the result of the determination by the second determination means becomes a predetermined determination result, and the first privilege game The second privilege game is set by the multi-privilege state setting means in a multi-privilege state in which the ratio of the second privilege game being set by the privilege game setting means is higher than that of the above. When a predetermined determination result is obtained by the second determination means, the multi-privilege state is notified outside the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information used for the second determination which is the predetermined determination result. The specific effect for the purpose is executed by the effect executing means.

As a result, the player who has confirmed the specific effect can be made to recognize that the multi-privilege state has been reached. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the specific effect will be executed.

In the gaming machine D1, an information determination means capable of executing the determination of the information before the second determination by the second determination means is executed based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the determination result by the information determination means becoming the predetermined determination result.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information determination is executed by the information determination means before the second determination by the second determination means is executed, and the determination result by the information determination means is obtained. A specific effect is executed based on a predetermined determination result.

As a result, even before the actual multi-privilege state is reached, the specific effect can be executed if a predetermined determination result is obtained by the information determination means, so that the player can be in the multi-privilege state sooner. It has the effect of being able to be recognized by.

A storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means in the game machine D1 or D2 up to a predetermined number until the second determination based on the information is executed, and the storage means thereof. It is determined that the predetermined determination means for determining whether or not the information which is the predetermined determination result is stored and the predetermined determination means have determined that the information which is the specific lottery result is stored. Based on this, the effect execution means is selected by the selection means, comprising: selecting one or a plurality of the information to be used for executing the specific effect from the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first determination using the information.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored by the storage means up to a predetermined number until the second determination based on the information is executed. Based on the fact that it is determined by the predetermined determination means whether or not the information that becomes the predetermined determination result is stored in the storage means, and that the information that becomes the specific lottery result is stored by the predetermined determination means. , One or a plurality of information used for executing the specific effect is selected by the selection means from the information stored in the storage means. In the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first determination using the information selected by the selection means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means.

As a result, it is possible to execute a specific effect on the dynamic display of one identification information, or to execute a specific effect on a specific effect over the dynamic display of a plurality of identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific production can be further increased.

In the gaming machine D3, the second determination means executes the second determination based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means, and the selection means is The gaming machine D4, wherein at least the information acquired later among the information stored in the storage means is selected.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means. Of the information stored in the storage means, the information acquired most recently is selected by the selection means at least.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed even for the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed later, so that the expectation that the player's multi-privilege state is set can be maintained for a longer time. There is an effect.

A gaming machine D5 in any of the gaming machines D3 or D4, wherein the selection means selects all the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3 or D4, all the information stored in the storage means is selected from the selection means, so that the movement of the identification information executed based on all the information is executed. It is possible to execute a specific effect over the target display. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a specific effect over the dynamic display of more identification information, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be increased.

In the gaming machine D3, the second determination means executes the second determination based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means, and the selection means determines. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means is selected.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means. In addition, the selection means selects the information that is acquired first among the information stored in the storage means.

As a result, even if the information that becomes the predetermined determination result is not the information acquired first among the storage means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information acquired first is obtained. It is possible to execute a specific effect. That is, since it is possible to notify in advance that the multi-privilege state has been reached by the specific effect before the predetermined determination result is actually obtained, it seems that the advantageous multi-privilege state continues for a longer time for the player. Can make you feel. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic E group> (Rank-up production during consecutive villa mode)
Based on the ball-entry means on which the pachinko ball can enter, the information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the ball entering the ball-entry means, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means. The determination means for executing the determination, the privilege game granting means for granting the privileged game advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a specific determination result, and the privileged game granting means. As a privilege game, at least a first privilege game with few benefits that a player can obtain and a second privilege game with more benefits that a player can obtain compared to the first privilege game can be set. The means, a variable means that can be changed to a first position that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, and a second position that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball as compared with the first position. A variable setting that can at least set the state of the variable means to a first variable state that is easily variable to the first position and a second variable state that is difficult to change to the first position as compared to the first variable state. Means and the first state in which the second privilege game is difficult to be granted when the specific determination result is obtained in the first variable state, and the second privilege game is granted as compared with the first state. A state setting means that can be set to an easy second state at least, and a specific effect executing means that executes a specific effect for suggesting the second state when the second state is set by the state setting means. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the state setting means sets the second state based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first state.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are either a normal state in which the hit state is drawn with a normal probability or a probability fluctuation state in which the hit state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in both the normal state and the probability fluctuation state, the state does not change unless the hit state is reached, so either the normal state or the probability fluctuation state is set. Even so, it was necessary to play the game in the same state until it became a hit state. Therefore, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

Further, in some of the conventional gaming machines, the number of lottery times in which the probability fluctuates is limited to a predetermined number. In this type of gaming machine, if the winning state is not reached within the predetermined number of lottery after the probability fluctuating state, the normal state is changed without going through the winning state, so that the game is executed within the predetermined number of times. I was able to draw more attention to the lottery results. However, once the predetermined number of times has passed, the player must play the game in a disadvantageous normal state endlessly until the next hit state is reached, so that the player's motivation for the game decreases after the predetermined number of times has passed. There was a risk that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and the determination is executed by the determination means based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means. Will be done. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a specific judgment result, a privilege game advantageous to the player is given by the privilege game granting means, and the player can acquire it as a privilege game given by the privilege game granting means. The first privilege game with few benefits and the second privilege game with more benefits that the player can acquire as compared with the first privilege game are at least set by the privilege setting means. It is variable by the variable means to a first position where the game ball is easier to enter with respect to the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the ball than the first position. The state of the variable means is at least set to a first variable state that is easily changed to the first position by the state setting means and a second variable state that is hard to change to the first position as compared with the first variable state. In the first variable state, there are a first state in which it is difficult to give a second privilege game when a specific determination result is obtained, and a second state in which a second privilege game is more likely to be given compared to the first state. At least set by the setting means. When the second state is set by the state setting means, the specific effect executing means for suggesting the second state is executed. The second state is set by the state setting means based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first state.

As a result, the player who has confirmed the specific effect can be made to recognize that the second state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the specific effect will be executed.

The gaming machine E1 includes a predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when at least the second privilege game is granted by the privileged game granting means, and the specific effect executing means is the specified effect. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed in an effect mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether the effect is an effect.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when at least the second privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means, the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect executing means. Then, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the specific effect is executed in a manner in which it is difficult to distinguish between the predetermined effect and the specific effect.

As a result, when the specific effect is executed, the second privilege game and the second state can be expected, so that there is an effect that the expectation for the specific effect can be further increased.

The gaming machine E1 or E2 includes a predetermined determination means that executes a determination based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the state setting means determines a determination result by the predetermined determination means in the first state. The gaming machine E3, characterized in that the second state is set based on the determination result of.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is executed by the predetermined determination means based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means. In the first state, the second state is set by the state setting means based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming the predetermined determination result.

As a result, in the first state, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the predetermined determination result will be obtained, so that the determination result by the predetermined determination means can be paid more attention to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game in the first state can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is provided, and the specific effect executing means has the determination result by the predetermined determination means. When a predetermined determination result is obtained, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed outside the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information that is the predetermined determination result. E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. When the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes a predetermined determination result, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means outside the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information that becomes the predetermined determination result.

As a result, when a predetermined determination result is obtained, the specific effect can be executed regardless of the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information that is the predetermined determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific production can be increased.

In the game machine E4, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number until the determination by the predetermined determination means based on the information is executed, and the storage means thereof. Based on a memory discriminating means that determines whether or not the information that is the predetermined determination result is stored, and a determination by the memory discriminating means that the information that is the predetermined determination result is stored. The specific effect executing means includes a selection means for selecting one or a plurality of the information used for executing the specific effect from the information stored in the storage means, and the specific effect executing means is provided by the selection means. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the determination by the determination means using the selected information.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored by the storage means up to a predetermined number until the determination by the predetermined determination means based on the information is executed. Based on the fact that the storage discriminating means determines whether or not the storage means stores the information that becomes the predetermined determination result, and the storage discriminating means determines that the information that becomes the predetermined determination result is stored. , One or a plurality of information used for executing the specific effect is selected by the selection means from the information stored in the storage means. In the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the determination by the determination means using the information selected by the selection means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means.

As a result, it is possible to execute a specific effect on the dynamic display of one identification information, or to execute a specific effect on a specific effect over the dynamic display of a plurality of identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific production can be further increased.

In the gaming machine E5, the predetermined determination means executes a determination based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means, and the selection means is stored in the storage means. The gaming machine E6, characterized in that at least the information acquired later among the stored information is selected.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is executed by the predetermined determination means based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means. Then, among the information stored in the storage means, the information acquired most recently is selected by the selection means at least.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed even for the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed later, so that the expectation that the player's second state is set can be maintained for a longer time. There is an effect.

In either of the gaming machines E5 and E6, the gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the selection means selects all the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5 or E6, all the information stored in the storage means is selected by the selection means, so that a specific effect over the dynamic display of more identification information is executed. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific production can be increased.

In the gaming machine E5, the predetermined determination means executes a determination based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means, and the selection means is stored in the storage means. The gaming machine E8, characterized in that only the information acquired first among the stored information is selected.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is executed by the predetermined determination means based on the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means. Further, only the information acquired first among the information stored in the storage means is selected by the selection means.

As a result, even if the information that becomes the predetermined determination result is not the information acquired first among the storage means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information acquired first is obtained. It is possible to execute a specific effect. That is, since it is possible to notify in advance that the second state has been reached by the specific effect before the predetermined determination result is actually obtained, it seems that the second state, which is advantageous to the player, continues for a longer time. Can make you feel. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic a group> (Playability to release the number of games with a pachinko machine)
The entrance where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter into the entrance, and the first position where the game ball is more difficult to enter into the entrance than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to two positions, a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a lottery means that executes a lottery based on the passing means of the game ball, and a lottery result determined by the lottery means. Based on the above, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and then the control to change the variable means from the first position to the second position is executed one or more times. The control means and the mode from the passage of the gaming ball through the passing means to the end of the control by the variable control means are set in the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the above-mentioned specific conditions, a mode setting means for setting a second aspect different from the first aspect and a disadvantageous state disadvantageous to the player when the first aspect is set by the mode setting means are set. The gaming machine a1 is provided with a state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the disadvantageous state based on the establishment of the above.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them are aimed at improving the interest of winning by differentiating the game value that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is not possible to enjoy the winning game as long as it continues to be out of the lottery, so that the player's motivation for the game may be lowered enough to continue to be out of the lottery. That is, if the unsuccessful situation continues for a long time, the player may want to quit the game, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the game machine a1, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry port and the second position where the game ball is easier to enter the ball entry port than the first position. The variable means is variable. A lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the variable means is moved from the second position to the first position based on the predetermined lottery result obtained by the lottery means. The control that is changed from the first position to the second position after being changed for a predetermined period of time is executed once or a plurality of times by the variable control means. The mode from the passage of the game ball through the passing means to the end of control by the variable control means is set as the first mode by the mode setting means until a specific condition is satisfied. On the other hand, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the mode setting means sets the second mode different from the first mode. When the first aspect is set by the aspect setting means, a disadvantageous state disadvantageous to the player is set by the state setting means, while the player is compared to the disadvantageous state based on the establishment of a specific condition. An advantageous advantageous state is set by the state setting means.

Thereby, during the game, by confirming whether the variable means is controlled in the first aspect or the second aspect, it is possible to determine whether the advantageous state is set or the disadvantageous state is set. A person can play a game while predicting. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine a1, the mode setting means sets the probability of obtaining the predetermined lottery result as the first aspect as the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied, and is based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. As the second aspect, the gaming machine a2 is characterized in that the probability of the predetermined lottery result is set to a second lottery probability higher than the first lottery probability.

According to the gaming machine a2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine a1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the probability that a predetermined lottery result will be obtained is set as the first probability by the mode setting means as the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied. On the other hand, based on the establishment of the specific condition, as the second aspect, the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result is set to the second lottery probability higher than the first lottery probability by the mode setting means.

As a result, until the specific condition is satisfied, the lottery means sets the first lottery probability that tends to result in a predetermined lottery result, which is advantageous for the player, while the state setting means sets the disadvantageous state. On the other hand, after the specific condition is satisfied, the lottery means sets a second lottery probability that makes it difficult to obtain a predetermined lottery result, which is disadvantageous to the player, while the state setting means sets the advantageous state. That is, in either case, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the advantageous side and the disadvantage side coexist, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the game machine a2, a specific lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the game ball entering the entrance, and a player is determined based on the specific lottery result obtained by the specific lottery means. A privilege game granting means for granting a privileged game capable of acquiring the game value of the above, a first privileged game as the privileged game granted by the privileged game granting means, and a player having the game value more than the first privileged game. The second privilege game is provided with at least a privilege game selection means capable of easily obtaining a large number of the first privilege games, and the mode setting means obtains the probability that the predetermined lottery result will be obtained based on the completion of the first privilege game. The second lottery probability is set to the first lottery probability, and after the first lottery probability is set, the second lottery probability is different from the specific lottery result by the specific lottery means for a predetermined number of times in a row. The state setting means sets the disadvantageous state based on the end of the first privilege game, and after the disadvantageous state is set, the specific lottery means is continuously performed a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine a3 is characterized in that the advantageous state is set based on the result of the out-of-lot lottery.

According to the gaming machine a3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine a2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a lottery is executed by a specific lottery means based on the game ball entering the entrance, and the player acquires a predetermined game value based on the specific lottery result obtained by the specific lottery means. Possible privilege games are given by the privilege game granting means. As the privilege game given by the privilege game granting means, the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the player can easily obtain more game value than the first privilege game are selected by the privilege game selection means. The probability that a predetermined lottery result will be obtained based on the end of the first privilege game is set as the first lottery probability by the mode setting means. Further, after the first lottery probability is set, the second lottery probability is set by the mode setting means based on the fact that the specific lottery means results in a different lottery result different from the specific lottery result continuously for a predetermined number of times. The disadvantageous state is set to the disadvantageous state by the state setting means based on the end of the first privilege game. Further, after the disadvantageous state is set, the advantageous state is set by the state setting means based on the fact that the specific lottery means is defeated by the specific lottery means for a predetermined number of times in a row and the lottery result is obtained.

As a result, even if the disadvantageous state is set based on the grant of the first privilege game, it is possible to shift to the advantageous state if the out-of-lottery results can be continued a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in a disadvantageous state, it is possible to have the player play the game in the hope that the lottery results will be continuous, so that there is an effect that a novel game property can be provided.

In the game machine a3, in the first privilege game, after the end of the first privilege game, the first lottery probability is set by the mode setting means until the second lottery probability is set. The privilege game selection means is configured to have a plurality of types having different consecutive times of results, and the privilege game selection means is one of the first privilege games of the plurality of types as a privilege game given by the privilege game granting means. 1 A gaming machine a4 characterized in that a privileged game can be selected.

According to the gaming machine a4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine a3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first privilege game is a plurality of types in which the number of consecutive out-of-lottery results from the time when the first lottery probability is set by the mode setting means to the time when the second lottery probability is set after the end of the first privilege game is different. The first privilege game of one of the plurality of types of first privilege games is selected by the privilege game selection means as the privilege game given by the privilege game granting means.

As a result, even if a disadvantageous state is set by granting the first privilege game, the first privilege game of the type in which the number of consecutive out-of-lottery results until the advantageous state is set for the player is small. Can be expected to be selected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by making the player feel that the number of consecutive out-of-lottery results is interrupted.

In any of the gaming machines a2 to a4, the variable control means is set with the second lottery probability for a period during which the variable means is changed to the first position when the first lottery probability is set. The gaming machine a5 is characterized in that the variable means is set to be shorter than the period for which the variable means is variable to the first position.

According to the gaming machine a5, the period for changing the variable means to the first position when the first lottery probability is set is changed to the first position when the second lottery probability is set. Since it is set by the variable control means so as to be shorter than the period, even if the second lottery probability is set, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the lottery by the specific lottery means is not executed and the second privilege game is not given despite the advantageous state for a long time, so that the player is in an advantageous state. It has the effect of allowing you to enjoy the game without stress.

In any of the gaming machines a2 to a5, a period setting means for setting a period from the result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means until the variable means is changed to the first position by the variable control means. The gaming machine a6 is characterized in that, when the first lottery probability is set, the period setting means sets a longer period than when the second lottery probability is set. ..

According to the gaming machine a6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines a2 to a5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period setting means sets the period from when the lottery means obtains a predetermined lottery result until the variable control means changes the variable means to the first position. Further, when the first lottery probability is set, a longer period than when the second lottery probability is set is set by the period setting means.

As a result, even if the second lottery probability is set, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the lottery by the specific lottery means is not executed and the second privilege game is not given despite the advantageous state for a long time, so that the player is in an advantageous state. It has the effect of allowing you to enjoy the game without stress.

<Characteristic b group> (Do not turn special figure 2 at normal times)
A first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, a first entry port provided in the first flow path and into which the game ball can enter, and the above-mentioned A lottery is drawn based on the second entry port provided in the second flow path and where the game ball can enter, and the game ball entering the first entry port or the second entry opening. The lottery means to be executed, the privilege game giving means for giving a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a predetermined lottery result, and the second flow path at least during a predetermined period. It is characterized by providing a suppressing means for making it difficult to obtain the lottery result of the lottery executed by the lottery means as compared with the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the first flow path. Game machine b1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them are aimed at improving the interest of winning by differentiating the game value that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a gaming method for intentionally generating a hit type having a high gaming value that can be acquired may be executed, which may cause unexpected damage to the hall. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine b1, the first ball entry port is provided in the first flow path, and the second ball entry port is provided in the second flow path different from the first flow path. A lottery is executed by a lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance, and the game is based on the lottery result obtained by the lottery means. A privilege game that is advantageous to the person is given by the privilege game granting means. The lottery result of the lottery executed by the lottery means as compared with the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the first flow path by the suppressing means by letting the game ball flow down to the second flow path at least during a predetermined period. Is hard to come out.

As a result, it is possible to make the player feel that he / she wants to flow down the first flow path rather than letting the game ball flow down to the second flow path where the lottery result is difficult to obtain at least during a predetermined period. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed according to the period, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of hitting the direction in which the game ball is launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine b1, the first position where the game ball can enter the second entrance and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter into the second entrance than the first position. Variable means that can be changed to, a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a specific lottery means that executes a lottery based on the passing means of the game ball, and a specific lottery result by the specific lottery means. A variable control means that executes the control of changing the variable means from the second position to the first position and then changing the variable means from the first position to the second position one or more times. The variable control means controls the variable means to be in the first position during the first period when the variable means is changed to the first position in the predetermined period. When the variable means is changed to the first position outside the period, the variable means is controlled to be in the first position for a second period longer than the first period, and the suppression is performed. The means is provided with a flow delaying means for making the period until the game ball flowing down into the second flow path reaches the second entry port longer than the first period. Machine b2.

According to the gaming machine b2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine b1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable means based on the specific lottery result obtained by the specific lottery means. The variable control means executes the control of changing from the position to the first position where the game ball can enter for a specific period and then changing from the first position to the second position one or more times. When the variable means is changed to the first position during a predetermined period, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means so as to be in the first position during the first period. On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the first position outside the predetermined period, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means so as to be in the first position during the second period longer than the first period. In the suppressing means, the period until the game ball that has flowed down into the second flow path reaches the second entry port is longer than the first period by the flow-down delay means.

As a result, when the player launches the game ball into the second flow path after confirming that the variable means has been changed to the first position in a predetermined period, the game ball goes to the second entrance. Since it is possible to prevent the player from entering the ball, it is possible to make the player aim at the first flow path in a predetermined period. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed according to the period, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of hitting the direction in which the game ball is launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine b1 or b2, at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the player can easily obtain more game value than the first privilege game are selected as the privilege games given by the privilege game granting means. When the above-mentioned predetermined lottery result is obtained by a lottery executed based on the game ball entering the second entrance, which includes a possible privilege game selection means. In addition, a gaming machine characterized in that it is easier to select the second privilege game than the predetermined lottery result is obtained by a lottery executed based on entering the ball into the first entrance. b3.

According to the gaming machine b3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines b1 or b2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the privilege game given by the privilege game granting means, at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the player can easily obtain more game value than the first privilege game are selected by the privilege game selection means. NS. Here, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained by a lottery executed based on the game ball entering the second entrance, the game ball enters the first entrance. The second privilege game is more likely to be selected by the privilege game selection means than the predetermined lottery result is obtained by the lottery executed based on the lottery.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played aiming at the second entrance even during the predetermined period and the second privilege game being continuous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

In the gaming machine b3, during the predetermined period, the first variable state setting means for setting the variable means to the first variable state in which the variable means is difficult to be changed to the first position by the variable control means, and the predetermined period are terminated. A second variable state setting means for setting the variable means to a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position than the first variable state is provided, and the second variable state is moved to the second flow path in the second variable state. The gaming machine b4 is characterized in that, when the ball is launched, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the second entrance, as compared with the first variable state.

According to the gaming machine b4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine b3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during a predetermined period, the variable state is set to the first variable state in which the variable means is difficult to be changed to the first position by the first variable state setting means. Based on the end of the predetermined period, the variable means is set to the second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position than the first variable state by the second variable state setting means. Further, in the second variable state, when the ball is launched into the second flow path, the game ball is more likely to enter the second entrance as compared with the first variable state.

As a result, during the predetermined period, it becomes difficult for the variable means to be changed to the first position, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance, so it is better to let the first flow path flow down to the second flow. It can make you think that it is more profitable than letting the road flow down. On the other hand, when the predetermined period ends, the variable means can be easily changed to the first position, and the ball can easily enter the second entry port. It is possible to play a game with the aim of granting a privileged game. Therefore, since it is possible to separate the flow paths through which the game ball flows down according to the period, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine b4, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the passage of the passing means by the gaming ball, and whether or not the variable means is changed to the first position based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The first period and its After setting the variable means to the first position by the period setting means capable of setting at least a second period shorter than the first period and the variable setting means, the first position is terminated and the second position is completed. A variable period setting means capable of setting at least a first variable period and a second variable period shorter than the first variable period as a period until the return to the mode is provided, and the period setting means is in the second variable state. The second variable period is easier to set than the first variable state, and the variable period setting means is easier to set the second variable period than the first variable state in the second variable state. The game is characterized in that the time from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when it reaches the ball entrance is longer than the sum of the second period and the second variable period. Machine b5.

According to the gaming machine b5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine b4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means, and whether or not the variable means is changed to the first position based on the information acquired by the acquisition means is determined by the determination means. Will be done. The period from when the determination means determines that the variable means is changed to the first position until the variable means is set to the first position by the variable setting means includes a first period and a second period shorter than the first period. At least set by the period setting means. Here, in the second variable state, the second variable period is more likely to be set by the variable period setting means than in the first variable state. The time from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when it reaches the entrance is longer than the sum of the second period and the second variable period.

As a result, even if the variable means is confirmed to be variable to the first position and then the game ball is allowed to flow down to the second flow path, before the game ball reaches the second entrance. , The variable means can be reliably changed to the second position. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being granted the second privilege game by letting the game ball flow down to the second flow path in a predetermined period.

The gaming machine b5 is provided with a launching means capable of launching a game ball onto the gaming board at intervals not falling below a predetermined lower limit period, and the second variable period is shorter than the lower limit period. Pachinko machine b6.

According to the gaming machine b6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine b5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is launched onto the game board by the launching means at intervals not less than a predetermined lower limit period. Here, the second variable period is set to be shorter than the lower limit period.

As a result, even if the game balls are continuously fired in a predetermined period, the number of game balls that reach the second entrance during the second variable period can be limited to one. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from entering the second entrance during the second variable period.

In any of the gaming machines b4 to b6, the second variable state setting means is the second variable so that the period during which the variable means is set at the second position is shorter than that of the first variable state. A gaming machine b7 characterized in that it sets a state.

According to the gaming machine b7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines b4 to b6, the second variable state is set so that the period in which the variable means is set to the second position is shorter than that of the first variable state. Since it is set by the second variable state setting means, it is possible to make it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second entry port in a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the player from letting the game ball flow down to the second flow path with the aim of becoming the second privilege game in a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines b1 to b7, the suppressing means is the result of the lottery after the lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance during the predetermined period is started by the lottery means. The gaming machine b8 is provided with a lottery period variable means for varying the period until the player appears so that the period until the player appears is longer than that after the predetermined period ends.

According to the gaming machine b8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines b1 to b7, a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance during a predetermined period is started by the lottery means, and then the result of the lottery. Since the period until the game is played is changed by the lottery period variable means so as to be longer than after the predetermined period ends, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance in the predetermined period, and the predetermined period is determined. After the end of the period, it is possible to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second entrance. Therefore, it is possible to launch the ball aiming at the second flow path after the end of the predetermined period without aiming at the second flow path during the predetermined period. Therefore, since the method of launching the game ball can be changed according to the period, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine b8, the lottery period variable means determines the result of the lottery after the lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance after the predetermined period ends is started by the lottery means. The gaming machine b9 is characterized in that the period until exiting is shorter than when a lottery is performed based on the gaming ball entering the first entrance.

According to the gaming machine b9, the lottery period is the period from the start of the lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance after the predetermined period ends by the lottery means until the result of the lottery is obtained. Since the variable means is variable so as to be shorter than when the lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance, the game ball is moved to the first flow path in a predetermined period. It is possible to increase the game efficiency when it is made to flow down. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow down to the first flow path until the predetermined period elapses, and the game ball can be made to flow down to the second flow path after the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, since the method of launching the game ball can be changed according to the period, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic c group> (Direction when the number of games is released)
The entrance where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter into the entrance, and the first position where the game ball is more difficult to enter into the entrance than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to two positions, a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a lottery means that executes a lottery based on the passing means of the game ball, and a lottery result determined by the lottery means. Based on the above, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and then the control to change the variable means from the first position to the second position is executed one or more times. The control means and the mode from the passage of the gaming ball through the passing means to the end of the control by the variable control means are set in the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is satisfied. Based on this, the aspect setting means for setting the second aspect different from the first aspect, and the game effect such that it is difficult to determine from the game effect that the first aspect has been set by the aspect setting means. A gaming machine c1 characterized in that it includes an effect setting means for setting.

Here, when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit, the gaming machine such as a pachinko machine shifts to the winning state, and the time is shortened after the big hit is completed. There is something that shifts to a state that is advantageous for the player, such as a probabilistic state. Among such gaming machines, there is one that notifies whether the state of the gaming machine is an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state for the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-24830).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the player can easily detect whether or not the player is in a disadvantageous state, the player who senses the disadvantageous state may easily quit the game. rice field. In addition, a player who intends to start a game may be reluctant to play a game on a gaming machine that is in a disadvantageous state. That is, there is a risk that the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease.

On the other hand, according to the game machine c1, the variable control means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entrance at the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry port and the ball entry port than at the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position. A lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. After that, the control for changing from the first position to the second position is executed once or a plurality of times by the variable control means. As a mode from the passage of the game ball through the passing means to the end of control by the variable control means, the mode setting means is set to the first mode until a specific condition is satisfied. Further, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the mode setting means sets the second mode different from the first mode. Here, a game effect is set by the effect setting means so that it is difficult to determine from the game effect that the first aspect has been set by the mode setting means.

As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to determine from the production whether the first aspect is set or the second aspect is set. Therefore, whether the first aspect is set for the player or not. The game can be played while anticipating whether the second aspect will be set. Therefore, since the player can feel the enjoyment of predicting the mode, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine c1, a specific lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and a privileged game in which a player can acquire a predetermined game value based on a specific lottery result obtained by the specific lottery means. As the privileged game granting means to be granted and the privileged game granted by the privileged game granting means, the first privileged game, the second privileged game, and the third privileged game, which is easier to obtain the game value than the second privileged game. Based on the privilege game selection means capable of selecting at least the privilege game and the privilege game granting means granting the first privilege game, it is difficult for the privilege game selection means to select the third privilege game. Based on the fact that the specific condition is set to the first state in which the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied and the second privilege game is given, the third privilege game is difficult to be selected, and the specific condition is satisfied more than in the first state. A state setting means for setting an easy second state and setting the third privilege game to a third state in which the third privilege game is more likely to be selected as compared with the first state and the second state based on the establishment of the specific condition. The mode setting means sets the first aspect based on the second privilege game being granted by the privilege game granting means, and the effect setting means sets the second privilege. The gaming machine c2 is characterized in that a gaming effect is set so that it is difficult to determine from the gaming effect that the game has been granted.

According to the gaming machine c2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine c1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the privilege game that the player can acquire the predetermined game value based on the specific lottery result obtained by the specific lottery means is given the privilege game. Granted by means. As the privilege games given by the privilege game granting means, the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game which is easier to acquire the game value as compared with the second privilege game are selected by the privilege game selection means. At least selected. Based on the fact that the first privilege game is given by the privilege game granting means, the third privilege game is hard to be selected by the privilege game selection means, and the state setting means sets the first state in which the privilege condition is hard to be satisfied. Further, based on the grant of the second privilege game, the third privilege game is difficult to be selected, and the state setting means sets the second state in which the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state. Further, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the state setting means sets the third state in which the third privilege game is more likely to be selected as compared with the first state and the second state. The first aspect is set by the mode setting means based on the fact that the second privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. A game effect is set by the effect setting means so that it is difficult to determine from the game effect that the second privilege game has been granted.

This makes it difficult to determine from the game effect whether the current state is the first state or the second state. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not a specific condition is likely to be satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game at that time because it is determined that the current state is the first state in which the specific condition is less likely to be satisfied than the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult to quit the game and the operating rate of the game machine can be improved.

In the game machine c1 or c2, a first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path and provided with the ball entry port, and the first flow path. The specific lottery means includes a specific entry port provided in the flow path and capable of entering the game ball, and the specific lottery means is based on the game ball entering the entry port or the specific entry port. The lottery is executed, and the privilege game selection means goes to the specific entrance when the specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery executed based on entering the ball into the entrance. It is easier to select the third privilege game than the specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery executed based on entering the ball, and the aspect setting means is the predetermined aspect as the first aspect. A mode is set in which the probability of a lottery result is high and the period during which the variable means is changed to the first position is short when the predetermined lottery result is obtained, and as the second mode, the predetermined lottery result A mode in which the probability of becoming is lower than that of the first aspect, and the period during which the variable means is changed to the first position when the predetermined lottery result is obtained is longer than that of the first aspect. When the probability that the predetermined lottery result is obtained based on the setting and the first privilege game is given is lower than that of the first aspect, and the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the variable means is said to be the variable means. The period variable to the first position is set to the third aspect in which the length is equal to or less than the first aspect, and in the second aspect, the game ball enters the entrance of the ball more than the first aspect. A game machine c3 characterized by being easy to ball.

According to the gaming machine c3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines c1 or c2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a specific ball entry port into which a game ball can enter is provided in the first flow path, and a ball entry port is provided in a second flow path different from the first flow path. A lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the game ball entering the specific entrance or the entrance. When a specific lottery result is obtained by a lottery executed based on entering a ball into a ball entrance, a specific lottery result is obtained by a lottery executed based on entering a specific ball entrance. The third privilege game is more likely to be selected by the privilege game selection means. As the first aspect, the aspect setting means sets an aspect in which the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result is high and the period in which the variable means is changed to the first position is short when the predetermined lottery result is obtained. Further, as the second aspect, the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result is lower than that of the first aspect, and the period in which the variable means is changed to the first position when the predetermined lottery result is obtained is the first aspect. A relatively long aspect is set by the aspect setting means. Further, the probability that a predetermined lottery result will be obtained based on the first privilege game is given is lower than that in the first aspect, and when the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the variable means is changed to the first position. The period is set to the third aspect in which the length is equal to or less than the first aspect. Here, in the second aspect, the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entrance than in the first aspect.

As a result, when the second mode in which the game ball easily enters the ball entrance is set, the game ball is allowed to flow down the second flow path, and the first mode and the third mode are set. If so, the game ball can flow down the first flow path. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the flow path to flow down according to the set mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine c3, the game is based on the determination means that can determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied before the specific condition is satisfied and the determination means that the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine c4 is provided with a notification means for notifying a person to stop flowing the gaming ball into the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine c4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine c3, whether or not the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the discriminating means before the specific condition is satisfied, and it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the discriminating means. Based on the above, the notification means notifies the player to stop the game ball from flowing down to the first flow path.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lottery based on the entry into the specific entry port from being executed by the specific lottery means after the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first privilege game or the second privilege game from being given and the first mode or the third aspect being set due to the result of the specific lottery by the lottery by the specific lottery means. .. Therefore, after the specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the player can fully enjoy the second aspect in which the game ball easily enters the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine c4, the lottery is performed by the specific lottery means with the acquisition means for acquiring the information for executing the lottery by the specific lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition and the information acquired by the recording acquisition means. The embodiment includes a storage means that can store up to a predetermined upper limit value and a prediction means that can predict the lottery result by the specific lottery means based on the acquisition of information by the acquisition means. Based on the provision of the predetermined second privilege game, the setting means sets the first aspect until the specific lottery means continuously produces a lottery result different from the specific lottery result a predetermined number of times. Then, after the second privilege game is granted, the second aspect is set based on the result of the out-of-lot lottery being continuously obtained a predetermined number of times by the specific lottery means, and the determination means is said. Based on the prediction result by the prediction means, it is determined whether or not the loss lottery result is continuously obtained a predetermined number of times, and the notification means continuously determines the loss lottery result by the determination means. The gaming machine c5 is characterized in that it notifies the player to stop flowing the gaming ball into the first flow path based on the determination that the information becomes.

According to the gaming machine c5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine c4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information for executing the lottery by the specific lottery means is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is predetermined until the lottery by the specific lottery means is performed. Up to the upper limit of is stored by the storage means. The lottery result by the specific lottery means is predicted by the prediction means based on the information being acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the provision of the predetermined second privilege game, the first mode is set by the mode setting means until the result of the lottery is different from the result of the specific lottery for a predetermined number of times in a row by the specific lottery means. Further, after the second privilege game is given, the second aspect is set by the aspect setting means based on the fact that the lottery means continuously loses a predetermined number of times and the lottery result is obtained. Based on the prediction result by the prediction means, the determination means determines whether or not the lottery result is continuously lost a predetermined number of times. Based on the determination by the determination means that the result is a lottery result that is continuously removed a predetermined number of times, the notification means notifies the player to stop flowing the game ball into the first flow path.

As a result, after the first aspect is completed, it is possible to prevent the specific lottery means from executing the lottery for entering the ball into the specific entry slot based on the information stored by the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first privilege game or the second privilege game from being given and the first mode or the third aspect being set due to the result of the specific lottery by the lottery by the specific lottery means. .. Therefore, after the specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the player can fully enjoy the second aspect in which the game ball easily enters the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine c5, based on the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of consecutive times of the out-of-lot lottery result after the end of the second privilege game, the number of consecutive times determined by the number-of-times determining means, and the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine c6 is provided with an effect mode setting means for setting an aspect of a game effect executed by the effect execution means.

According to the gaming machine c6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine c5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of consecutive times of the loss lottery result after the end of the second privilege game is determined by the number-of-times determination means, and is executed by the effect executing means based on the number of consecutive times determined by the number-of-times determination means and the predetermined number of times. The mode of the game effect is set by the effect mode setting means.

As a result, it is possible to give the player the enjoyment of predicting the remaining number of times up to a predetermined number of times based on the mode of the game effect set by the effect mode setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine c5 or c6, the effect setting means includes a dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the specific lottery means, and the effect setting means indicates the second privilege game. The gaming machine c7 is characterized in that, as the identification information, the same identification information as the identification information indicating the lost lottery result can be set as the identification information indicating the lottery result.

According to the gaming machine c7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine c5 or c6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the effect setting means, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the specific lottery means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. As the identification information indicating the second privilege game, the same identification information as the identification information indicating the out-of-lot lottery result is set by the effect setting means as the identification information indicating the lottery result.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the second privilege game is more difficult to obtain the game value than the third privilege game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because it is difficult to obtain the game value.

In any of the gaming machines c1 to c7, when the third aspect is set by the state setting means, the effect setting means is different from the case where the first aspect and the second state are set. A gaming machine c8, characterized in that it sets different modes of gaming effects.

According to the gaming machine c8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines c1 to c7, when the third aspect is set by the state setting means, the first aspect and the second state are set. Since the mode of the game effect different from the above is set by the effect setting means, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the game is in an advantageous state in which the third privilege game is likely to occur.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A18, B1 to B7, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E8, a1 to a6, b1 to b9, and c1 to c8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A18, B1 to B7, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E8, a1 to a6, b1 to b9, and c1 to c8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A18, B1 to B7, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E8, a1 to a6, b1 to b9, and c1 to c8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being fused. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are either a normal state in which the hit state is drawn with a normal probability or a probability fluctuation state in which the hit state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392).
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in both the normal state and the probability fluctuation state, the state does not change unless the hit state is reached, so either the normal state or the probability fluctuation state is set. Even so, it was necessary to play the game in the same state until it became a hit state. Therefore, the game becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player's interest in the game cannot be improved.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and a game based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. A privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, a first game state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a second game that is advantageous to a player that is different from the first game state. A game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a state, and when at least the first game state is set, the game state is set as a trigger of the end of the privilege game. When the first changing means that can be changed to the second gaming state and at least the first gaming state are set, the second gaming state that can be changed to the second gaming state at a predetermined trigger different from the end of the privilege game. 2 Provide means for changing.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 includes a predetermined determining means for determining whether or not to change the gaming state based on a predetermined probability in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the second changing means is the predetermined. The change to the second gaming state is triggered by the determination that the gaming state is changed by the determination means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, and the second changing means does not change the gaming state when the second gaming state is set. be.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and the first changing means gives the second gaming state changed by the second changing means the privilege. It is possible to change to the first game state when the game ends.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, and after the end of the privilege game, the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result which is the determination result other than the specific determination result. By a counting means for counting It is provided with a third changing means for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to a third gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state when it is determined that the predetermined number of times has been reached.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the judgment is executed by the judgment means based on the establishment of the judgment condition, and the privilege game execution means is based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a specific judgment result. A privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed. From a plurality of game states including at least a first game state advantageous to the player and a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, one game state is set by the game state setting means. Is set. When at least the first gaming state is set, it is changed to the second gaming state by the first changing means when the privilege game ends. Further, when at least the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is changed by the second changing means at a predetermined trigger different from the end of the privilege game.
As a result, at least in the first state, the game state is changed to the second game state at a plurality of different triggers, so that the chance of the game state being changed can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, it is determined whether or not to change the gaming state by the predetermined determining means based on a predetermined probability, and when it is determined that the gaming state is changed by the predetermined determining means, the second game is played by the second changing means. It is changed to the state.
This has the effect that the player can be expected to be changed to the second gaming state each time the determination by the predetermined determination means is executed.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, when the second gaming state is set, the gaming state can be changed by the second changing means. Since it is not performed, there is an effect that it is possible to easily change from the first gaming state to the second gaming state as compared with the case where the second gaming state is changed to the first gaming state.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any of Technical Thoughts 1 to 3, the second gaming state changed by the second changing means is the end of the privilege game. Since the game is changed to the first gaming state by the first changing means, the game can be performed in the second gaming state with the expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game in the second game state from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Thoughts 1 to 4. That is, after the end of the privilege game, the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result, which is a determination result other than the specific determination result, is counted by the counting means. When the predetermined number of times determination means determines whether or not the number of consecutive deviation determination results counted by the counting means in the first game state has reached the predetermined number of times, and the predetermined number of times determination means determines that the predetermined number of times has been reached. , The gaming state is changed to the third gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, by the third changing means.
As a result, in the first gaming state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the disengagement determination result will be a specific determination result before the predetermined number of consecutive times, or the transition to the second gaming state will occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game in the first game state from becoming monotonous.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
S213 Bonus game execution means S303, S304 discrimination means
S307, S309 Specified game execution means S323 Change determination means S324 State setting means S1121 State setting means, specific state changing means

Claims (2)

Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of discrimination conditions,
A specific game execution means for executing a specific game for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a specific game execution means.
Based on the game result of the specific game being a game result corresponding to a predetermined specific determination result, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and a privilege game execution means.
As state after game state is completed about the benefits game, a first state and a second state which is advantageous to the player than the first state, capable of setting a plurality Urn Chi 1 conditions including at least a State setting means and
A state setting means for setting the second state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition at least different from the execution of the privilege game in the first state is provided.
Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in the first state, it corresponds to the number of game times of the specific game corresponding to the specified condition that is satisfied regardless of the time when the specific condition is satisfied in the first game state. By setting at least the second state, the degree of advantage is likely to be higher than in the case where the specific condition is not satisfied and the first state continues in the first state.
Regardless of the time when the specific condition is satisfied in the first game state, the game is that the degree of advantage is higher than when the first state is continued based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in the first state. Ri executable der the specific effect that can be suggested to the person,
The specific condition, the gaming machine characterized by conditions der Rukoto capable established at a predetermined probability for each said discrimination condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine can be played using a predetermined gaming medium.

Images